Home

"user manual"

1. 2 16 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Main circuit terminals Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring R L1 S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W T3 B1 B2 Models Wire Torque Wire type VFD055E23A 43A VFD075E23A 43A VFDIIOE23A 43A 6 16 AWG 30kgf cm pons VFD055E23C 43C 1333 1 3mm 26in Ibf Only 75 C VFD075E23C 43C VFD110E23C 43C Pra Fra meD Ve 2 4 Control Terminals To connect 6 AWG 13 3 mm wires use Recognized Ring Terminals Main circuit terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W T3 B1 B2 Circuit diagram for digital inputs NPN current 16 NPN Mode multi input terminal Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Models Wire Torque Wire type VFD150E23A 23C VFD150E43A 43C 4 14 AWG 57kgf cm Stranded 21 2 VFD185E43A 43C 2 1mm 49 5110 Only 75 C VFD220E43A 43C PNP Mode DOW Multi Input A A i Terminal 1 i J zoo e eee a P a E 24 Inter
2. D 56 Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Operands D Device to be rotated Number of bits to be rotated in 1 rotation Explanations 1 This instruction rotates the device content designated by D to the left for n bits 2 This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions Program Example When goes from Off to On the 16 bits 4 bits as a group in D10 will rotate to the left as shown in the figure below The bit marked with zx will be sent to carry flag M1022 Rotate to the left upper bit lower bit M1022 1 0 0 0 0 p10 x j 1 E 16 bits After one rotation upper bit fothellent lower bit M1022 Ok 1 1 1 1 1 p10 flag D 5 11 Special Application Commands for the AC Motor Drive API Mnemonic Operands Function 53 DHSCS S1 S2 D Compare for high speed counter Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps x Y M K KnX KnM T D DHSCS 13 steps 1 S2 x D Operands S1 Comparison Value S2 High speed counter C235 D Comparison result Explanations 1 It needs optional PG card to receive external input pulse 2 count automatically please set the target value by using DHSCS
3. stops according to 1 operation decel eration time operation free run to stop command command EF EF When Pr 02 02 is set to 2 or 3 When 02 02 is set to 0 or 1 0203 PWM Carrier Frequency Selections Unit 1 115V 230V 460V Series Power 0 25 to 15hp 0 2kW to 11kW Setting Range 1 to 15 kHz Factory Setting 8 kHz This parameter determines the PWM carrier frequency of the AC motor drive 4 62 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 En Chapter 4 Parameters Carrier Acoustic Electromagnetic Heat Current Frequency Noise Noise or leakage Dissipation Wave current 1kHz Significant Minimal Minimal AAA Minimal 8kHz 15kHz Minimal Significant Significant Significant From the table we see that the PWM carrier frequency has a significant influence on the electromagnetic noise AC motor drive heat dissipation and motor acoustic noise The PWM carrier frequency will be decreased automatically by heat sink temperature and output current of the AC motor drive It is used as a necessary precaution to prevent the AC motor drive from overheating and thus extends IGBT s life If the user wants to fix carrier within the rated range and won t change by the change of the surrounding temperature and frequently load Please refer to Pr 02 18 for Selection of Carrier Modulation Related parameters Pr 02 18 Selection of Carrier Modulation and Pr 03 08 Fan Control
4. Byte 0 1 2 3 5 6 7 Content Emergency Error Error register Code Manufacturer specific Error Field Object 1001H Definition of Emergency Object Controller x CANopen webs Display Error Description Error Register Code Code bit 0 7 0001H Over current 7400H 1 ow 0002H Over voltage 7400H 2 oH 0003H Overheating 4310H 3 0005H Overload 2310H 1 ot i 0006H Overload 1 7120H 1 0007H Overload 2 2310H 1 EF 0008H External Fault 9000H 7 oc 0009H Over current during acceleration 2310H 1 000AH Over current during deceleration 2310H 1 000BH Over current during constant speed 2310H 1 operation 000CH Ground fault 2240H 1 000DH Lower than standard voltage 3220h 2 PHL OO0EH Phase Loss 3130h 7 bh 000FH External Base Block 9000h 7 codE 0011H Software protection failure 6320h 7 cF iG 0013H Internal EEPROM can not be 5530h 7 programmed cFelj 0014H Internal EEPROM can not be read 5530h 7 H E 0015H current clamp 5000h 7 HPFg2 0016H hardware error 5000h 2 HPF3 0017H GFF hardware error 5000h 2 HPF 4 0018H hardware error 5000h 1 cF 30 0019H error 2300h 1 cF31 001AH V phase error 2300h 1 32 001BH W phase error 2300h 1 cF33 001CH OVorLV 3210h 2 cF34 001DH sensor error 4310h 3 cE 11 001FH Internal EEPROM can not be 5530h 7 programmed Revisio
5. M1 reactor Y Y AC motor drive matr a M2 fo ON 0 E Y Y AC motor drive motor 4 NA Mn Pan CY Y AC motor drive Application 2 Question Silicon rectifier and AC motor drive are connected to the same power Switching spikes will be generated when the silicon rectifier switches on off These spikes may damage the mains circuit Correct wiring Silicon Controlled Rectifier S power reactor yc WY _ OM DC SCA CA AC motor drive reactor fs CY YN 4 motor A 3 Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 B 15 Appendix B Accessories B 16 Application 3 Question Used to improve the input power factor to reduce harmonics and provide protection from AC line disturbances surges switching spikes short interruptions etc The AC line reactor should be installed when the power supply capacity is 500kVA or more and exceeds 6 times the inverter capacity or the mains wiring distance lt 10m When the mains power capacity is too large line impedance will be small and the charge current will be too high This may damage AC motor drive due to higher rectifier temperature Correct wiring large capacity power reactor aaa TV MY small capacity AC motor drive LM motor Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 B
6. MOV K10 X1 MOV TO D10 API Mnemonic Operands Function 15 BMOV P S D n Block Move Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps x y M K H Kny KnM D BMOV 7 steps D a esl 2 e We Operands S Start of source devices D Start of destination devices n Number of data to be moved Explanations 1 Range of n 1 512 2 See the specifications of each model for their range of use 3 The contents in n registers starting from the device designated by S will be moved to n registers starting from the device designated by D If n exceeds the actual number of available source devices only the devices that fall within the valid range will be used Program Example 1 When X10 On the contents in registers DO D3 will be moved to the 4 registers D20 D23 X10 Heno DO D20 K4 Program Example 2 Assume the bit devices KnX KnY KnM and KnS are designated for moving the number of digits of S and D has to be the same i e their n has to be the same Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 D 49 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function M1000 Program Example 3 swov 020 MO YO M1 Yi M2 v2 M3 gt Y3 4 Y4 M5 Y5 n 3 M6 v6 M7 YT M8 Y10 M9 Y11 M10 Y12 M11 v13
7. Motor Rated Current Motor 1 Unit 1 Settings 30 FLA to 120 FLA Factory Setting FLA No load Current Motor 1 Unit 1 Settings 096 FLA to 9096 FLA Factory Setting 0 4 FLA Torque Compensation Motor 1 Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0 Factory Setting 0 0 EZE X Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 1 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 10 00 Factory Setting 0 00 Motor Line to line Resistance R1 Motor 1 Unit 1 Settings 0 to 65535 mO Factory Setting 0 Motor Rated Slip Motor 1 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 20 00Hz Factory Setting 3 00 Motor Pole Number Motor 1 Unit 1 Settings 2 to 10 Factory Setting 4 Motor Rated Current Motor 2 Unit 1 Settings 30 FLA to 120 FLA Factory Setting FLA 07 26 Motor No load Current Motor 2 Unit 1 Settings 096 FLA to 9096 FLA Factory Setting 0 4 FLA X Torque Compensation Motor 2 Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0 Factory Setting 0 0 EZE Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 2 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 10 00 Factory Setting 0 00 Motor Line to line Resistance R1 Motor 2 Unit 1 Settings 0 to 65535 mO Factory Setting 0 Motor Rated Slip Motor 2 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 20 00Hz Factory Setting 3 00 Motor Pole Number Motor 2 Unit 1 Settings 2 to 10 Factory Setting 4 Motor Rated Current Motor 3 Unit 1 Settings 30 FLA to 120 FLA Factory Setting FLA 07 33 Motor No load Current Motor 3 Unit 1 Settings 096 FLA to 9096 FLA Factory
8. Function 03H Starting data address 21H 02H Number of data 00H count by word 02H CRC CHK Low 6FH CRC CHK High F7H CRC Cyclical Redundancy Check is calculated by the following steps Step 1 Load a 16 bit register called CRC register with FFFFH Step 2 Exclusive OR the first 8 bit byte of the command message with the low order byte of the 16 bit CRC register putting the result in the CRC register Step 3 Examine the LSB of CRC register Step 4 If the LSB of register is 0 shift the register one bit to the right with MSB zero filling then repeat step 3 If the LSB of CRC register is 1 shift the CRC register one bit to the right with MSB zero filling Exclusive OR the CRC register with the polynomial value A001H then repeat step 3 Step 5 Repeat step 3 and 4 until eight shifts have been performed When this is done a complete 8 bit byte will have been processed Step 6 Repeat step 2 to 5 for the next 8 bit byte of the command message Continue doing this until all bytes have been processed The final contents of the CRC register are the CRC value When transmitting the CRC value in the message the upper and lower bytes of the CRC value must be swapped i e the lower order byte will be transmitted first The following is an example of CRC generation using C language The function takes two arguments Unsigned char data a pointer to the message buffer Unsigned char length the
9. Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Dail Half One Y Year Year If the wiring shows change of color change or deformation due Visual inspection to overheat If the insulation of wiring is damaged or the color has Visual inspection If there is any damage Visual inspection DC capacity of main circuit Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Dail Half One Y Year Year If there is any leakage of liquid change of color cracks or Visual inspection deformation Measure static capacity when Static capacity gt initial value X 0 85 required Resistor of main circuit Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Daily Half One Year Year If there is any peculiar smell or insulator cracks due to Visual inspection smell overheating Visual inspection or measure with multimeter after removing wiring If there is any disconnection between B1 Resistor value should be within 10 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 6 9 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance Transformer and reactor of main circuit Mag Maintenance or peculiar smell Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Dail Half One Y Year Year If there is any abnormal vibration Visual aural inspection and smell netic contactor and relay of main circuit
10. FWD STOP 9 6 REV STOP Multi step 1 Factory T 9 setting i Multi step 2 Multi step3 _ o Multi step 4 La o C Digital Signal Common B NPN mode with external power NPN 24 Hw 0 FWD STOP REV STOP Multi step 1 Factory Sr setting i Multi step 2 o Multi step3 Multi step 4 ss C PNP mode without external power NPN Hsn PNP FWD STOP REV STOP lt Multi step 1 Factory o setting Multi step 2 S Multi step3 0 O Multi step 4 5 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 2 9 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring D PNP mode with external power NPN Vise PNP E 24V FWD STOP d MI REV STOP 5 MI2 Multi step 1 T Factory P 5 5 Li MI3 setting Multi step 2 Li MI4 Multi step 3 MIB Multi step 4 5 0 MI6 m Figure 8 RJ 45 pin definition for VFD E C models PIN Signal Description 1 CAN H CAN H bus line dominant high 2 CAN L CAN L bus line dominant low 3 CAN GND Ground OV V 4 56 485 communication 5 SG 485 communication 7 CAN_GND Ground OV V 2 10 The wiring of main circuit and control circuit should be separated to prevent erroneous actions Please use shield wire for the control wiring an
11. NMT Master Start Remote Node NMT Slave s Request byteO byte 1 Indication s t CS Node ID Indication Fes COB ID 0 gt Indication gt Indication Cs Value Definition 1 Start 2 Stop 128 Enter Pre Operational 129 Reset Node 130 Reset Communication E 1 4 2 SDO Service Data Object SDO is used to access the Object Dictionary in every CANopen node by Client Server model One SDO has two COB ID request SDO and response SDO to upload or download data between two nodes No data limit for SDOs to transfer data But it needs to transfer by segment when data exceeds 4 bytes with an end signal in the last segment The Object Dictionary OD is a group of objects in CANopen node Every node has an OD in the system and OD contains all parameters describing the device and its network behavior The access path of OD is the index and sub index each object has a unique index in OD and has sub index if necessary The request and response frame structure of SDO communication is shown as follows Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Data 0 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7 1615 14 13 12110 1 1 1 Data Data Data Data command L H Sub LL LH HL HH Initiate Domain Client O 0 1 N EIS Download Server 0 1 1 Initiate Domain Client 0 1 0
12. Figure 2 For frame B VFD007E11A VFD015E21A VFD022E21A 23A 43A VFD037E23A 43A VFD007E11C VFD015E21C VFD022E21C 23C 43C VFD037E23C 43C For frame C VFD055E23A 43A VFD075E23A 43A VFD110E23A 43A VFD055E23C 43C VFD075E23C 43C VFD110E23C 43C For frame D VFD150E23A 23C VFD150E43A 43C VFD185E43A 43C VFD220E43A 43C Brake Resistor Optional Nofuse breaker MC B1 B2 Nieto E 2 R L1 U T1 es V T2 M SEES ds W T3 VE E uu Figure 3 For Frame A VFD002E11T 21T 23T VFD004E11T 21T 23T 43T VFD007E21T 23T 43T VFD015E23T 43T P BR Brake Resistor No fuse breaker oo pd MC B1 B2 R Mae u T1 Motor S SS S L2 amp ECC T T L3 wits amp rQEG GEO 2 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 2 13 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Terminal Symbol Explanation of Terminal Function R L1 S L2 T L3 AC line input terminals 1 phase 3 phase U T1 V T2 W T3 AC drive output terminals for connecting 3 phase induction motor B1 B2 Connections for Brake resistor optional B1 Connections for External Brake unit BUE series Earth connection please comply with local regulations Mains power terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 Connect these terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 via a no fuse breaker or earth leakage breaker to 3
13. 10 bit character frame 7 N 1 01 2 3 4 5 6 4 7 bit character gt 9 bit character frame X i i parity ibit ibit T bitcharacter 11 bit character frame 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 Odd Stop Stop parity bit bit amp 7 bit character 11 bit character frame 11 bit character frame For RTU Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 141 Chapter 4 Parameters 8 N 2 8 bit character 4 11 bit character frame gt 0i f121 88 w 5ib amp T 8 bit character i lt 11 bit character frame gt amp 8 bit character M 10 bit character frame gt 8 E 2 i Even Stop 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 parity bit 8 bit character gt 12 bit character frame gt 8 0 2 Odd Stop Stop E 7 parity bit bit i 8 bit character _ 4 12 bit character frame 3 Communication Protocol 3 1 Communication Data Frame ASCII mode STX Start character Address Hi Communication address Address L
14. B 4 2 AC Output Reactor Recommended Value 115V 230V 50 60Hz 3 Phase kw HP id 5d m ee Bu Amps 3 impedance 5 impedance 0 2 1 4 4 4 9 12 0 4 1 2 6 6 6 5 9 0 75 1 8 12 3 5 1 5 2 8 12 1 5 3 2 2 3 12 18 1 25 2 5 3 7 5 18 27 0 8 1 5 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 B 13 Appendix Accessories B 14 kW HP Amps 3 impedance 5 impedance 5 5 7 5 25 37 5 0 5 1 2 7 5 10 35 52 5 0 4 0 8 11 15 55 82 5 0 25 0 5 15 20 80 120 0 2 0 4 460V 50 60Hz 3 Phase kW HP ioa mou Amps 3 impedance 5 impedance 0 4 1 2 2 3 20 32 0 75 1 4 6 9 12 1 5 2 4 6 6 5 9 2 2 3 8 12 5 7 5 3 7 5 12 18 2 5 4 2 5 5 7 5 18 27 1 5 2 5 7 5 10 18 27 1 5 2 5 11 15 25 37 5 1 2 2 15 20 35 52 5 0 8 1 2 18 5 25 45 67 5 0 7 1 2 22 30 45 67 5 0 7 1 2 B 4 3 Applications Connected in input circuit Application 1 Question When more than one AC motor drive is connected to the same mains power and one of them is ON during operation When applying power to one of the AC motor drive the charge current of the capacitors may cause voltage dip The AC motor drive may be damaged when over current occurs during operation Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Correct wiring Appendix Accessories
15. Analog Output Signal AFM Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Analog Frequency Meter 0 to Maximum Output Frequency 1 Analog Current Meter 0 to 250 of rated AC motor drive current Ea This parameter sets the function of the AFM output 0 10VDC ACM is common Refer to Pr 03 04 for applications Related parameters Pr 01 00 Maximum Output Frequency Fmax and Pr 03 04 Analog Output Gain 03 04 Analog Output Gain Unit 1 Settings 1 to 20096 Factory Setting 100 Ea This parameter sets the voltage range of the analog output signal AFM Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 75 Chapter 4 Parameters When Pr 03 03 is set to 0 the analog output voltage is directly proportional to the output frequency of the AC motor drive With Pr 03 04 set to 100 the Maximum Output Frequency Pr 01 00 of the AC motor drive corresponds to 10VDC on the AFM output Similarly if Pr 03 03 is set to 1 the analog output voltage is directly proportional the output current of the AC drive With Pr 03 04 set to 100 then 2 5 times the rated current corresponds to 10 on the AFM output gt fra Any type of voltmeter can be used If the meter reads full scale at a voltage less than 10V Pr 03 04 should be set using the following formula Pr 03 04 meter full scale voltage 10 x 10096 For Example When using the meter with full scale of 5 volts adjust Pr 03 04 to 50 If Pr 03 03
16. OUT command Operation Contact result Coil A contact normally open B contact normally closed FALSE OFF Non continuity Continuity TRUE ON Continuity Non continuity Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 D 35 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation XO X1 LDI Load contact B of XO od I Cn AND X1 Connect to contact A of X1 in series OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function SET Latch ON X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand EE Y Y Explanations When the SET command is driven its specific device is set to be ON which will keep ON whether the SET command is still driven You can use the RST command to set the device to OFF Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation Xo YO LD X0 Load contact A of Hi ANI YO Connect to contact B of YO in series SET Y1 Y1 latch ON Mnemonic Function RST Clear the contacts or the registers X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand Y Y Y Y D 36 Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Explanations When the RST command is driven motion of its specific device is as follows Device Status Coil and contact will be set to OFF Present values of the timer or counter TC
17. Upload Server 0 1 0 N EIS Abort Domain Client 1 00 Transfer Server 1 0 0 iH N Bytes not use E normal 0 expedited 1 S size indicated E 1 4 3 PDO Process Data Object PDO communication can be described by the producer consumer model Each node of the network will listen to the messages of the transmission node and distinguish if the message has to be processed or not after receiving the message PDO can be transmitted from one device to one another device or to many other devices Every PDO has two PDO services a TxPDO and a RxPDO PDOs are transmitted in a non confirmed mode PDO Transmission type is defined in the PDO communication parameter index 1400h for the 1st RxPDO or 1800h for the 1st TxPDO and all transmission types are listed in the following table Type Number 289 Cyclic Acyclic Synchronous RTR only 0 O 1 240 O 241 251 Reserved 252 O O 253 O O 254 255 Type number 1 240 indicates the number of SYNC message between two transmissions Type number 252 indicates the data is updated but not sent immediately after receiving SYNC Type number 253 indicates the data is updated immediately after receiving RTR Type number 254 Delta CANopen doesn t support this transmission format Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW
18. need rere egere reden dede rts B 38 B112 MKEPDBB iii Ete B 39 rne e d e eee E B 39 Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive C 1 C 1 Capacity Formulas Sissener aeneipennis eprint aeaiiai pen C 2 C 2 General Precautlon oiii tepore eed peces C 4 How to Choose a Suitable C 5 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function eere D 1 DA PLC Overview eerie pee Hee ener D 1 D 1 1 Introduction iieri e teen D 1 D 1 2 Ladder Diagram Editor 0 D 1 D2 Startup de eere tete ret tapete D 2 0 2 1 The Steps for PLC Execution D 2 0 2 2 Device Reference Table D 3 0 2 3 WPLSoft Installation D 4 2 4 Program Input niteretur eas D 4 0 2 5 Program Download sss D 5 0 2 6 Program Monitor ssssssssseeseeeeeeeren ener D 5 D 2 7 The Limit of PLC 22 eb bh Eu D 5 D 3 Ladder Diagratm iioc 0 7 0 3 1 Program Scan Chart of the PLC Ladder Diagram D 7 D 3 2 Introd ctioh 1 eicit ine ee Ree D 7 0 3 3 The Edition of
19. 50 C with mounting method A 7096 40 C with mounting method B 60 Rated Current 50 40 gt Carrier 2kHz 6kHz 10kHz 14kHz 15kHz Frequency 4kHz 8kHz 12kHz For 115V 230V Series Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 71 Chapter 4 Parameters 4 72 A 100 25 C with mounting method A 15 C with mounting method B 90 2 80 35 C with mounting method A 5 25 with mounting method B 5 70 o 50 C with mounting method A 5 60 40 C with mounting method c u 4096 gt Carrier 2kHz 6kHz 10kHz 14kHz15kHz Frequency 4kHz 8kHz 12kHz For 460V Series Setting 1 to prevent the AC motor drive from overheating and thus extends IGBT s life and also prevent carrier change and motor noise due to surrounding temperature and frequently load change it needs to use this setting Please refer to the following figure for the selection of carrier frequency and rated current For example when carrier frequency should be kept in 15Hz the rated current of the AC motor drive must be 6596 That means the rated current for over load is 150 6596 297 596 Thus the rated current should be within the range of the following figure to keep the carrier frequency at a fix frequency Related parameter Pr 02 03 PWM Carrier Frequency Selections 1008 E LI LI LJ LI LI 95 90 85 80 T 75 ii 70 n 65 60 1 2 3 4 5 6
20. 2 e ed ted coc dace d det ed i Table of Contents eene nennen nennen nnn iii Chapter 1 Introduction 2 nn accen ecu 1 1 1 1 Receiving and Inspection 1 2 1 1 1 Nameplate Information 1 2 1 1 2 Model Explanation ssssssssssseeeenemeeenn 1 2 1 1 3 Series Number Explanation 1 3 1 1 4 Drive Frames and Appearances 1 3 1 1 5 Remove Instructions sssee mee 1 7 1 2 Preparation for Installation and Wiring 1 9 1 2 1 Ambient nii 1 9 1 2 2 DC bus Sharing Connecting the DC bus of the AC Motor Drives in Parallel itti ee HR diee YE eode ere eet 1 12 1 3 DimensiOns tene ree dae Wah conte e 1 13 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 2 1 ZV MIrlrigr iieri E REX RU RUE NA ee ERE 2 2 2 2 External Wiring Dalee a seb Pt da 2 12 2 3 Mall CInCUitss aia baaa 2 13 2 3 1 Main Circuit Connection eeesseee ee 2 13 2 3 2 Main Circuit Terminals eese 2 16 2 4 Control Terminals
21. 2 Pull the cover up to release Remove Front Cover Step 1 Step 2 Remove RST Terminal Cover For Frame B Frame C and Frame D it only needs to turn the cover lightly to open it For frame A it doesn t have cover and can be wired directly Remove UVW Terminal Cover For Frame B Frame C and Frame D it only needs to turn the cover light to open the cover For frame A it doesn t have cover and can be wired directly Remove Fan For Frame A Frame B Frame C and Frame D press and hold in the tabs on each side of the fan and pull the fan up to release Remove Extension Card For Frame A Frame B Frame C and Frame D press and hold in the tabs on each side of the extension card and pull the extension card up to release On the other hand it can install the extension card into the AC motor drive with Screws Chapter 1 Introduction 1 2 Preparation for Installation and Wiring 1 2 1 Ambient Conditions Install the AC motor drive in an environment with the following conditions Operation Storage Transportation Pollution Degree Air Temperature Relative Humidity Atmosphere pressure Installation Site Altitude Vibration Temperature Relative Humidity Atmosphere pressure Vibration 10 50 C 14 122 F for UL amp cUL 10 40 C 14 104 F for side by side mounting lt 90 no condensation allowed 86 106 kPa l
22. Application commands 10 hundreds us Program Language Instruction Ladder Logic SFC Including the Step commands Program Capacity 500 STEPS SRAM Battery Commands 45 commands 28 basic commands 17 application commands Input Output Contact Input X 6 output Y 2 X0 X17 16 points Correspond to external 3 External Input Relay octal number system Total is input point 32 Y External Output Relay YO Y17 16 points points Correspond to external octal number system output point M0 M159 160 For general points Total is M Auxiliary 192 Contacts can switch to M1000 M1031 32 points ff in program For special points 3 When the timer E Total is Massa AM 5 command attains the T Timer 100ms timer TO T15 16 points 16 setting the T contact 5 points with the same number a will be On 16 bit count up for CO C7 8 points Total is ER points When the counter p 1 phase input indicated by CNT C Counter um p a command attains the E tting the C tact up down PhaSe 2 235 1 point need Total is 119 16 contac inputs k With the same number high to use with PG card 4 point will be On Speed bhase 2 counter inputs D 18 Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Items Sp
23. Check Items Methods and Criterion Maintenance Period Daily Half Year One Year If there are any loose screws Visual and aural inspection Tighten Screw if necessary If the contact works correctly Visual inspection Printed circuit board and connector of main circuit 6 10 Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Dail Half One Y Year Year If there are any loose screws and Tighten the screws and press the connectors connectors firmly in place If there is any peculiar smell and color change Visual inspection and smell If there is any crack damage r deformation or corrosion Visual inspection 9 If there is any leaked liquid or Visual inspection deformation in capacitors Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Cooling fan of cooling system Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance Check Items Methods and Criterion Maintenance Period Daily Half Year One Year If there is any abnormal sound or Visual aural inspection and turn the fan with hand turn off the power to overheating vibration before operation to see if it rotates 2 smoothly If there is any loose screw Tighten the screw O If there is any change of color due Change fan Ventilation channel of cooling system Maintenance Period Check Items Me
24. ERROR indicator SP Scan Port indicator Baud rate switch 9 6e o0 6 0 80 O0 Unit mm Address switch B 10 4 2 Specifications CANopen Connection Interface Pluggable connector 5 08mm Transmission method CAN Transmission cable 2 wire twisted shielded cable Electrical isolation 500V DC B 34 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix B Accessories Communication Process Data Objects 10 Kbps PDO 20 Kbps Service Data Object 50 Kbps SDO 125 Kbps Message type Synchronization 250 Kbps rate SYNC 500 Kbps Emergency EMCY 800 Kbps Network Management 1 Mbps NMT Product code Delta VFD E AC motor drive 22 Device type 402 Vendor ID 477 Environmental Specifications Noise Immunity Environment Vibration Shock Resistance Certifications ESD IEC 61131 2 IEC 61000 4 2 8KV Air Discharge EFT IEC 61131 2 IEC 61000 4 4 Power Line 2KV Digital 1 0 1KV Analog amp Communication I O 1KV Damped Oscillatory Wave Power Line 1KV Digital 1 0 1KV RS IEC 61131 2 IEC 61000 4 3 26MHz 1GHz 10V m Operation 0 C 55 C Temperature 50 95 Humidity Pollution degree 2 Storage 40 C 70 C Temperature 5 95 Humidity Standard IEC1131 2 IEC 68 2 6 TEST Fc IEC1131 2 amp IEC 68 2 27 TEST Ea Standard IEC 61131 2 UL508 B 10 4 3 Components Pin Definition on CANopen Conne
25. Settings Read Only Factory setting Pr 00 00 displays the identity code of the AC motor drive The capacity rated current rated voltage and the max carrier frequency relate to the identity code Users can use the following table to check how the rated current rated voltage and max carrier frequency of the AC motor drive correspond to the identity code m Pr 00 01 displays the rated current of the AC motor drive By reading this parameter the user can check if the AC motor drive is correct 115V Series 230V Series kW 0 2 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 5 5 7 5 11 15 HP 0 25 0 5 1 0 2 0 3 0 5 0 7 5 10 15 20 Pr 00 00 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 Rated Output Current A 1 6 2 5 4 2 7 5 11 0 17 25 33 45 65 Max Carrier 45kHz Frequency 460V Series kW 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 5 5 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 HP 0 5 1 0 2 0 3 0 5 0 7 5 10 15 20 25 30 Pr 00 00 3 5 7 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 Rated Output 45 55 42 55 5 13 18 24 32 45 Current A Max Carrier 15kHz Frequency ETE Parameter Reset Settings 0 1 6 9 Factory Setting 0 Parameter can be read written All parameters are read only Clear PLC program NOT for VFD E C models All parameters are reset to factory settings 50Hz 230V 400V or 220V 380V depends on Pr 00 12 All parameters are reset to factory settings 60Hz 115V 220V 440V 4 38 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapte
26. To avoid coincidence of the device numbers to be moved designated by the two operands and cause confusion please be aware of the arrangement on the designated device numbers When S gt D the BMOV command is processed the order as 0 9 G When S lt D the BMOV command is processed the order as G Q X11 Hr X10 D20 D19 21 2 gt p20 D22 9 pat D10 2 Dr D11 9 p12 D12 2 gt p13 API Mnemonic Function 20 ADD P Addition Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps OP X Y M ADD ADDP 7 steps S alele S alia e D alee Operands S1 Summand S2 Addend D Sum D 50 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Explanations 1 See the specifications of each model for their range of use 2 This instruction adds S1 and S2 in BIN format and store the result in D 3 Thehighest bit is symbolic bit and 1 which is suitable for algebraic addition e g 3 9 6 4 Flag changes in binary addition 16 bit command A If the operation result 0 zero flag M1020 On B Ifthe operation result lt 32 768 borrow flag M1021 On C If the operation result gt 32 767 carry flag M1022 On Program Example
27. 5 7 5 11 Motor Stalls during Acceleration 5 8 5 12 The Motor does not Run as Expected 5 8 5 13 Electromagnetic Induction Noise 5 9 5 14 Environmental Condition eene 5 9 5 15 Affecting Other Machines ssseee en 5 10 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance 6 1 6 1 Fault Code Information 6 1 6 1 1 Common Problems and Solutions sese 6 1 6 1 2 iei eR ed ane lee a eee 6 6 6 2 Maintenance and Inspections se m 6 6 Appendix A Specifications esee A 1 Appendix B Accessories B 1 B 1 All Brake Resistors amp Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives B 1 B 1 1 Dimensions and Weights for Brake Resistors B 4 B 1 2 Specifications for Brake Unit see B 7 B 1 3 Dimensions for Brake Unit see B 8 B 1 4 DIN Rail Installation B 9 B 2 No fuse Circuit Breaker B 10 Fuse Specification Chart sm B 11 4 AC Reactor EE T eene meme enemies B 12 B 4 1 AC Input Reactor Recommended B 12
28. Check if the parameter setting and wiring of analog signal and multi step speed Change defective potentiometer and relay are correct Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction Please contact DELTA Connect correctly Motor is locked due to large load please reduce load For example if there is a brake check if itis released Im Increase the setting of torque compensation 5 6 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 5 10 Motor Speed cannot be Changed For VFD E C models no PLC function is supported Please follow the dashed line to skip the PLC parts Motor can run but cannot change speed v Yes Check if the setting of the max frequency is too low Modify the setting No v If the executi Check to see if frequency is Yes time is too out of range upper lower 2 Modify the setting boundaries bis Press UP DOWN key Yes If finishe L Yes executing PLC to see if speed has Aaea program any change If there is any change Yes fthe signal that sets Check if the PLC o 9 9 frequency 0 10V program is correc 4 20mA No Check if the wiring between No MI1 MI6 to DCM is correct No Y No Check if the wiring of external terminal is correct Yes 4 Correct Yes
29. Device Range Type Address Hex X 00 17 octal Bit 0400 040F Y 00 17 octal Bit 0500 050F T 00 15 Bit word 0600 060F M 000 159 Bit 0800 089F M 1000 1031 Bit OBE8 0C07 0 7 Bit word 0 00 0 07 00 63 1000 1010 1000 1044 Word 13E8 1414 D 26 Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function NOTE when it is in PLC1 mode the communication address will correspond to the parameter NOT the device For example address 0400H will correspond to Pr 04 00 NOT D 4 11 Function Code only for PLC2 mode Function Code Description Supported Devices 01 Read coil status Y M T C 02 Read input status X Y M T C 03 Read one data T C D 05 Force changing one coil status Y M T C 06 Write in one data T C D OF Force changing multiple coil status Y M T C 10 Write in multiple data T C D D 5 Commands D 5 1 Basic Commands Commands Function Operands LD Load contact A X Y M T C LDI Load contact B X Y M T C AND Series connection with A contact X Y M T ANI Series connection with B contact X Y OR Parallel connection with A contact X Y M T C ORI Parallel connection with B contact X Y M T C ANB Series connects the circuit block ORB Parallel connects the circuit block 7 MPS Save the operation result MRD Read the operation result the pointer not moving 77 MPP Read the result
30. Ea The pole number should be even can t be odd ETE M Proportional Gain P Unit 0 01 Settings 0 0 to 10 0 Factory Setting 1 0 Ea This parameter is used to set the gain P when using PG for the closed loop speed control Ea The proportional gain is mainly used to eliminate the error The large proportional gain P will get the faster response to decrease the error Too large proportional gain will cause large overshoot and oscillation and decrease the stable Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 177 Chapter 4 Parameters This parameter can be used to set the proportional gain P to decide the response speed With large proportional gain it will get faster response Too large proportional gain may cause system oscillation With small proportional gain it will get slower response ETE A Integral Gain 1 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 100 00 sec Factory Setting 1 00 0 00 Disable The integral controller is used to eliminate the error during stable system The integral control doesn t stop working until error is 0 The integral is acted by the integral time The smaller integral time is set the stronger integral action will be It is helpful to reduce overshoot and oscillation to make a stable system At this moment the decreasing error will be slow The integral control is often used with other two controls to become PI controller or PID controller This parameter is used
31. Measure with multimeter with standard specification Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 6 7 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance Keypad Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Dail Half One Y Year Year Is the display clear for reading Visual inspection Any missing characters Visual inspection hanical parts Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Dail Half One Y Year Year E I5 any abnormal sourd Visual and aural inspection or vibration If there are any loose screws Tighten the screws If any part is deformed or x damaged Visual inspection If there is any color change by Visual inspection overheating If there is any dust or dirt Visual inspection Main circuit Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Dail Half One Y Year Year If there are any loose or missing Tighten or replace the screw screws If machine or insulator is Visual inspection deformed cracked damaged or with changed color change due NOTE Please ignore the color to overheating or ageing change of copper plate If there is any dust or dirt Visual inspection 6 8 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Terminals and wiring of main circuit Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance Maintenance
32. Multi Step speed command 1 Multi Step speed command 2 Multi Step speed command 3 Multi function Input 11 07 Terminal 8 Multi Step speed command 4 External reset Accel Decel inhibit Multi function Input F 11 08 Terminal MI9 Accel Decel time selection command Jog Operation External base block Multi function Input E 11 09 Terminal M110 Up Increment master frequency Down Decrement master frequency Counter Trigger Signal Multi function Input 13 Counter reset 0210 Terminal MI11 External Fault Input 15 PID function disabled Multi function Input 16 Output shutoff stop Terminal MI12 17 Parameter lock enable 18 Operation command selection external terminals 19 Operation command selection keypad 20 Operation command selection communication 21 FWD REV command 22 Source of second frequency command 23 Quick Stop Only for VFD E C models 4 186 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Fac TY Customer Setting 24 Download execute monitor PLC Program PLC2 NOT for VFD E C models 25 Simple position function 26 OOB Out of Balance Detection 27 Motor selection bit 0 28 Motor selection bit 1 Group 13 PG function Parameters for Extension Card Parameter Explanation Factory Customer Setting 13 10 Reserved Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 187 Chapter 4
33. cles nene 2 17 Chapter Keypad and Start 3 1 3 1 Keypad E 3 1 3 2 Operation Method visi sucess metere ein Eee n eee 3 2 3 3 rial cn 3 3 Chapter 4 4 1 4 1 Summary of Parameter 4 2 4 2 Parameter Settings for 4 33 4 3 Description of Parameter Settings 4 38 4 4 Different Parameters for VFD E C 4 181 Chapter 5 5 1 5 1 Over Current ienr 1 neret eec rete cce inest 5 1 5 2 Ground Fault anniv wean rper ee t ed de es 5 2 5 3 Over Voltage OV 5 niece iere tirer ede ene Pedes 5 2 5 4 Low Voltage Ev core e 5 3 5 5 Over Heat OH sinu eb dte 5 4 5 6 Overload 2 t b pou etie ete MEO Une tested 5 4 5 7 Keypad Display is 5 5 5 8 Phase Loss eet tede eer petet anna 5 5 5 9 Motor Cannot iieri inter n DER uite etd e RR Hed 5 6 5 10 Motor Speed cannot be Changed
34. power side DEB function is activated Output frequen DEB retum time S O gt When 08 2415 set to 0 the AC motor drive willbe stopped and won t re start at the power on again 4 136 Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Status 2 unexpected power off such as momentary power loss DC BUS voltage Thelevel for DEB retum time Lv 30V 58V 27 FUA Thelevel for soft start relay to beON t Lv 30 Lvlevel 77 14 4 power side DEB function is activated Output freque DEB return time 92 _ Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 137 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 9 Communication Parameters There is a built in RS 485 serial interface marked RJ 45 near to the control terminals The pins are defined below RS 485 NOT for VFD E C models 8 1 Serial interface 1 Reserved 2 EV 3 GND 4 SG 5 SG 6 Reserved 7 Reserved 8 Reserved The pins definition for VFD E C models please refer to chapter E 1 2 Each VFD E AC motor drive has a pre assigned communication address specified by Pr 09 00 The RS485 master then controls each AC motor drive according to its communication address ETE Communication Address Settings 1 to 254 Factory Setting 1 If the AC motor drive is controlled by RS 485 serial communication the communication address for this drive must b
35. 2 RUNOW g w Pa Bestop c hi lesroP Fwoe REVO na 44 ca If the results of trial run are normal please start the formal run 3 4 ENTER 44 FWDe REVO estor RUNO rwpe REVO lestop ENTER 1 lt lt 3 rwne REVO estor dd Fwoe REVO lasroP en ca 4 RUNO Fwpe REVO lesroP 4 u 44 RuNe Revoj losroP m wn Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters The VFD E parameters are divided into 14 groups by property for easy setting In most applications the user can finish all parameter settings before start up without the need for re adjustment during operation The 14 groups are as follows Group 0 Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 Group 7 Group 8 Group 9 Group 10 Group 11 Group 12 Group 13 User Parameters Basic Parameters Operation Method Parameters Output Function Parameters Input Function Parameters Multi Step Speed Parameters Protection Parameters Motor Parameters Special Parameters Communication Parameters PID Control Parameters Multi function Input Output Parameters for Extension Card Analog Input Output Parameters for Extension Card PG function Parameters for Extension Card Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4
36. 2 V F for 220V 60Hz V F for 220V 60Hz 180 140 t tS 60 seconds 150 60 seconds 130 continuous continuous 100 5 o 850 2 b 100 5 68 2 80 2 45 5 0320 50 120 0320 50 120 EE ase freq 50Hz ase freq 50Hz V F for 220V 50Hz V F for 220V 50Hz Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 C 7 Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive This page intentionally left blank C 8 Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function X This function is NOT for VFD E C models D 1 PLC Overview D 1 1 Introduction The PLC function built in the VFD E provides following commands WPLSoft basic commands and application commands The operation methods are the same as Delta DVP PLC series D 1 2 Ladder Diagram Editor WPLSoft WPLSoft is a program editor of Delta DVP PLC series and VFD E series for WINDOWS Besides general PLC program planning and general WINDOWS editing functions such as cut paste copy multi windows WPLSoft also provides various Chinese English comment editing and other special functions e g register editing settings the data readout the file saving and contacts monitor and set etc Following is the system requirement for WPLSoft Item Operation System CPU Memory Hard Disk Monitor Mouse Printer RS 232 port Applicable Models System Requirement Windows 95 98 2000 NT ME XP Pentium 90 and above 16MB an
37. 2109H Output voltage EXXX X 210AH Display temperature of IGBT C 2116H User defined Low word 2117H User defined High word Note 2116H is number display of Pr 00 04 High byte of 2117H is number of decimal places of 2116H Low byte of 2117H is ASCII code of alphabet display of Pr 00 04 3 6 Exception response The AC motor drive is expected to return a normal response after receiving command messages from the master device The following depicts the conditions when no normal response is replied to the master device The AC motor drive does not receive the messages due to a communication error thus the AC motor drive has no response The master device will eventually process a timeout condition The AC motor drive receives the messages without a communication error but cannot handle them An exception response will be returned to the master device and an error message will be displayed on the keypad of AC motor drive The xx of is a decimal code equal to the exception code that is described below In the exception response the most significant bit of the original command code is set to 1 and an exception code which explains the condition that caused the exception is returned Example of an exception response of command code 06H and exception code 02H ASCII mode RTU mode STX E Address 01H Address Low 0 Function 86
38. Factory Setting 10 0 EXE Max AVIA Scale Percentage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 100 0 EXE Min ACI3 Input Current Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 20 0mA Factory Setting 4 0 1217 Min ACI3 Scale Percentage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 0 0 1248 Max ACI3 Input Current Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 20 0mA Factory Setting 20 0 EXE Max ACI3 Scale Percentage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 100 0 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 173 Chapter 4 Parameters 122 Q Terminal Analog Signal Mode Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 AVO1 1 ACO 1 analog current 0 0 to 20 0mA 2 analog current 4 0 to 20 0mA Besides parameter setting the voltage current mode should be used with the switch AVI3 4 AVO1 AVO2 IB IB IBI ACI2 ACO1 ACO2 1221 AO1 Analog Output Signal Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Analog Frequency 1 Analog Current 0 to 250 rated current This parameter is used to choose analog frequency 0 10Vdc or analog current 4 20 to correspond to the AC motor drive s output frequency or current AO1 Analog Output Gain Unit 1 Settings 1 to 20096 Factory Setting 100 This parameter is used to set the analog output voltage rang
39. K4YO API Mnemonic Operands Function 24 INC P D Increment Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps x Y M K kny KnM T C D INC INCP 3 steps D D 54 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Operands D Destination device Explanations 4 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function If the instruction is not a pulse execution one the content in the designated device D will plus 1 in every scan period whenever the instruction is executed This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions INCP In 16 bit operation 32 767 pluses 1 and obtains 32 768 In 32 bit operation 2 147 483 647 pluses 1 and obtains 2 147 483 648 Program Example When XO goes from Off to On the content in DO pluses 1 automatically pue D s API Mnemonic Operands Function 25 DEC P D Decrement Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps x Y M K H Knx KnY KnM D DEC DECP 3 steps D Operands D Destination Explanations 1 If the instruction is not a pulse execution one the content in the designated device D will minus 1 in every scan period whenever the instruction is executed This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions DECP In 16 bit operation 32 768 minuses 1 and obtains 32 767 In 32 bit operation 2 147 483 648 minuses 1 and obtains 2 147 483 647 Program Exampl
40. Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 B 37 Appendix B Accessories B 11 DIN Rail B 11 1 MKE DRA amp We dl n 54 NS 5 E Q S ibs a i m E 38 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix B Accessories B 11 2 MKE DRB POT 1 ILI tT T1 E B 11 3 MKE EP earthing plate for Shielding Cable C CLAMP TWO HOLE STRAP TWO HOLE STRAP Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 B 39 Appendix B Accessories 7 B 40 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive The choice of the right AC motor drive for the application is very important and has great influence on its lifetime If the capacity of AC motor drive is too large it cannot offer complete protection to the motor and motor maybe damaged If the capacity of AC motor drive is too small it cannot offer the required performance and the AC motor drive maybe damaged due to overloading But by simply selecting the AC motor drive of the same capacity as the motor user application requirements cannot be met completely Therefore a designer should consider all the conditions including load type load speed load characteristic operation m
41. Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 153 Chapter 4 Parameters define 0 0000 define BRDL 0 0000 define IER 0 0001 define BRDH 0x0001 define LCR 0x0003 define MCR 0x0004 define LSR 0x0005 define MSR 0 0006 unsigned char rdat 60 read 2 data from address 2102H of AC drive with address 1 unsigned char tdat 60 0 1 0 3 2 1 0 2 0 0 02 D 7 rn void main int i outportb PORT MCR 0x08 interrupt enable outportb PORT IER 0x01 interrupt as data in outportb PORT LCR inportb PORT LCR 0x80 the BRDL BRDH can be access as LCR b7 1 outportb PORT BRDL 12 set baudrate 9600 12 115200 9600 outportb PORT BRDH 0x00 outportb PORT LCR 0x06 set protocol lt 7 N 2 gt 06H lt 7 E 1 gt 1AH lt 7 0 1 gt 0AH lt 8 N 2 gt 07H lt 8 E 1 gt 1BH lt 8 0 1 gt 0BH for i 0 i lt 16 i while inportb PORT LSR amp 0 20 wait until THR empty outportb PORT THR tdat i send data to i 0 while kbhit if inportb PORT LSR amp 0x01 bO 1 read data ready rdat i inportb PORT RDR read data form 09 05 Reserved Reserved 09 07 X Response Delay Time Unit 2ms Settings 0 200 400msec Factory Setting 1 4 154 Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Ea This parameter is the response delay
42. When enabled the AC motor drive will restart with speed search which starts at the frequency before the fault To set the waiting time before restart after a fault please set Pr 08 07 Base Block Time for Speed Search When the fault times exceeds Pr 08 15 setting the drive will refuse to restart and the user needs to press RESET for continuous operation Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Ea Related parameter Pr 08 16 Auto Reset Time at Restart after Fault EXE Auto Reset Time at Restart after Fault Unit 0 1 Settings 0 1 to 6000 sec Factory Setting 60 0 Ea This parameter is used to set the auto reset time at restart after fault After restarting for fault if there is no fault for over Pr 08 16 setting from the restart for the previous fault the auto reset times for restart after fault will be reset to Pr 08 15 setting Ea This parameter should be used in conjunction with Pr 08 15 For example If Pr 08 15 is set to 10 and Pr 08 16 is set to 600s 10 min and if there is no fault for over 600 seconds from the restart for the previous fault the auto reset times for restart after fault will be reset to 10 Ea Related parameter Pr 08 15 Auto Restart After Fault EXE Automatic Energy saving Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Energy saving operation disabled 1 Energy saving operation enabled Ea When Pr 08 17 is set to 1 the acceleration and deceleration will operate w
43. for wiring of NPN Multi step 4 mode and PNP t mode Digital Signal Common t Factory setting ACI Mode 2 4 AVI 5kQ NEZ 1 ACD eS ACI AVI switch When switching to AVI it indicates AVI2 Analog Signal Common T a Main circuit power terminals Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 brake resistor optional BR B1 B2 O R L1 U T1 S L2 V T2 A W T3 P RB RA Multi function contact output RC Refer to chapter2 4 for details i RB Factory setting is L malfunction indication 24V MI1 MO1 Factory setting MI2 y gt N pr aon gt MI3 MIA Multi function Photocoulper Output 5 MI6 Analog Multi function AFM Output Terminal p DCM d factory setting Analog SECO freq current meter EC ACM 0 10VDC 2mA EA Analog Signal common Factory setting output 10V frequency Power supply RS 485 serial interface 10V 20mA NOT for VFD E C models AVI 1 Reserved Master Frequency 2 EV Oto 10V 47K 2 3 GND ACI 4 SG 4 20mA 0 10V 5 SG 6 Reserved ACM 8 1 7 Reserved 8 Reserved For VFD E C models please referto figure 8 Control circuit terminals Shielded leads amp Cable 2 5 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Figure 4 for models of VFD E Series VFD022E23A 43A VFD037E23A 43A VFD055E23A 43A VFD075E23A 43A VFD110E23A 43A VFD022E23C 43C VFD037E23C 43C VFD055E
44. frequency Accel Time Decel Time 01 09 01 11 01 10 01 12 The definition of Accel Decel Time 01 19 Accel Decel Time Unit Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Unit 0 1 sec 1 Unit 0 01 sec The Acceleration Deceleration Time 1 2 3 4 are selected according to the Multi function Input Terminals Settings See Pr 04 05 to Pr 04 08 for more details the diagram shown below the Acceleration Deceleration Time of the AC motor drive is the time between 0 Hz to Maximum Output Frequency Pr 01 00 Suppose the Maximum Output Frequency is 60 Hz Minimum Output Frequency Pr 01 05 is 1 0 Hz and Acceleration Deceleration Time is 10 seconds The actual time for the AC motor drive to accelerate from start up to 60 Hz and to decelerate from 60Hz to 1 0Hz is in this case 9 83 seconds 60 1 10 60 9 83secs Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 51 Chapter 4 Parameters Frequency 01 00 Max output Frequency setting operation frequency 01 05 Min output frequency Decel Time Time DED DEY The definition of Accel Decel Time 0 Hz i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 T T 1 Resulting Decel Time Resulting Accel Time Resulting Accel Decel Time 01 13 Jog Acceleration Time Unit 0 1 0 01 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
45. 0 Pr 07 01 Motor No Load Current Motor 0 Pr 07 05 Motor Line to line Resistance R1 Motor 0 and Pr 07 06 Motor Rated Slip Motor 0 gt 1 In vector control mode it is not recommended to have motors run in parallel 2 Itis not recommended to use vector control mode if motor rated power exceeds the rated power of the AC motor drive 0705 Motor Line to line Resistance R1 Motor 0 Unit 1 Settings 0 to 65535 mQ Factory Setting 0 The motor auto tune procedure will set this parameter The user may also set this parameter without using Pr 07 04 0706 Motor Rated Slip Motor 0 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 20 00Hz Factory Setting 3 00 It can be used to set the motor rated slip Users need to input the actual rated rpm shown on the nameplate of the motor B Refer to the rated and the number of poles on the nameplate of the motor use the following equation to calculate the rated slip Rated Slip Hz Foase Pr 01 01 base frequency rated rpm x motor pole 120 Example Assume that the rated frequency of the motor is 60Hz with 4 poles and the rated rpm is 1650rpm The rated slip calculated by the formula should be 60Hz 1650X4 120 5Hz This parameter has relation with Pr 07 03 Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 0 To get the best slip compensation effect it needs to input the correct setting The incorrect setting may cause the invalid fun
46. 02 04 Motor Direction Control Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Forward Reverse operation enabled 1 Reverse operation disabled 2 Forward operation disabled En This parameter is used to disable one direction of rotation of the AC motor drive direction of rotation to prevent damage due to operation errors The motor direction also can be limited by setting one of Pr 04 05 04 08 to 21 Related parameters Pr 04 05 Multi function Input Terminal Pr 04 06 Multi function Input Terminal MI4 Pr 04 07 Multi function Input Terminal MI5 and Pr 04 08 Multi function Input Terminal MI6 02 05 Line Start Lockout Factory Setting 1 Settings 0 Disable Operation status is not changed even if operation command source Pr 02 01 is changed 1 Enable Operation status is not changed even if operation command source Pr 02 01 is changed 2 Disable Operation status will change if operation command source Pr 02 01 is changed 3 Enable Operation status will change if operation command source Pr 02 01 is changed Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 63 Chapter 4 Parameters M This parameter determines the response of the drive upon power on and operation command Source is changed Operation status when operation Pr 02 05 Start lockout Run when power is ON command source is changed 0 Disable AC motor drive will run Keep previous status 1 Enable AC motor drive doesn t r
47. 03 00 Output Relay RA1 RB1 RC1 2 Master frequency attained 3 Zero speed 4 Over torque detection 4 9 Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Explanation Multi function Output Terminal MO1 1 Attained Analog Output Signal Selection AFM Desired Frequency od ce gp 5 Base Block B B indication 6 Low voltage indication 7 Operation mode indication 8 Fault indication 9 Desired frequency 1 attained 10 Terminal count value attained 11 Preliminary count value attained Over Voltage Stall supervision Over Current Stall supervision Heat sink overheat warning Over Voltage supervision PID supervision Forward command Reverse command Zero speed output signal Warning FbE Cexx AoL2 AUE SAvE Brake control Desired frequency attained Drive ready 3 Desired frequency 2 attained 0 Analog frequency meter BI 1 Analog current meter 403 04 Analog Output Gain 1 to 1t020 03 05 Terminal Count Value Value EF Active When Terminal Count Value Attained Preliminary Count 0 Terminal count value attained no EF nm display 1 Terminal count value attained EF active 03 08 Fan Control 0 Fan always ON fo 4 10 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Facto customer Setting 1 1 minute after AC motor drive stops fan will be OFF 2 Fan ON when AC mo
48. 13 Display AVI4 ACI3 level i 14 Display PG speed in RPM G 15 Display motor number M Group 1 Basic Parameters Factory A01 11 Accel Time 2 0 1 to 600 0 0 01 to 600 0 sec A01 12 Decel Time 2 0 1 to 600 0 0 01 to 600 0 sec HH Group 2 Operation Method Parameters Parameter Explanation Factory Customer Setting 0 Digital keypad UP DOWN keys or Multi function Inputs UP DOWN Last used frequency saved Source of First 1 0 to 10V from AVI Master Frequency 2 4 to 20mA from ACI or 0 to 10V from 3 ommand AVI2 3 RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication 4 Digital keypad potentiometer 5 CANopen communication 4 182 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Facus Y customer Setting 0 Digital keypad 1 External terminals Keypad STOP RESET enabled 2 External terminals Keypad STOP RESET Source of First disabled 02 01 3 RS 485 RJ 45JUSB communication Keypad STOP RESET enabled 4 RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication Keypad STOP RESET disabled 5 CANopen communication Keypad STOP RESET disabled 0 Digital keypad UP DOWN keys or Multi function Inputs UP DOWN Last used frequency saved Source of Second 1 0 to 10V from AVI 02 09 Frequency 2 4 to 20mA from ACI or 0 to 10V from Command AVI2 3 RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication 4 Digital keypad potentiometer 5 CANopen communication Read Only BitO 1 by F
49. 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 171 Chapter 4 Parameters EUN Max AVI3 Scale Percentage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 096 Factory Setting 100 0 EUN Min ACI2 Input Current Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 20 0mA Factory Setting 4 0 12 07 Min ACI2 Scale Percentage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 0 0 a Max ACI2 Input Current Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 20 0mA Factory Setting 20 0 12 09 Max ACI2 Scale Percentage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 100 0 124 Al2 Function Selection Factory Setting 0 Settings Disabled Source of the 1st frequency PID Set Point PID enable Positive PID feedback 5 Negative PID feedback 12 Analog Signal Mode Factory Setting 1 0 1 2 Source of the 2nd frequency 3 4 Settings 0 ACI3 analog current 0 0 20 0mA 1 AVIA analog voltage 0 0 10 0V Ea Besides parameters settings the voltage current mode should be used with the switch 4 172 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 EXE Min AVIA Input Voltage AVI3 4 AVO1 AVO2 ACI2 ACO1 ACO2 Chapter 4 Parameters Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0V Factory Setting 0 0 Min AVI4 Scale Percentage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 0 0 1214 Max AVIA Input Voltage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0V
50. 50 M 2sec PM 10s gt i 2sec ec MI 25 ON t Therefore the distance revolution numbers X circumference 175 X 2x r It also means that the motor will stop to the original position after 175 circles Example 2 Assume that motor speed is 1 5Hz the delay time at 10Hz is 10 sec Pr 01 21 10 and the deceleration time from 60Hz to OHz is 40 seconds The delay time at 1 5Hz is 1 5 sec and the deceleration from 1 5Hz to OHz is 1 sec The rotation speed n 120 X 1 5 4 rpm min 1 5 2 rpm sec 0 75 rpm sec The revolution numbers 1 5 2X 1 5 2 5 2 1 5 revolutions f Hz 1 5 1 5sec He rema MI 25 ON Therefore the distance revolution numbers X circumference 1 5 X 2x r It also means that the motor will stop after running 1 5 circles Maximum Voltage Frequency Fbase Motor 1 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 60 00 Maximum Output Voltage Vmax Motor 1 Unit 0 1 Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory Setting 220 0 460 series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 440 0 01 28 Mid Point Frequency Fmid Motor 1 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 1 50 Mid Point Voltage Vmid Motor 1 Unit 0 1 Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory Setting 10 0 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 20 0 4 56 Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Minimum Output Frequency Fmin Motor 1 Chapter
51. INV Inverter the result Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 D 27 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function D 5 2 Output Commands Commands Function Operands OUT Drive coil Y M SET Action latched ON Y M RST Clear the contacts or the registers Y M T C D D 5 3 Timer and Counters Commands Function Operands TMR 16 bit timer T K or T D CNT 16 bit counter C K or C D D 5 4 Main Control Commands Commands Function Operands MC the common series connection NO N7 MCR Disconnect the common series connection NO N7 contacts D 5 5 Rising edge falling edge Detection Commands of Contact Commands Function Operands LDP Rising edge detection operation starts X Y MT C LDF Falling edge detection operation starts X Y M T C ANDP Rising edge detection series connection X Y MT C ANDF Falling edge detection series connection X Y M T C ORP Rising edge detection parallel connection X Y M T ORF Falling edge detection parallel connection X Y M T C D 28 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 D 5 6 Rising edge falling edge Output Commands Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Commands Function Operands PLS Rising edge output Y M PLF Falling edge output Y M D 5 7 End Command Command Function Operands END Program end none D 5 8 Explanation for the Commands Mnemonic Function LD L
52. In addition the microcomputer may not work in extremely low temperatures making cabinet heating necessary Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 5 9 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 4 Store within a relative humidity range of 0 to 90 and non condensing environment Use an air conditioner and or exsiccator 5 15 Affecting Other Machines An AC motor drive may affect the operation of other machines due to many reasons Some solutions are High Harmonics at Power Side High harmonics at power side during running can be improved by 1 Separate the power system use a transformer for AC motor drive 2 Use a reactor at the power input terminal of the AC motor drive 3 If phase lead capacitors are used never on the AC motor drive output use serial reactors to prevent damage to the capacitors damage from high harmonics 3 3 3 serial reactor l T phase lead capacitor Motor Temperature Rises When the motor is a standard induction motor with fan the cooling will be bad at low speeds causing the motor to overheat Besides high harmonics at the output increases copper and core losses The following measures should be used depending on load and operation range 1 Use a motor with independent ventilation forced external cooling or increase the motor rated power 2 Use a special inverter duty motor 8 Do NOT run at low speeds for long time 5 10 Revision Jan 2009
53. ON If M1 goes from OFF to ON DHSCS command starts to execute the comparison of high speed counter When C235 goes from H 1004F to H 10050 or from H 10051 to H 10050 M2 will be always be ON M1028 it is used to enable ON disable OFF the high speed counter function M1029 it is used to clear the high speed counter M1018 it is used to start high speed counter function when M1028 is ON D1025 the low word of high speed counter C235 D1026 the high word of high speed counter C235 Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function M100 IM MOV KO M101 MOV D1044 M102 MOV D1044 MO M1018 4 DHSCS H10050 C235 M1 M1018 T DHSCS H3 C235 M3 M2 D1044 M3 M10 E oil M1000 API Mnemonic Operands Function 139 RPR P 1 82 Read the AC motor drive s parameters Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps KnM T C D RPR RPRP 5 steps 1 S2 Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 D 59 Appendix D How to Use Operands PLC Function S1 Data address for reading S2 Register that saves the read data API Mnemonic Operands Function 140 WPR P S1 82 Write the AC motor drive s parameters Type Bit Devices Word devices Program
54. Oa Digital Signal Common Factory setting ACI Mode AVI ACI AVI switch When switching to AVI it indicates AVI2 2p Analog Signal Common G l td 24V 1 MI2 MIS MI4 MIS MI6 DCM EC 10V Power supply 10V 20mA AVI Master Frequency Oto 10V 47K 0 ACI 4 20mA 0 10V ACM 3E U T1 V T2 RA RB AFM ACM Main circuit power terminals Controlcircuit terminals Motor IM W T3 xe l Multi function contact output Refer to chapter2 4 for details Factory setting is malfunction indication Factory setting Drive is in operation 48V50mA Max Multi function Photocoulper Output Analog Multi function __ Output Terminal factory setting Analog freq current meter 0 10VDC 2mA I Analog Signal common Factory setting output frequency RS 485 Serial interface Reserved EV GND SG SG Reserved Reserved Reserved ONDAN gt Shielded leads amp Cable 1 or the braking resistor can be used by connecting terminals 1 an irectly But PG F or VF D E T he brak b db Is B dB2 d ly B itcan t connect DC BUS in parallel 2 8 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Figure 7 Wiring for NPN mode and PNP mode A NPN mode without external power NPN
55. PLC or the host controller will decide the motor speed by this t value Pr 08 23 When value is large it means unbalanced load At this moment it needs to lower the frequency command by PLC or the host controller On the other hand it can be high speed operation E Related parameters Pr 04 05 Multi function Input Terminal MI3 04 06 Multi function Input Terminal MI4 Pr 04 07 Multi function Input Terminal MI5 and Pr 04 08 Multi function Input Terminal MI6 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 135 Chapter 4 Parameters DEB Function Settings 0 Disable Factory Setting 0 1 Enable 08 25 DEB Return Time Unit 1 Settings 0 250 sec Factory Setting 0 Ea The DEB Deceleration Energy Backup function is the AC motor drive decelerates to stop after momentary power loss When the momentary power loss occurs this function can be used for the motor to decelerate to 0 speed with deceleration stop method When the power is on again motor will run again after DEB return time for high speed axis application 0 Related parameter Pr 08 04 Momentary Power Loss Operation Selection Status 1 Insufficient power supply due to momentary power loss unstable power due to low voltage sudden heavy load DC BUS voltage Thelevel for DEB retum time it doesn tne ed Lv 30V 58V multi function terminals Thelevel for soft startrelay tobe ON Lv 30 Lv level
56. Related parameters Pr 00 01 Rated Current Display of the AC motor drive Pr 06 06 Electronic Thermal Overload Relay Selection Pr 06 07 Electronic Thermal Characteristic Pr 07 01 Motor No Load Current Motor 0 Pr 07 03 Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 0 and Pr 07 06 Motor Rated Slip Motor 0 Motor No load Current Motor 0 Unit 1 Settings 0 FLA to 99 FLA Factory Setting 0 4 FLA This parameter is used to set the motor no load current The user must input motor no load current by the motor nameplate The factory setting be set to 40 X the rated current of the AC motor drive refer to Pr 00 01 Rated Current Display of the AC motor drive Example Suppose that the rated current of 460V 2 0hp 1 5kW is 4 2A with factory setting 4 2A The motor no load current is 1 7A 4 2X40 and it should set Pr 07 01 to 1 7 This parameter must be set if the Electronic Thermal Overload Relay Pr 06 06 or Slip Compensation Pr 07 03 and Pr 07 06 functions are selected Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 117 Chapter 4 Parameters If the motor no load current can t be read from the nameplate operating the AC motor drive after unloading and read it from the digital keypad optional refer to Appendix B for details M The setting value must be less than Pr 07 00 Motor Rated Current M Related parameters Pr 00 01 Rated Current Display of the AC motor drive Pr 07 00 Motor Rat
57. Related parameters Pr 04 05 Multi function Input Terminal Pr 04 06 Multi function Input Terminal MI4 Pr 04 07 Multi function Input Terminal MI5 Pr 04 08 Multi function Input Terminal MI6 and Pr 04 19 ACI AVI2 Selection Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 59 Chapter 4 Parameters EUN Source of First Operation Command Factory Setting 1 Digital keypad Digital keypad is optional External terminals Keypad STOP RESET enabled External terminals Keypad STOP RESET disabled RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication Keypad STOP RESET enabled 4 RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication Keypad STOP RESET disabled 5 CANopen communication Keypad STOP RESET disabled Settings N O The factory setting for source of first operation command is 1 digital keypad is optional B D When the AC motor drive is controlled by external terminal please refer to Pr 02 05 Pr 04 04 B B for details Combination of the First and Second Master Frequency Command Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 First Master Frequency Command Only 1 First Master Frequency Second Master Frequency 2 First Master Frequency Second Master Frequency It can be used to add or subtract the first frequency set Pr 02 00 and the second frequency set in Pr 02 09 to meet the customers application For example if the master frequency is the first frequency speed source controlled by ACI DC 4 20mA and
58. VFD015E23A 43A VFD002E11C 21C 23C VFD004E11C 21C 23C 43C VFD007E21C 23C 43C VFD015E23C 43C VFD002E11T 21T 23T VFD004E11T 21T 23T 43T VFD007E21T 23T 43T VFD015E23T 43T Frame A A2 VFD002E11P 21P 23P VFD004E11P 21P 23P 43P VFD007E21P 23P 43P VFD015E23P 43P Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 1 13 Chapter 1 Introduction Frame B D ED oe E Sonos R TR d larka 51 P Unit mm inch Frame w1 H H1 D D1 D2 S1 BA 100 0 89 0 174 0 162 0 152 0 50 0 4 0 5 5 3 94 3 50 6 86 6 38 5 98 1 97 0 16 0 22 Dra Frame B B1 VFD007E11A VFD015E21A VFD022E21A 23A 43A VFD037E23A 43A VFD007E11C VFD015E21C VFD022E21C 23C 43C VFD037E23C 43C 1 14 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 1 Introduction Frame C D D1 BILL H T of 0 a Ae vd 82 Unit mm inch Frame wi H H1 D D1 D2 1 2 c1 130 0 116 0 260 0 246 5 169 2 78 5 8 0 6 5 5 5 5 12 4 57 10 24 9 70 6 66 3 09 0 31 0 26 0 22 Frame C C1 VFD055E23A 43A VFD075E23A 43A VFD110E23A 43A VFD055E23C 43C VFD075E23C 43C VFD110E23C 43C Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 1 15 Chapter 1 Introduction Frame D Unit mm inch Frame w1 H H1 D D1 D2 1 2
59. Y2 On To clear the comparison result use RST or ZRST instruction X10 X10 ZRST MO M2 Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function API Mnemonic Operands Function 11 ZCP P S S S D Zone Compare Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps x Y M K H KnX kny KnM T C D ZCP ZCPP 9 steps S TIPS g x e e S S1 Lower bound of zone comparison 52 Upper bound of zone comparison S Comparison value D Comparison result Explanations T ow A cw om The content in 51 should be smaller than the content in S2 Operand D occupies 3 consecutive devices See the specifications of each model for their range of use S is compared with its S1 S2 and the result is stored in D When S1 gt S2 the instruction performs comparison by using S1 as the lower upper bound The two comparison values are compared algebraically and the two values are signed binary values When b15 1 in 16 bit instruction or b31 1 in 32 bit instruction the comparison will regard the value as negative binary values Program Example 1 2 Designate device MO and operand D automatically occupies MO M1 and M2 When On ZCP instruction will be executed and one of MO M1 and M2 will be On When X10 Off ZCP instruction will not be executed and
60. am f og REV RUN JOG FWD STOP RESET Pee Ts 4 Ee s ra Tra 1 e ioc PEERI lt VED E vo block VFD E Programming Pr 02 00 set to 2 Pr 02 01 set to 1 external controls Pr 04 04 set to 1 setting Run Stop and Fwd Rev controls Pr 04 07 MI5 set to 5 External reset Pr 04 08 MI6 set to 8 JOG operation B 18 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 B 7 PUO6 Appendix B Accessories B 7 1 Description of the Digital Keypad VFD PU06 Frequency Command Status indicator Output Frequency Status indicator User Defined Units Status indicator JOG By pressing JOG key Jog frequency operation UP and DOWN Key Set the parameter number and changes the numerical data such as Master Frequency Left Key LED Display Indicates frequency voltage current user defined units read and save etc Model Number Status Display Display the driver s current status MODE Change between different display mode Move cursor to the left FWD REV Key Select FWD REV operation Joc move PUD lt q 4 Switch th t d c gt witch the operation command source Right key Move the cursor to the right WD PROG REV y DAT PROG DATA Used to enter programming parameters STOP RESET Stops AC drive operation and resetthe drive after fault occurred RUN Key Start AC
61. are checked it should be sent back to manufacturer Check if the input voltage falls within the rated AC motor drive input voltage range Check for possible voltage transients DC bus over voltage may also be caused by motor regeneration Either increase the Decel Time or add an optional brake resistor and brake unit Check whether the required brake power is within the specified limits 6 1 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance Fault Fault Descriptions Name Overheating Heat sink temperature too high Low voltage The AC motor drive detects that the DC bus voltage has fallen below its minimum value Overload The AC motor drive detects excessive drive output current NOTE The AC motor drive can withstand up to 150 of the rated current for a maximum of 60 seconds Overload 1 Internal electronic overload trip Overload 2 Motor overload CC current clamp OV hardware error GFF hardware error 1 External Base Block Refer to Pr 08 07 6 2 FONS Corrective Actions Ensure that the ambient temperature falls within the specified temperature range Make sure that the ventilation holes are not obstructed Remove any foreign objects from the heatsinks and check for possible dirty heat sink fins Check the fan and clean it Provide enough spacing for adequate ventilation See chapter 1 Check whether the input voltage falls within the AC motor drive rated input voltage ra
62. choose the suitable brake resistor to have the best deceleration Refer to appendix B for the information of the brake resistor Ea This parameter will be invalid for Frame A models VFD002E11A 21A 23A VFD004E114A 21A 23A 43A VFD007E21A 23A 43A and VFD022E23A 43A without brake chopper for which BUE brake unit must be used EZE Compensation Coefficient for Motor Instability Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 5 0 Factory Setting 0 0 Ea In V f control mode the drift current may cause slight motor vibration in the slip compensation or torque compensation It can be ignored if this slight vibration doesn t affect the application Ea The drift current will occur in a specific zone of the motor and it will cause serious motor vibration It is recommended to use this parameter the recommended value is 2 0 to improve this situation greatly Ea The drift current zone of the high power motors is usually in the low frequency area Ea It is recommended to set to more than 2 0 EZE OOB Sampling Time Unit 0 1 Settings 0 1 to 120 0 sec Factory Setting 1 0 08 22 Number of OOB Sampling Times Unit 1 Settings 0 00 to 32 Factory Setting 20 08 23 OOB Average Sampling Angle Settings Read only Factory Setting Ea The OOB Out Of Balance Detection function can be used with PLC for washing machine When multi function input terminal is enabled MI 26 it will get value from the settings of Pr 08 21 and Pr 08 22
63. if setting MI3 MI5 MI6 to be internal terminals and MI1 MI2 MI4 to be external terminals The setting value should be bit5X2 bit4x2 bit2X27 1 25 1 24 1 22 32 16 4 52 as shown in the following Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 101 Chapter 4 Parameters 5 4 3 Q2 1 0 0 2 mi Weight 22222 2 Ozexternal terminal Bit Ool o o internal terminal MIS MI6 When extension is installed the number of the multi function input terminals will increase according to the extension card The maximum number of the multi function input terminals is shown as follows 11 10 8 8 7 0 5 4 3 2 1 0 O external terminal Weights 222222222 22 2 i iternalterminal Bit 0 MI1 2 MI3 MIA MI5 MI6 MI7 MI8 MI9 MI10 MI11 SAAS M12 04 28 X Internal Terminal Status Unit 1 Settings 0 to 4095 Factory Setting 0 This parameter is used to set the internal terminal action via keypad optional communication or PLC M For standard AC motor drive without extension card the multi function input terminals are MI1 to MI6 as shown in the following Weights 25 2f 2 22 5 2 Oc setinternalterminalto be OFF Bit 213210 a terminal to be ON 4 102 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters For example if setting MI5 and MI6 to be ON Pr 04 28 should be set to bit5X2 bit4x2 bit2X2 1X2
64. the number uses decimal The structure and explanation of ladder diagram aH Ladder Diagram Structure Explanation Command Equipment Ac Normally open contact a LD X Y M T C Normally closed contact b LDI X Y M T C H I Serial normally open AND X Y M T C d Parallel normally open OR X Y M T C Parallel normally closed ORI X Y M T C 4 Rising edge trigger switch LDP X Y M T Hc Falling edge trigger switch LDF X Y M T C mH Rising edge trigger in serial ANDP X Y M T C H a AA a Falling edge trigger in serial ANDF X Y M T C Rising edge trigger in parallel ORP X Y M T C Falling edge trigger in parallel ORF X Y M T C T Block in serial ANB none Block in parallel ORB none Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 D 9 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Ladder Diagram Structure Explanation Command Equipment MPS Multiple output MRD none MPP 0 Output command of coil drive OUT Y M S Please refer to Basic command Application Application basic command command command application command Inverse logic INV none D 3 3 The Edition of PLC Ladder Diagram The program edited method is from left power line to right power line the right power line will be omitted during the edited of WPLSoft After editing a row go to editing the next row Th
65. 00 En En This parameter is used to set the wakeup frequency to restart the AC motor drive after sleep mode The wake up frequency must be higher than sleep frequency When the actual output frequency lt Pr 10 15 and the time exceeds the setting of Pr 10 14 the AC motor drive will be in sleep mode and the motor will decelerate to stop by Pr 01 10 01 12 setting When the actual frequency command gt Pr 10 16 and the time exceeds the setting of Pr 10 14 the AC motor drive will restart When the AC motor drive is in sleep mode frequency command is still calculated by PID When frequency reaches wake up frequency AC motor drive will accelerate from Pr 01 05 minimum frequency following the V f curve Frequency A 10 16 1 frequency calculated by PID Wake up d Frequency ari 4 output opa The limit of frequency f decel time A Sleep di N x The limit of 01 05 accel time Min Output gt Time Frequency 10 14 Sleep wake up detection time Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 165 Chapter 4 Parameters Fmin lower bound of frequency Fsleep O Fmin Fsleep 1 lower bound of frequency CQ When Pr 01 05min output frequency PID frequency Pr 01 08 lower bound of frequency and sleep function is enabled output frequency H Pr 10 15 sleep frequency and time gt Pr 10 14
66. 1 16 bit command When On the content in DO will plus the content in D10 and the sum will be stored in D20 HE pes T9 Remarks Flags and the positive negative sign of the values 16 bit Zero flag Zero flag Zero flag K CX 2 1 0 32 768 4 1 0 1 32 767 0 12 The highest bit The highest bit Borrowflag of the data of the data Carry flag 1 negative 0 positive 32 bit Zero flag Zero flag Zeto flag D ENF Y CN 2 1 0 2 147 483 648 lt 1 0 1 9 2 147 483 647 0 1 2 The highest bit Borrow flag The highest bit ofthe data of the data Carrytlag 1 negative 0 positive Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 D 51 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function API Mnemonic Operands Function 21 SUB P S4 S2 D Subtraction Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps Sr x Y M K kny KnM T C D SUB SUBP 7 steps S els DSUB DSUBP 13 steps S els als e D S1 Minuend 52 Subtrahend D Remainder Explanations 1 2 3 This instruction subtracts S1 and S2 in BIN format and stores the result in D The highest bit is symbolic bit O and 1 which is suitable for algebraic subtraction Flag changes in binary subtraction In 16 bit instruction A If the operation
67. 100 096 Factory Setting 0 0 ETE Maximum AVI2 Voltage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0V Factory Setting 10 0 Maximum AVI2 Frequency percentage of Pr 1 00 Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 096 Factory Setting 100 0 Ea Please note the ACI AVI switch on the AC motor drive Switch to ACI for 4 to 20mA analog current signal ACI Pr 04 19 should be set to 0 and AVI for analog voltage signal AVI2 Pr 04 19 should be set to 1 When ACi AVI switch is not set by Pr 04 19 the keypad optional will display fault code AErr and needs to press RESET to clear it The above parameters used to set the analog input reference values The min and max frequencies are based on Pr 01 00 during open loop control as shown in the following A 01 00 EL ENTE CTI 1 0434 L mns educ 04 18 04 23 i 1 1 1 1 04 12 i 04 16 E 04 21 1 04 11 104 13 104 15 104 17 04 20 104 22 i analog input 20mA 10V Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 87 Chapter 4 Parameters 01 00 60 00 Hz 04 14 70 04 18 50 04 12 30 04 16 0 analog input 04 11 0V 04 15 4mA 04 13 10V 04 17 20 Multi function Input Terminal MI1 MI2 2 wire 3 wire Operation Control Modes Settings 0 Factory Setting 0 2 wire FWD STOP REV STOP 2 wire FWD REV RUN STOP 3 wire Operation 04 04 2 wire 0 FWD STOP REV STOP 2 wire 1 FWD REV RUN STOP 4 88 There three dif
68. 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Minimum Output Frequency Fmin Motor 3 Factory Setting 1 50 Unit 0 1 Factory Setting 10 0 Factory Setting 20 0 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Minimum Output Voltage Vmin Motor 3 Factory Setting 1 50 Unit 0 1 Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 10 0 Factory Setting 20 0 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 57 Chapter 4 Parameters Ea co 4 58 The V f curve of motor 0 to motor 3 can be selected by setting the multi function input terminals MI3 MI6 Pr 04 05 to Pr 04 08 to 27 and 28 To set the voltage and frequency for each motor please refer to Pr 01 01 01 06 for motor 0 factory setting Pr 01 26 01 31 for motor 1 Pr 01 32 01 37 for motor 2 and Pr 01 38 01 43 for motor 3 Related parameters Pr 04 05 Multi function Input Terminal MI3 Pr 04 06 Multi function Input Terminal MI4 Pr 04 07 Multi function Input Terminal MI5 and Pr 04 08 Multi function Input Terminal MI6 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 2 Operation Method Parameters 0200 M Source of First Master Frequency Command Factory Setting 1 0209 Source of Second Master Frequency Command Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Digital keypad UP DOWN keys or Multi function Inputs UP DOWN Last used frequency saved Digital k
69. 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Frequency frequency command increase by accel time Time multi function input set to 10 UP command E Ea When Pr 02 07 is set to 2 use multi function input terminal ON OFF to increase decrease the frequency by Pr 02 08 Frequency frequency command gt increase by 0 01 10 00Hz 2ms Time multi function input ON OFF set to 10 UP command time for ON needs gt 2ms Ea When Pr 02 07 is set to 3 increase decrease the frequency by Pr 02 08 unit pulse input Every ON after OFF is regarded as a input pulse Frequency frequency command gt by Pr 02 08 setting Time multi function input setto 10 UP command ON ON OFF Ea Related parameters Pr 02 08 Accel Decel Rate of Change of UP DOWN Operation with Constant Speed Pr 04 05 Multi function Input Terminal MI3 Pr 04 06 Multi function Input Terminal MI4 Pr 04 07 Multi function Input Terminal MI5 Pr 04 08 Multi function Input Terminal MI6 Accel Decel Rate of Change of UP DOWN Operation with Unit 0 01 02 08 Constant Speed Settings 0 01 10 00 Hz 2ms Factory Setting 0 01 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 67 Chapter 4 Parameters This parameter determinates the constant speed When Pr 02 08 is set to 2 or 3 Keypad Frequency Command Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 600 0Hz Factory
70. 1X2 1X27 32 16 4 52 as shown in the following 5 4 3 2 1 0 Weights 2 22 2 2 2 O OFF 1 st 1 1 0 1 0 0 Ea When extension card is installed the number of the multi function input terminals will increase according to the extension card The maximum number of the multi function input terminals is shown as follows internal terminal to be OFF Weights 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 set internal terminal to be Bit Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 103 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 5 05 00 05 01 05 02 05 03 05 04 05 05 05 06 05 07 05 08 05 09 05 10 05 11 05 12 05 13 05 14 Multi step Speeds Parameters 1st Step Speed Frequency Unit 0 01 M 2nd Step Speed Frequency M 3rd Step Speed Frequency M 4th Step Speed Frequency M 5th Step Speed Frequency A 6th Step Speed Frequency A Tth Step Speed Frequency A 8th Step Speed Frequency M 9th Step Speed Frequency M 10th Step Speed Frequency X 11th Step Speed Frequency 12th Step Speed Frequency M 13th Step Speed Frequency A 14th Step Speed Frequency 15th Step Speed Frequency Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 0 00 Ea The Multi function Input Terminals refer to setting 1 4 of Pr 04 05 to 04 08 a
71. 2 units 4 msec etc The delay time is to debounce noisy signals that could cause the digital terminals to malfunction Ea The AC motor drive will check the status of multi function input terminals every 2ms It will only confirm the command and change the status when the input terminals status is changed Thus the delay time from command input to execution is 2msec Pr 04 10 1 X 2ms Suppose that Pr 04 10 is set to 4 the delay time will be 12ms 04 24 The Digital Input Used by PLC NOT for VFD E C models Settings Read Only Factory display 0 Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 97 Chapter 4 Parameters Display Bit0 1 used by PLC Bit1 1 MI2 used by PLC Bit2 1 MI3 used by PLC Bit3 1 MI4 used by PLC Bit4 1 used by PLC Bit5 1 used by PLC Bit6 1 MI7 used by PLC Bit7 1 MI8 used by PLC Bit8 1 MI9 used by PLC Bit9 1 MI10 used by PLC Bit10 1 MI11 used by PLC Bit11 1 MI12 used by PLC For standard AC motor drive without extension the equivalent 6 bit is used to display the status used or not used of each digital input The value for Pr 04 24 to display is the result after converting 6 bit binary into decimal value Weights 25 2 5 2 5 2 O notused 1 used by PLC Bit M For example when Pr 04 24 is set to 52 decimal 110100 binary that indicates MI5 and MI6 are used by PLC When extension is in
72. 400 4000 VFD004E43T 300W 4000 BR300W400 1 400 4000 1 075 VFD007E43A 43C 43P 0427 300W 4000 BUE 40015 1 BR300W400 1 200 2000 VFD007E43T 300W 4000 BR300W400 1 200 2000 2 15 VFD015E43A 43C 43P 0 849 400W 3000 BUE 40015 1 BR200W150 2 140 1600 8 7 VFD015E43T 400W 3002 BR200W150 2 140 1600 E 3 2 VFD022E43A 43C 1 262 600W 2002 BR300W400 2 140 1400 gt 5 3 7 VFDO37E43A 43C 2 080 750W 1409 2 125 960 7 5 5 5 VFD055E43A 43C 3 111 1100W 960 120 960 10 7 5 VFD075E43A 43C 4 148 1500W 690 125 690 15 11 VFD110E43A 43C 6 186 12000W 539 a 108 530 20 15 VFD150E43A 43C 8 248 14800W 320 BR1K2WO08 4 151 310 25 18 5 185 43 43 10 281 4800W 320 BR1K2WO08 4 121 310 30 22 VFD220E43A 43C 12 338 4800W 320 BR1K2WO08 4 100 310 Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 B 1 Appendix Accessories B 2 10 Please select the brake unit and or brake resistor according to the table means no Delta product Please use the brake unit according to the Equivalent Resistor Value If damage to the drive or other equipment is due to the fact that the brake resistors and the brake modules in use are not provided by Delta the warranty will be void Take into consideration the safety of the environment when installing the brake resistors If the minimum resistance value is to be utilized consult local dealers for the calculation of the power in Watt Please select thermal relay trip c
73. 48 70 S Single 3 phase 3 phase 200 240 V SO G0Hz 200 240V 50 60Hz 2 10 180 264 V 5 63 HZ Cooling Method Fan Cooling Weight kg 6 6 NOTE the weight for VFD015E23P is 1 2kg Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix A Specifications Voltage Class 460V Class Max Applicable Motor Output KW o ors 15 22 a7 ss 75 11 15 18 5 22 Max Applicable Motor Output hp os to 20 30 5o 75 10 15 20 25 30 Rated Output Capacity kVA 44 es 99 a7 18 3 24 29 34 5 E raciomacnonay vs es CR ERR amp Maximum Output Voltage V 3 Phase Proportional to Input Voltage 8 Output Frequency Hz 0 1 600 Hz Carrier Frequency kHz 1 15 3 phase ej 19 32 43 71 112 14 19 26 35 41 49 w Rated Voltage Frequency 3 phase 380 480V 50 60Hz E Voltage Tolerance 10 342 528V Frequency Tolerance Cooling Method Weight kg 5 47 63Hz Natural 747 Control System Frequency Setting Resolution Output Frequency Resolution Torque Characteristics Overload Endurance Skip Frequency Accel Decel Time Stall Prevention Level Control Characteristics Regenerated Brake Torque DC Brake V f Pattern Frequency Setting Keypad External Signal Operation Keypad Setting Signal External Signal Multi function Input Signal Operating Characteristics General Specificati
74. 5 200 0 180 0 310 0 290 0 190 0 92 0 10 0 10 0 9 0 7 87 7 09 12 20 11 42 7 48 8 62 0 39 0 39 0 35 Dra Frame D D1 VFD150E23A 23C VFD150E43A 43C VFD185E43A 43C VFD220E43A 43C 1 16 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring After removing the front cover check if the power and control terminals are clear Be sure to observe the following precautions when wiring General Wiring Information Applicable Codes All VFD E series are Underwriters Laboratories Inc UL and Canadian Underwriters Laboratories cUL listed and therefore comply with the requirements of the National Electrical Code NEC and the Canadian Electrical Code CEC Installation intended to meet the UL and cUL requirements must follow the instructions provided in Wiring Notes as a minimum standard Follow all local codes that exceed UL and cUL requirements Refer to the technical data label affixed to the AC motor drive and the motor nameplate for electrical data The Line Fuse Specification in Appendix B lists the recommended fuse part number for each VFD E Series part number These fuses or equivalent must be used on all installations where compliance with U L standards is a required 1 Make sure that power is only applied to the R L1 S L2 T L3 terminals Failure to comply may result in damage to the equipment The voltage and current should li
75. 7 8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 Carrier frequency kHz Rated current 96 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Group 3 Output Function Parameters Chapter 4 Parameters Multi function Output Relay RA1 RB1 RC1 Factory Setting 8 03 01 Multi function Output Terminal MO1 Factory Setting 1 Settings Function Description 0 No Function 1 AC Drive Operational Active when the drive is ready or RUN command is ON T Master Frequency F Active when the output frequency H of AC motor drive Attained reaches the output frequency F setting Active when Command Frequency is lower than the 3 Zero Speed Minimum Output Frequency Over Torque Active as long as over torque is detected Refer to Pr 06 03 Detection OL2 Pr 06 05 Active when the output of the AC motor drive is shut off Baseblock B B 5 Ab during baseblock Base block can be forced by Multi function Indication input setting 09 6 Low Voltage Indication Active when low voltage Lv is detected Operation Active when operation command is controlled by external Indication terminal M Active when a fault occurs oc ov oH oL oL1 EF cF3 8 Fault Indication HPF ocA ocn GFF Desired Frequency 1 9 Active when the desired frequency 1 03 02 is attained Attained T Terminal Count Value Active when the internal counter reaches Terminal Count Attained Value Prel
76. AND command is used in the series connection of A contact The function of the command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts first and then to perform the AND calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts thereafter saving the result into the accumulative register Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation y a CY LDI X1 Load contact B of X1 AND X0 Connect to contact A of in series OUT 1 Drive Y1 coil D 30 Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Mnemonic Function ANI Series connection B contact X0 X17 YO Y17 M0O M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand Y v Y v 4 Explanations The ANI command is used in the series connection of B contact The function of the command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts first and then to perform the AND calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts thereafter saving the result into the accumulative register Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation x1 0 LD X1 Load contact A of X1 H I Cn 5 ANI Connect to contact B of in series OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function OR Parallel connection A contact X0 X17 YO Y17 M0O M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand Y Y Y Y Y Explanations The O
77. B 4 2 AC Output Reactor Recommended Value B 13 B 4 3 Applicatioris a 14 B 5 Zero Phase Reactor 220 00 B 17 B 6 Remote Controller RC 01 seem B 18 B PUO6 eaae pe ape i E ue eR Eug B 19 B 7 1 Description of the Digital Keypad VFD PUJO6 B 19 B 7 2 Explanation of Display B 19 B 7 3 Operation Flow Chart sss B 20 B 8 KPE EE02 eee e meet e testis nua tenta B 21 B 8 1 Description of the Digital Keypad KPE LE02 B 21 B 8 2 How to Operate the Digital B 23 B 8 3 Reference Table for the 7 segment LED Display of the Digital Keypad iere e dose A B 24 B 8 4 Keypad B 24 B 9 Extension Card c seen ie edite tee tec reip B 25 B 9 T Relay ccc ice rere B 25 B 92 Digital 1 O Card hee ke ntes B 26 B 9 3 Analog l O Card seem B 26 B 9 4 Communication Card sse B 26 9 5 Speed Feedback B 27 10 Fieldbus Modules 27 B 10 1 DeviceNet Communication Module CME DN
78. Bias 10Hz 1 Gaini 10V 10V 2V 10096 83 396 ovo 5V 10V Biasadjustment i 10Hz 60Hz Gain 10096 10096720 096 XV Example 4 Use of 0 5V potentiometer range via gain adjustment This example shows a potentiometer range of 0 to 5 Volts Instead of adjusting gain as example below you can set Pr 01 00 to 120Hz to achieve the same results Gain adjustment Pr 01 00 60Hz Max output Freq Potentiometer Pr 04 00 0 0 adjustment ra Pr 04 01 0 Positive bias 2 i Pr 04 02 200 Input gain a j Pr 04 03 0 No negative bias command Gain 10V 5V 100 200 OHz OV 5V 10V 4 84 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Example 5 Use of negative bias in noisy environment In this example a 1V negative bias is used In noisy environments it is advantageous to use negative bias to provide a noise margin 1V in this example Pr 01 00 60Hz Max output Freq Potentiometer Pr 04 00 10 0 Bias adjustment Pr 04 01 1 Negative bias Pr 04 02 100 Input gain Pr 04 03 0 negative bias command 1 Gain 100 Negative bias 6Hz Tov 1v 10V Bias adjustment 6Hz 60Hz Gain 100 100 10 0 Example 6 Use of negative bias in noisy environment and gain adjustment to use full potentiometer range In this example a negative bias is used to provide a noise margin Also a potentiometer frequency gain is used to allow the Maximum Outp
79. Brake Time during 0105 Stopping 0803 Minimum Output Frequency DC Brake Time during Stopping Run Stop ON OFF DC Brake Time DC Brake during Start up is used for loads that may move before the AC drive starts such as fans and pumps Under such circumstances DC Brake can be used to hold the load in position before setting it in motion DC Brake during stopping is used to shorten the stopping time and also to hold a stopped load in position such as cranes and cutting machines For high inertia loads a brake resistor for dynamic brake may also be needed for fast decelerations Refer to appendix B for the information of brake resistors 08 04 Momentary Power Loss Operation Selection Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Operation stops coast to stop after momentary power loss 1 Operation continues after momentary power loss speed search starts with the Last Frequency 2 Operation continues after momentary power loss speed search starts with the minimum frequency This parameter determines the operation mode when the AC motor drive restarts from a momentary power loss The power connected to the AC motor drive may be off temporarily with unknown factors This parameter can restart the drive after momentary power loss Setting 1 the drive will operate by the last frequency before momentary power loss It will accelerate to the master frequency after the drive output fr
80. CAN based higher layer protocol and was designed for motion oriented machine control networks such as handling systems Version 4 of CANopen CiA DS301 is standardized as EN50325 4 The CANopen specifications cover application layer and communication profile CiA DS301 as well as a framework for programmable devices CiA 302 recommendations for cables and connectors CiA 303 1 and SI units and prefix representations CiA 303 2 Device Profile CiA Device Profile CiA Device Profile CiA DSP 401 DSP 404 DSP XXX OSI Layer 7 Application Communication Profile CiA DS 301 OSI Layer 2 Data Link Layer CAN Controller CAN 2 0A e dr OSI Layer 1 Physical Layer ISO 11898 e e CAN bus E 2 Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 E 1 2 RJ 45 Pin Definition AM Appendix D How to Use PLC Function 8 1 8 1 socket plug PIN Signal Description 1 CAN H CAN H bus line dominant high 2 CAN L CAN L bus line dominant low 3 CAN GND Ground OV V 4 SG 485 communication 5 SG 485 communication 7 CAN_GND Ground OV V E 1 3 Pre Defined Connection Set To reduce configuration effort for simple networks CANopen define a mandatory default identifier allocation s
81. D 29 D 5 7 End Comriand cess sacs tercie e ie rere net D 29 0 5 8 Explanation for the D 29 0 5 9 Description of the Application D 44 0 5 10 Explanation for the Application Commands D 45 0 5 11 Special Application Commands for the AC Motor Drive D 57 D 6 Error Code tet seen ide dee rete eee Re detti D 64 Appendix E CANopen Function eese ennt E 1 OV IVIBW esce eR rere er ERR Rede E 2 1 emen 2 1 2 RJ 45 Pin Definition essen E 3 E 1 3 Pre Defined Connection Set esse E 3 E 1 4 CANopen Communication E 4 E 1 4 1 Network Management E 4 E 1 4 2 SDO Service Data E 6 E 1 4 3 PDO Process Data E 7 E 1 4 4 EMCY Emergency E 9 E 2 How to Control by CANOPEN E 13 This page intentionally left blank Chapter 1 Introduction The AC motor drive should be kept in the shipping carton or crate befor
82. Delay Time at OHz for Simple Position Unit 0 01 I M Delay Time at 10Hz for Simple Position Unit 0 01 ur ME Delay Time at 20Hz for Simple Position Unit 0 01 X ME Delay Time at 30Hz for Simple Position Unit 0 01 Delay Time at 40Hz for Simple Position Unit 0 01 Delay Time at 50Hz for Simple Position Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 600 00 sec Factory Setting 0 00 This simple position function is calculated by the measure of operation distance When the multi function input terminal is set to 25 and it is ON it will start to decelerate after getting the delay time from Pr 01 20 to Pr 01 25 and get the final position This is simple position function NOT the precision position function f t t2 4 1 25 tot 120 S nx x x 2 n f x 2 p S operation distance n rotation speed revolution second n rotation speed revolution second P pole number of motor tx delay time sec f operation frequency t2 deceleration time sec Assume that the radius of the 4 pole motor is r and rotation speed is n rpm n E Example 1 Assume that motor speed is 50Hz the delay time at 50Hz is 2 sec Pr 01 25 2 and the deceleration time from 50Hz to OHz is 10 seconds The rotation speed 120 X 50 4 rpm min 25 rpm sec The revolution numbers 25 X 2 12 2 175 revolutions Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 55 Chapter 4 Parameters f Hz
83. Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer 00 02 Parameter Reset 0 Parameter can be read written 1 All parameters are read only 6 Clear PLC program NOT for VFD E C models 9 All parameters are reset to factory settings 50Hz 230V 400V or 220V 380V depends on Pr 00 12 10 All parameters are reset to factory settings 60Hz 220V 440V Start up Display 00 03 Selection 0 Display the frequency command value Fxxx 1 Display the actual output frequency Hxxx 2 Display the content of user defined unit Uxxx 3 Multifunction display see Pr 00 04 4 FWD REV command 5 PLCx PLC selections PLCO PLC1 PLC2 NOT for VFD E C models Content of Multi OnE function Display 0 Display the content of user defined unit Uxxx 1 Display the counter value c 2 Display PLC D1043 value C NOT for VFD E C models 3 Display DC BUS voltage u 4 Display output voltage E Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 181 Chapter 4 Parameters Factory Setting Customer Parameter Explanation Settings 5 Display PID analog feedback signal value b 76 6 Output power factor angle n T Display output power P 8 Display the estimated value of torque as it relates to current t 9 Display AVI 1 V 10 Display ACI AVI2 i mA V 11 Display the temperature of IGBT h C 12 Display AVI3 ACI2 level l
84. It is used for choosing stop the AC motor drive or not when the desired value of counter is attained The digital keypad is optional When using without the keypad the FAULT LED will be ON when there is fault message or warning indication set by external terminals Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 77 Chapter 4 Parameters Fan Control Settings 0 3 Fan always ON Factory Setting 0 1 minute after AC motor drive stops fan will be OFF Fan ON when AC motor drive runs fan OFF when AC motor drive stops Fan ON when preliminary heatsink temperature attained 4 78 This parameter determines the operation mode of the cooling fan Setting 0 fan will be ON after the AC motor drive is power on Setting 1 fan runs when the AC motor drive runs and 1 minute after the AC motor drive stops fan will stop Setting 2 fan runs when the AC motor drive runs and stops when the AC motor drive stops Setting 3 fan will auto detect the temperature of heatsink and operate by the temperature When heatsink temperature is higher than 60 fan will run and the fan will stop once the heatsink temperature is lower than 40 The Digital Output Used by PLC NOT for VFD E C models Settings Read Only BitO 1 Bit1 1 Bit2 1 Bit3 1 Bit4 1 Bit5 1 Bit6 1 Bit7 1 RLY used by PLC MO1 used by PLC MO2 R
85. L 1 1 T 1 T 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Settings 0 1 to 600 0 0 01 to 600 0 sec Factory Setting 1 0 EN Deceleration Time Unit 0 1 0 01 Settings 0 1 to 600 0 0 01 to 600 0 sec Factory Setting 1 0 Frequency Unit 0 01 Settings 0 10 to Fmax Pr 01 00 Hz Factory Setting 6 00 Only external terminal JOG to MI12 can be used Please set of MI3 MI12 MI7 MI12 are optional to 8 for JOG operation When the Jog command is ON the AC motor drive will accelerate from Minimum Output Frequency Pr 01 05 to Jog Frequency Pr 01 15 When the Jog command is OFF the AC motor drive will decelerate from Jog Frequency to zero gq The used Accel Decel time is set by the Jog Accel Decel time Pr 01 13 Pr 01 14 D Before using the JOG command the drive must be stopped first And during Jog operation other operation commands are not accepted except commands via the FORWARD REVERSE and STOP keys on the digital keypad 4 52 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Frequency 01 15 SOG see eee ae pe ek cae Frequency 01 05 Min output frequency Ls wwe uda o Salts ua seduce eo dne ue OHz JOG Accel Time JOG Decel Time e E M1 01 13 101 14 The definition of JOG Accel Decel Time Time 01 16 X Auto Acceleration Deceleration En Factory Setting 0 Settings Linear accelera
86. LRC Check N END CR Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Command message Response message LF RTU mode Command message Response message Address 01H Address 01H Function 10H Function 10H Starting data 05H Starting data address 05H address 00H 00H Number of data 00H Number of data 00H count by word 02H count by word 02H Number of data 04 CRC Check Low 41H count by byte The first data 13H CRC Check High 04H content 88H The second data OFH content AOH CRC Check Low 4DH CRC Check High D9H 3 4 Check sum ASCII mode LRC Longitudinal Redundancy Check is calculated by summing up module 256 the values of the bytes from ADR1 to last data character then calculating the hexadecimal representation of the 2 s complement negation of the sum For example reading 1 word from address 0401H of the AC drive with address 01H STX Address 1 0 Address 0 Function 1 0 Function 0 3 0 4 Starting data address 0 4 F oO Number of data 0 Check 1 F LRC Check 0 e END 1 CR END 0 LF 01H 03H 04H 01H 00H 01H 0AH the 2 s complement negation of OAH is F6H RTU mode Address 01H Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 147 Chapter 4 Parameters 4 148
87. MO M1 and M2 remain their status before Off Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 D 47 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function zcr so MO If C10 K10 M0 On M1 L 1 10 lt C10 lt 100 1 On M2 LL If C10 gt K100 M2 On 3 To clear the comparison result use RST or ZRST instruction API Mnemonic Operands Function 12 MOV P S D Move Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps x Y M K KnM T C D mov MOVP 5 steps D a slele Operands S Source of data D Destination of data Explanations 1 See the specifications of each model for their range of use 2 When this instruction is executed the content of S will be moved directly to D When this instruction is not executed the content of D remains unchanged Program Example MOV instruction has to be adopted in the moving of 16 bit data 1 When Off the content D10 will remain unchanged If On the value K10 will be moved to D10 data register 2 When X1 Off the content in D10 will remain unchanged If X1 On the present value TO will be moved to D10 data register D 48 Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function
88. Motor 0 O FLA to 99 FLA 0 4 FLA Torque 07 02 Compensation 0 0 to 10 0 0 0 Motor 0 407 03 Slip Compensation 0 00 to 10 00 0 00 Used without PG Motor 0 0 Disable 07 04 Motor Parameters 4 Auto tuning R4 0 Auto Tuning 2 Auto tuning R1 no load test Motor Line to line 07 05 Resistance R1 0 65535 mQ 0 Motor 0 Motor Rated Slip 07 06 Motor 0 0 00 to 20 00 Hz 3 00 07 07 Compensation 0 to 250 200 imit Torque 07 08 Compensation Time 0 01 10 00 Sec 0 30 Constant Slip Compensation 07 09 Time Constant 0 05 10 00 sec 0 20 Accumulative Motor 07 10 Operation Time 0 to 1439 Min 0 Min Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 19 Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings Customer etting Accumulative Motor 07 11 Operation Time 0 to 65535 Day 0 Day Motor PTC 0 Disable BEN Overheat Protection 1 Enable Input Debouncing 07 13 Time of the PTC 0 9999 2ms 100 Protection Motor PTC 07 14 Overheat Protection 0 1 10 0V 24 Level Motor PTC 07 15 Overheat Warning 0 1 10 0V 1 2 Level Motor PTC 07 16 Overheat Reset 0 1 5 0V 0 6 Delta Level Treatment of the 0 Warn and RAMP to stop 07 17 Motor PTC 1 Warn and COAST to stop 0 Overheat 2 Warn and keep running 07 18 Motor Rated Current 30 FLA to 120 FLA FLA Motor 1 Motor No Load 5 07 19 Current Motor 1 O FLA to
89. Multi Step speed command 3 4 Multi Step speed command 4 8 Jog Operation 10 Up Increment master frequency and 11 Down Decrement master frequency it displays 4 in Pr 02 16 Pr 04 05 Multi function Input Terminal MI3 Pr 04 06 Multi function Input Terminal 4 Pr 04 07 Multi function Input Terminal MI5 Pr 04 08 Multi function Input Terminal MI6 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 69 Chapter 4 Parameters Display the Operation Command Source Settings Read Only Factory display 4 You can read the operation source by this parameter Display Value Bit Function 1 BitO 1 Operation Command Source by Digital Keypad 2 Bit1 1 Operation Command Source by RS485 communication 4 Bit2 1 Operation Command Source by External Terminal 8 Bit3 1 Operation Command Source by Multi input function Operation Command Source by PLC Operation Command 16 Bit4 1 NOT for VFD E C models 32 Bits 1 Operation Command Source by CANopen Communication Interface When it displays 8 it means that the operation command source is from multi input function Thus when Pr 04 05 04 08 are set to 8 Jog Operation 18 Operation command selection external terminals 19 Operation command selection keypad 20 Operation command selection communication and 21 FWD REV command it will display 8 in Pr 02 17 AR Pr 04 05 Multi function Input Terminal MI3 Pr 04 06 Multi function Input Terminal M
90. NMT service Only one NMT master is in a network and other nodes are regarded as slaves All CANopen nodes have a present NMT state and NMT master can control the state of the slave nodes The state diagram of a node are shown as follows Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function 7 Initializing Reset Application PEE CR 9 10 11 PH m Reset Communication Dor 14 Pre Operation ABCD 8 RO UD Stopped AB 6 8 12 Operation ABCD 1 After power is applied it is auto in initialization state 2 Enter pre operational state automatically B Node Guard 3 6 Start remote node C SDO 4 7 Enter pre operational state D Emergency 5 8 Stop remote node E PDO 9 10 11 Reset node F Boot up 12 13 14 Reset communication 15 Enter reset application state automatically 16 Enter reset communication state automatically Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix E CANopen Function E 6 Initializing Pre Operational Operational Stopped PDO SDO SYNC Time Stamp EMERG Boot up Q Ol O OI OIOIOJO NMT NMT Protocol is shown as follows
91. O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance 6 1 Fault Code Information The AC motor drive has a comprehensive fault diagnostic system that includes several different alarms and fault messages Once a fault is detected the corresponding protective functions will be activated The following faults are displayed as shown on the AC motor drive digital keypad display The five most recent faults can be read from the digital keypad or communication i Wait 5 seconds after a fault has been cleared before performing reset via keypad of input terminal 6 1 1 Common Problems and Solutions Fault Name Fault Descriptions Over current Abnormal increase in current a m Over voltage The DC bus voltage has rut exceeded its maximum allowable value Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Corrective Actions Check if motor power corresponds with the AC motor drive output power Check the wiring connections to U T1 V T2 W T3 for possible short circuits Check the wiring connections between the AC motor drive and motor for possible short circuits also to ground Check for loose contacts between AC motor drive and motor Increase the Acceleration Time Check for possible excessive loading conditions at the motor If there are still any abnormal conditions when operating the AC motor drive after a short circuit is removed and the other points above
92. OP gw eo c Always check the input voltage of the AC drive with a Voltmeter Periodic Inspection Before the check up always turn off the AC input power and remove the cover Wait at least 10 minutes after all display lamps have gone out and then confirm that the capacitors have fully It should be less than 25VDC discharged by measuring the voltage between 6 6 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Zim Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance 3 4 Disconnect AC power before processing Only qualified personnel can install wire and maintain AC motor drives Please take off any metal objects such as watches and rings before operation And only insulated tools are allowed Never reassemble internal components or wiring Prevent static electricity Periodical Maintenance Ambient environment Check Items Methods and Criterion Maintenance Period Daily Half Year One Year Check the ambient temperature humidity vibration and see if Visual inspection and measurement 3 with equipment with standard there are any dust gas oil or HA specification water drops Check if there are any dangerous objects in the Visual inspection environment Voltage Check Items Methods and Criterion Maintenance Period Daily Half Year One Year Check if the voltage of main circuit and control circuit is correct
93. Parameters 11 10 Multi function Input Terminal MI11 11 11 Multi function Input Terminal MI12 Settings 0 to 23 Factory Setting 0 Refer to the table below Pr 04 08 for setting the multifunction input terminals LL Set the corresponding parameter according to the terminal labeled on the extension card 4 170 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 12 Analog Input Output Parameters for Extension Card Make sure that the extension card is installed on the AC motor drive correctly before using group 12 parameters See Appendix B for details 1200 Al1 Function Selection Factory Setting 0 Settings Disabled Source of the 1st frequency PID Set Point PID enable Positive PID feedback 5 Negative PID feedback EUM Analog Signal Mode Factory Setting 1 0 1 2 Source of the 2nd frequency 3 4 Settings 0 ACI2 analog current 0 0 20 0mA 1 AVIS analog voltage 0 0 10 0V Ea Besides parameters settings the voltage current mode should be used with the switch AVI3 AVI4 AVO1 AVO2 BP A 2 ACO1 ACO2 Min AVI3 Input Voltage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0V Factory Setting 0 0 ETE Min AVI3 Scale Percentage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 096 Factory Setting 0 0 EUN Max AVI3 Input Voltage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0V Factory Setting 10 0 Revision Jan
94. Parameters Parameter Explanation Factory Customer Setting 0 AVO2 AO2 Terminal Analog Signal Mode 1 ACO2 analog current 0 0 to 20 0mA 2 ACO2 analog current 4 0 to 20 0mA 2 Analog Output 0 Analog Frequency Signal 1 Analog Current 0 to 250 rated current ain Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 31 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 13 PG function Parameters for Extension Card Parameter Explanation Factory Customer Setting 0 Disabled 1 Single phase 13 00 PG Input 2 Forward Counterclockwise rotation 3 Reverse Clockwise rotation 13 01 PG Pulse Range 1to20000 to 20000 ou o Number Proportional Gain 13 04 Integral Gain 0000100005 00 to 100 00 sec Speed Control Output Frequency 0 00 to 100 00Hz 10 00 Limit Speed Feedback rs 13 06 Display Filter Uode ams soo J Detection Time for 0 0 disabled Feedback Signal 1 Fault 0 1 to 10 0 sec 0 Warn and RAMP to stop Treatment of the Feedback Signal 1 Warn and COAST to stop 1 Fault 2 Warn and keep operation 13 09 speed Feedback b to 9999 2ms 16 Filter Source of the High 9 PG card Read speed Counter 1 PLC NOT for VFD E C models Only 4 32 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters 4 2 Parameter Settings for Applications Speed Search Applications Purpose Functions Ms Windmill winding Restart free Before the free running m
95. Pr 00 04 Content of Multi function Display Unit 1 Settings 0 to 9999 2ms Factory Setting 16 Ea This parameter is the filter time from the speed feedback to the PG card Too large setting may cause slow feedback response output f peii P Speed control Output ez output frequency frequency Speed j Q limit upper limit Motor detection 7 13 03 13 05 01 07 13 04 Speed feedback PG type pulse range filter and motor pole number PG 13 09 13 00 13 01 13 02 i PG feedback speed control A Time for Feedback Signal Fault Unit 0 1 Settings 0 1 to 10 0 sec Factory Setting 1 0 0 0 Disabled Ea This parameter defines the time during which the PID feedback must be abnormal before a warning see Pr 13 08 is given It also can be modified according to the system feedback signal time Ea If this parameter is set to 0 0 the system would not detect any abnormality signal Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Related parameter Pr 13 08 Treatment of the Feedback Signal Fault 4 179 Chapter 4 Parameters 13 08 M Treatment of the Feedback Signal Fault Factory Setting 1 Settings 0 Warn and RAMP to stop 1 Warn and COAST to stop 2 Warn and keep operating AC motor drive action when the feedback signals analog PID feedback or PG encoder feedback are abnormal Setting Pr 13 08 to 0 When the feedback signal fault occurs
96. Recent Fault Record Third Most Recent Fault Record Fourth Most Recent Fault Record PM Fifth Most Recent Fault Record Factory Setting 0 Readings 0 No fault 1 Over current oc 2 Over voltage ov 3 IGBT Overheat oH1 4 Power Board Overheat 0H2 5 Overload oL 6 Overload oL1 7 Motor Overload oL2 8 External Fault EF 9 Hardware protection failure HPF 10 Current exceeds 2 times rated current during accel ocA 11 Current exceeds 2 times rated current during decel ocd 12 Current exceeds 2 times rated current during steady state operation ocn 13 Reserved 14 Phase loss PHL 15 Reserved 16 Auto accel decel failure CFA 17 Software password protection codE 18 Power Board CPU WRITE Failure cF1 0 19 Power Board CPU READ Failure cF2 0 20 CC OC Hardware protection failure HPF1 21 OV Hardware protection failure HPF2 22 GFF Hardware protection failure HPF3 23 OC Hardware protection failure HPF4 24 U phase error cF3 0 25 V phase error cF3 1 26 W phase error cF3 2 27 DCBUS error cF3 3 28 IGBT Overheat cF3 4 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 115 Chapter 4 Parameters 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 39 40 41 42 Power Board Overheat cF3 5 Control Board CPU WRITE failure cF1 1 Contrsol Board CPU READ failure cF2 1 ACI signal error AErr Reserved Motor PTC overheat protection PtC1 Reserved Communication time out error of control board and power board C
97. SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 D 15 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function The dcc circuitry of cycle time A T On A T Off The figure above uses timer TO to control coil Y1 to be ON After Y1 is ON timer TO will be closed at the next scan period and output Y1 The oscillating circuit will be shown as above n is the setting of timer and it is decimal number T is the base of timer clock period Example 8 Blinking Circuit T2 n2 T T1 J4 M n1 T The figure above is common used oscillating circuit for indication light blinks or buzzer alarms It uses two timers to control On OFF time of Y1 coil If figure n1 and n2 are timer setting of T1 and T2 T is the base of timer clock period Example 9 Triggered Circuit tH MO Y1 1 1 1 T h hh MO Y1 i In figure above the rising edge differential command of will make coil MO to have a single pulse of AT a scan time Y1 will be ON during this scan time In the next scan time coil MO will be OFF normally close MO and normally close Y1 are all closed However coil Y1 will keep on being ON and it will make coil Y1 to be OFF once a rising edge comes after input and coil MO is ON for a scan time The timing chart is as shown above This circuit usually executes alternate two actions with an input From above timing when input is a square wave of a period T out
98. Setting 0 4 FLA Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 125 Chapter 4 Parameters Torque Compensation Motor 3 Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0 Factory Setting 0 0 X Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 3 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 10 00 Factory Setting 0 00 Motor Line to line Resistance R1 Motor 3 Unit 1 Settings 0 to 65535 mQ Factory Setting 0 Motor Rated Slip Motor 3 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 20 00Hz Factory Setting 3 00 0738 Motor Pole Number Motor 3 Unit 1 Settings 2to 10 Factory Setting 4 The motor 0 to motor 3 can be selected by setting the multi function input terminals MI3 MI6 Pr 04 05 to Pr 04 08 to 27 and 28 4 126 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 8 Special Parameters 08 00 DC Brake Current Level Unit 1 Settings 0 to 100 Factory Setting 0 En This parameter sets the level of DC Brake Current output to the motor during start up and stopping When setting DC Brake Current the Rated Current Pr 00 01 is regarded as 100 It is recommended to start with a low DC Brake Current Level and then increase until proper holding torque has been achieved Related parameters Pr 08 01 DC Brake Time during Start up and Pr 08 02 DC Brake Time during Stopping Brake Time during Start up Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 60 0 sec Factory Setting 0 0 The motor may keep running
99. Setting 0 when transmission errors occur it will display warning message on the digital keypad and the motor will keep running The warning message can be cleared after the communication is normal Setting 1 when transmission errors occur it will display warning message on the digital keypad and the motor will stop by the deceleration time Pr 01 10 01 12 It needs to press RESET to clear the warning message Setting 2 When transmission errors occur it will display warning message cEXX on the digital keypad and the motor will free run to stop immediately It needs to press RESET to clear the warning message M Setting 3 When transmission errors occur it won t display any warning message on the digital keypad and the motor will still keep running list of error messages below see section 3 6 in Pr 09 04 The digital keypad is optional Please refer to Appendix B for details When using without this optional keypad the FAULT LED will be ON once there is error messages or warning messages from the external terminals 09 11 A Time out Detection for USB Card Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 120 0 sec Factory Setting 0 0 0 0 Disable COM port for PLC Communication NOT for VFD E C models Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 RS485 1 USB card 4 156 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Paramet
100. Steps x Y M K KnX kny KnM T C D WPR WPRP 5 steps 1 S2 Operands S1 Data address for writing S2 Register that saves the written data Program Example 1 Assume that it will write the data in address H2100 of the VFD E into DO and H2101 into D1 2 When it will write the data D10 to the address H2001 of the VFD E When M1 ON it will write the data in H2 to the address H2000 of the VFD E i e start the AC motor drive 4 When M2 ON it will write the data in H1 to the address H2000 of the VFD E i e stop the AC motor drive 5 When data is written successfully M1017 will be ON D 60 D10 H2001 WPRP H2 H2000 M2 WPRP H2000 M1017 Cv Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function API Mnemonic Operands Function 141 FPID P 1 S2 S3 54 PID control for the AC motor drive Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps en x Y M K H KnY KnM T C D FPID FPIDP 9 steps 1 S2 S3 54 Operands S1 PID Set Point Selection 0 4 S2 Proportional gain P 0 100 3 Integral Time I 0 10000 S4 Derivative control D 0 100 Explanation 1 This command FPID can control the PID parameters of the AC motor drive directly including Pr 10 00 PID set point selection Pr 10 02 Propor
101. Unit 0 01 kr Desired Frequency 2 Attained Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 600 0 Hz Factory Setting 0 00 If a multi function output terminal is set to function as Desired Frequency Attained 1 Pr 03 00 to Pr 03 01 09 then the output will be activated when the output frequency reaches Pr 03 02 setting Ea If a multi function output terminal is set to function as Desired Frequency Attained 2 Pr 03 00 to Pr 03 01 23 then the output will be activated when the output frequency reaches Pr 03 14 setting 4 74 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Ea Related parameters Pr 03 00 Multi function Output Relay RA1 RB1 RC1 and Pr 03 01 Multi function Output Terminal MO1 Frequency master detection 1 X4HZ range Dane detection desired y 2Hzrange frequency Ex o DCbraketime setting 2 master freq attained OFF ON OFF output signal setting 9 23 OFF ON OFF desired freq attained setting 03 zero speed indication ON OFF ON setting 19 zero speed indication ON ON output timing chart of multiple function terminals Pr 03 00 Pr 03 01 when setting to frequency attained or zero speed indication When the output frequency reaches the setting frequency the detection ranges for the multi function output terminals are 2Hz from OFF to ON and 4Hz from ON to OFF The detection range for the output frequency reaches the desired frequency is 2Hz
102. Unit 0 01 Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 60 00 Ea This value should be set according to the rated frequency of the motor as indicated on the motor nameplate Maximum Voltage Frequency determines the v f curve ratio For example if the drive is rated for 460 VAC output and the Maximum Voltage Frequency is set to 60Hz the drive will maintain a constant ratio of 7 66 V Hz 460V 60Hz 7 66V Hz This parameter value must be equal to or greater than the Mid Point Frequency Pr 01 03 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 45 Chapter 4 Parameters Ea If this parameter setting is less than the rated frequency of the motor it may cause over current and damage the motor or trigger the over current protection If this parameter setting is greater than the rated frequency of the motor it may cause insufficient motor torque Related parameters Pr 01 02 Maximum Output Voltage Vmax Motor 0 Pr 01 03 Mid Point Frequency Fmid Motor 0 Pr 01 04 Mid Point Voltage Vmid Motor 0 Pr 01 05 Minimum Output Frequency Fmin Motor 0 and Pr 01 06 Minimum Output Voltage Vmin Motor 0 Maximum Output Voltage Vmax Motor 0 Unit 0 1 Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory Setting 220 0 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 440 0 co This parameter determines the Maximum Output Voltage of the AC motor drive The Maximum Output Voltage setting must be s
103. V 10 voltage between 10V ACM Range 10 4 11 2VDC RPTC1 motor PTC overheat protection level Corresponding voltage level set in Pr 07 14 RPTC2 motor PTC overheat warning level Corresponding voltage level set in Pr 07 15 47 is AVI input impedance R1 resistor divider recommended value 1 20kQ Take the standard thermistor as example if protection level is 1330 the voltage between 10V ACM is 10 5V and resistor divider R1 is 4 4 Refer to following calculation for Pr 07 14 setting 1330 47000 1330 47000 1330 47000 1293 4 10 5 1293 4 4400 1293 4 2 38 V 2 4 V Therefore Pr 07 14 should be set to 2 4 resistor value Q 1330 emcees 550 teet N temperature C Tr 5C Tr 5 C Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 123 Chapter 4 Parameters Ea Related parameters Pr 02 00 Source of First Master Frequency Command Pr 02 09 Source of Second Frequency Command Pr 07 13 Input Debouncing Time of the PTC Protection Pr 07 15 Motor PTC Overheat Warning Level Pr 07 16 Motor PTC Overheat Reset Delta Level and Pr 07 17 Treatment of the Motor PTC Overheat EZN Motor PTC Overheat Warning Level Unit 0 1 Settings 0 1 10 0V Factory Setting 1 2 07 16 Motor PTC Overheat Reset Delta Level Unit 0 1 Settings 0 1 5 0V Factory Setting 0 6 07 17 Treatment of the motor Overheat Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Warn and RAMP to stop 1 Warn and COAST to
104. command and set M1028 On The counter C235 will be ON when the count number target value If you want to clear C235 please set M1029 ON Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 D 57 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function 3 Please use rising edge falling edge command such as LDP LDF for the contact condition Please notice that error may occur when using contact A B for the contact condition There are three input modes for high speed counter in the following can be set by D1044 phase mode 4 times frequency D1044 0 user can input the A and B pulse for counting Make sure that and GND are grounding QVE LE LE EN Count up all edges Count down all edges 1 2 A Count up all edges Count down all edges Pulse signal mode D1044 1 user can count by pulse input or signal A is for pulse and B is for signal Make sure that and GND are grounding Pulse flag mode D1044 2 user can count by M1030 Only A is needed for this mode and make sure that A and GND are grounding Program Example d D 58 Assume that when M100 ON it is set to A B phase mode When M101 ON it is set to pulse signal mode When M102 ON it is set to pulse flag mode M1030 is used to set to count up OFF and count down ON If MO goes from OFF to ON DHSCS command starts to execute the comparison of high speed counter When C235 goes from H 2 to H 3 or from H 4 to H 3 M3 will be always be
105. communication address 2000H and 2101H setting for details FWD Stop Factory setting REV Sto ig 1 NPN Mode D o5 MI2 Factory 4 Multi step 1 MI3 y settin i Ln 9 Multi step 2 MIA Multi step 3 5 5 MI5 Multi step 4 55 MI6 Digital Signal Sammon DCM EO Don t apply the mains voltage directly to above terminals O 10V Operate from 3 Power supply external signal pun setting 1 10V 3mA ACI Mode bd 5KQ 2 QAVI AVI Master Frequency NEZ 1 0to 10V 47K ACI ACI AVI switch 4 20mA 0 10V When switching to AVI ACM it indicates AVI2 Analog Signal Common T Figure 3 1 External terminals input MI1 DCM MI2 DCM STOP RESET MI3 DCM Set Pr 04 05 10 MI4 DCM Set Pr 04 06 11 Operate from the optional keypad KPE LE02 3 3 Trial Run The factory setting of the operation source is from the external terminal 02 01 2 1 Both MI1 DCM and MI2 DCM need to connect a switch for switching FWD STOP and REV STOP 2 Please connect a potentiometer among AVI 10V and DCM or apply power 0 10Vdc to AVI DCM as shown in figure 3 1 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 3 3 Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up Setting the potentiometer or AVI DCM 0 10Vdc power to less than 1V 3 4 E EE Setting MI1 0n for forward running And if you want to change to reverse running you sho
106. compensation _No Adjust Pr 01 01 to Pr 01 06 ettings and lower torque compensation Yes T Y Run in low speed continuously Yes Please use specific motor No Y Is load too large 5 Reduce load or increase the capacity of AC motor drive No Vv Check if output voltage of U V W YS__ Motor has malfunction is balanced No Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise Please contact DELTA Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 5 13 Electromagnetic Induction Noise Many sources of noise surround AC motor drives and penetrate it by radiation or conduction It may cause malfunctioning of the control circuits and even damage the AC motor drive Of course there are solutions to increase the noise tolerance of an AC motor drive But this has its limits Therefore solving it from the outside as follows will be the best 1 2 Add surge suppressor on the relays and contacts to suppress switching surges Shorten the wiring length of the control circuit or serial communication and keep them separated from the power circuit wiring Comply with the wiring regulations by using shielded wires and isolation amplifiers for long length The grounding terminal should comply with the local regulations and be grounded independently i e not to have common ground with electric weldi
107. decimal due to 4 digital display B 22 Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix B Accessories B 8 2 How to Operate the Digital Keypad STA RT SH gt E GO START NOTE Inthe selection mode press Tiff to set the parameters DEDE EBBE EE ee 09 s Es um Success to Input data error set parameter NOTE In the parameter setting mode press TT toreturn the selecting mode shift data START Cea Ovw Setting PLC Mode enter PLC2 mode EHH EZE E or m ET enter PLC1 mode Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 B 23 Appendix B Accessories B 8 3 Reference Table for the 7 segment LED Display of the Digital Keypad Digit LED Display English alphabet LED Display English alphabet LED Display English alphabet LED Display English alphabet LED Disp ay English alpha LED Disp bet ay O O o al o o a o N English alphabet LED Display B 8 4 Keypad Dimensions Dimensions are in millimeter inch 71 9 2 83 25 9 1 02 _ 8 6 0 34 M3 0 5 2X _ 1 5 0 06 52 4 2 06 LOILOJLOIL 42 4 1 67 16 3 0 64 61 0 2 40 B 24 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CT
108. desired frequency Pr 03 02 is attained Attained Terminal Count Value 10 Active when the counter reaches Terminal Count Value Attained Preliminary Count Value 11 Active when the counter reaches Preliminary Count Value Attained Over Voltage Stall 12 Active when the Over Voltage Stall function operating supervision Over Current Stall 13 i Active when the Over Current Stall function operating supervision When heatsink overheats it will signal to prevent OH turn Heat Sink Overheat 14 off the drive When it is higher than 850C 185 it will be Warning ON 15 Over Voltage supervision Active when the DC BUS voltage exceeds level 16 PID supervision Active when the PID function is operating 17 Forward command Active when the direction command is FWD 18 Reverse command Active when the direction command is REV i Zero Speed Output Active unless there is an output frequency present at Signal terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 Communication Warning 20 FbE Cexx AoL2 AUE Active when there is a Communication Warning SAVE ji Brake Control Desired Active when output frequency 2Pr 03 14 Deactivated when Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Frequency Attained output frequency lt Pr 03 15 after STOP command Multi function Input Terminal MI7 Multi function Input Terminal MI8 Multi function Input Terminal MI9 Multi function Input Terminal MI10 4 169 Chapter 4
109. details MAC address Date Rate S NETMOD SP ADD1 ADD2 BAUD a Setting baud rate 125K gt 250K A BAUD t Switch Baud Im Value Rate 101 arr 20000001 E Svea 0 125K D Retana gi 1 250 v ene EP CANA v 2 500K Other AUTO Setting MAC addresses use decimal system 99 47 f n Oz y ADD1 ADD2 B 10 1 3 Mounting Method Step1 and step2 show how to mount this communication module onto VFD E The dimension on the left hand side is for your reference B 28 Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix B Accessories STEP2 Dimensions magan UNIT mm inch B 10 1 4 Power Supply No external power is needed Power is supplied via RS 485 port that is connected to VFD E An 8 pins RJ 45 cable which is packed together with this communication module is used to connect the RS 485 port between VFD E and this communication module for power This communication module will perform the function once it is connected Refer to the following paragraph for LED indications B 10 1 5 LEDs Display 1 SP Green LED means in normal condition Red LED means abnormal condition 2 Module Green blinking LED means no I O data transmission Green steady LED means data transmission OK Red LED blinking or steady LED mea
110. due to external factor or itself inertia The over current may damage the motor or activate the drive s protection when running the drive suddenly This parameter can output a DC current with a torque to force the motor to stop for a stable start This parameter determines the duration of the DC Brake current after a RUN command When the time has elapsed the AC motor drive will start accelerating from the Minimum Frequency Pr 01 05 The DC brake is invalid when Pr 08 01 is set to 0 08 02 DC Brake Time during Stopping Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 60 0 sec Factory Setting 0 0 Ea En The motor may keep running due to external factor or itself inertia and can t stop by requirement This parameter can output a DC current with a torque to force the motor to stop after the drive stops outputting to ensure the motor is stop This parameter determines the duration of the DC Brake current during stopping If stopping with DC Brake is desired Pr 02 02 Stop Method must be set to 0 or 2 for Ramp to Stop The DC brake is invalid when Pr 08 02 is set to 0 0 Related parameters Pr 02 02 Stop Method and Pr 08 03 Start Point for DC Brake ETE Start Point for DC Brake Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 0 00 This parameter determines the frequency when DC Brake will begin during deceleration Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 127 Chapter 4 Parameters Output Frequency Start Point for DC
111. executed for times defined by users even though the MC MCR commands is OFF 2 MCR is the main control ending command that is placed at the end of the main control program and there should not be any contact commands prior to the MCR command 3 Commands of the MC MCR main control program supports the nest program structure with 8 layers as its greatest Please use the commands in order from NO N7 and refer to the following Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation LD Load A contact of X0 MC NO Enable NO common series connection contact LD X1 Load A contact of X1 OUT YO Drive YO coil K C v1 LD Load A contact of X2 IL MC N1 Enable N1 common series MCR connection contact JL LD Load A contact of X3 OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil MCR 1 Disable N1 common series connection contact MCR MCR NO Disable common series connection contact LD X10 Load A contact of X10 MC NO Enable NO common series connection contact Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 D 39 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function LD X11 Load A contact of X11 OUT Y10 Drive Y10 coil MCR NO Disable NO common series connection contact Mnemonic Function LDP Rising edge detection operation X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand Y v Y Y Y Explanations Usage of the LDP command is the same as the LD command but the motion is di
112. frequent start stop Refer to Appendix B for details Multiple VFD E units can be installed in one location All the units should be grounded directly to a common ground terminal as shown in the figure below Ensure there are no ground loops x Not allowed Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 2 11 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 2 2 External Wiring Power Supply FUSE NFB Magnetic contactor Input AC Line Reactor Zero phase Reactor EMI Filter S L2 Zero phase Reactor Line Reactor 2 12 Items Explanations Power Please follow the specific power supply supply requirements shown in Appendix A There may be an inrush current during power up Please check the Fuse NFB chart of Apbin dx B and select the Optional _ correct fuse with rated current Use of an NFB is optional Magnetic Please do not use a Magnetic contactor contactor as the vO switch of the AC Optional motor drive as it will reduce the operating life cycle of the AC drive Used to improve the input power factor to reduce harmonics and provide protection from AC line disturbances surges switching Input AC spikes short interruptions etc AC Line Reactor line reactor should be installed when Optional the power supply capacity is 500kVA or more or advanced capacity is activated The wiring distance
113. is multiplied by the 16 bit D10 and brings forth a 32 bit product The higher 16 bits are stored in D21 and the lower 16 bit are stored in D20 On Off of the most left bit indicates the positive negative status of the result value Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 D 53 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function API Mnemonic Operands Function 23 DIV P S4 S2 D Division Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps Br x Y M K H KnY KnM T C D DIV DIVP 7 steps 8 els alele 8 els alele D amp 1541541 Operands S4 Dividend Sz Divisor D Quotient and remainder Explanations 1 2 In 16 bit instruction D occupies 2 consecutive devices This instruction divides S4 and S in BIN format and stores the result in D Be careful with the positive negative signs of S4 S2 and D when doing 16 bit and 32 bit operations 16 bit instruction Quotient Remainder CDD CDO 1 M SSS SS nM T b15 bOO b15 b00 615 b00 b15 b00 Program Example When On DO will be divided by D10 and the quotient will be stored in D20 and remainder in D21 On Off of the highest bit indicates the positive negative status of the result value DIV DO D10 D20 DIV DO D10
114. is unlimited usage times for A or B contact of each output contact Y in program But there is number for output coil Y and it is recommended to use one time in program Otherwise the output result will be decided by the circuit of last output Y with PLC program scan method Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 D 19 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function D 20 X0 The output of YO will be decided by circuit M z0 2 i e decided by On Off of X10 1I YO is repeated 10 v Q X D 4 3 Value Constant K H Constant K Decimal K 32 768 K32 767 16 bit operation Hexadecimal H0000 HFFFF 16 bit operation 1 There are five value types for DVP PLC to use by the different control destination The following is the explanation of value types Binary Number BIN It uses binary system for the PLC internal operation or storage The relative information of binary system is in the following Bit Bit is the basic unit of binary system the status are 1 or 0 Nibble Itis made up of continuous 4 bits such as b3 b0 It can be used to represent number 0 9 of decimal or 0 F of hexadecimal Byte It is made up of continuous 2 nibbles i e 8 bits b7 b0 It can used to represent 00 of hexadecimal system Word It is made up of continuous 2 bytes i e 16 bits b15 b0 It can used to represent 0000 FFFF of hexadecimal system Double It is made up of continuou
115. it needs only 2 3 slip in higher speed When the drive operates the slip and synchronous frequency are in reverse proportion That is the slip will be increased with the decreasing synchronous frequency The slip affects the motor speed seriously in low speed because the motor may stop and can t run with load when the synchronous frequency is too low While driving an asynchronous motor increasing the load on the AC motor drive will cause increase in slip and decrease in speed 4 118 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters This parameter may be used to compensate the slip by increasing the output frequency When the output current of the AC motor drive is bigger than the motor no load current Pr 07 01 the AC drive will adjust its output frequency according to this parameter When Pr 00 10 is set from V f mode to vector mode this parameter will be set to 1 00 automatically When Pr 00 10 is set from vector mode to V f mode this parameter will be set to 0 00 Please using this function after load is added and acceleration with gradual increasing compensation That is add the output frequency with Pr 07 06 Motor Rated Slip Motor 0 X Pr 07 03 Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 0 on the output frequency 0704 Motor Parameters Auto Tuning Unit 1 Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Disable 1 Auto Tuning R1 motor doesn t run 2 Auto Tuning R1 No load Test with running motor R
116. it will display PGEr on the digital keypad and the stop to OHz by Pr 01 10 Pr 01 12 setting a Setting Pr 13 08 to 1 When the feedback signal fault occurs it will display PGEr on the digital keypad and the motor will free run to stop Setting Pr 13 08 to 2 When the feedback signal fault occurs it will display PGEr on the digital keypad and the motor will keep running Q It needs to press RESET to clear the warning message PGEr displayed on the keypad Dra The digital keypad is optional Please refer to Appendix B for details When using without this optional keypad the FAULT LED will be ON once there is error messages or warning messages from the external terminals Source of the High speed Counter NOT for VFD E C models Factory Display 0 Read only Settings 0 PG card 1 PLC This parameter reads the high speed counter of the drive to use on PG card or PLC 4 180 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters 4 4 Different Parameters for VFD E C Models The content of this instruction sheet may be revised without prior notice Please consult our distributors or download the most updated version at http www delta com tw industrialautomation Software version for VFD E C is power board V1 00 and control board V2 00 The parameter can be set during operation Group 0 User Parameters Parameter
117. or XXXXX X01X0001 k 0Xxxx111 OXXXX110 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12
118. phase AC power some models to 1 phase AC power for circuit protection It is unnecessary to consider phase sequence It is recommended to add a magnetic contactor MC in the power input wiring to cut off power quickly and reduce malfunction when activating the protection function of AC motor drives Both ends of the MC should have an R C surge absorber Please make sure to fasten the screw of the main circuit terminals to prevent sparks which is made by the loose screws due to vibration Please use voltage and current within the regulation shown in Appendix A When using a general GFCI Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter select a current sensor with sensitivity of 200mA or above and not less than 0 1 second operation time to avoid nuisance tripping For the specific GFCI of the AC motor drive please select a current sensor with sensitivity of 30mA or above Do NOT run stop AC motor drives by turning the power ON OFF Run stop AC motor drives by RUN STOP command via control terminals or keypad If you still need to run stop AC drives by turning power ON OFF it is recommended to do so only ONCE per hour Do NOT connect 3 phase models to a 1 phase power source Output terminals for main circuit U V W 2 14 The factory setting of the operation direction is forward running The methods to control the operation direction are method 1 set by the communication parameters Please refer Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12
119. point Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 0 00 This parameter is used conjunction with Pr 10 00 set 4 to input a set point in Hz X Proportional Gain P Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0 Factory Setting 1 0 It is used to eliminate the system error It is usually used to decrease the error and get the faster response speed But if setting too large value in Pr 10 02 it may cause the system oscillation and instability It can be used to set the proportional gain to decide the responds speed The larger value is set in Pr 10 02 the faster response it will get The smaller value is set in Pr 10 02 the slower response it will get If the other two gains I and D are set to zero proportional control is the only one effective M Related parameters Pr 10 03 Integral Time 1 and Pr 10 04 Differential Control D A Integral Time 1 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 100 0 sec Factory Setting 1 00 0 00 Disable The integral controller is used to eliminate the error during stable system The integral control doesn t stop working until error is 0 The integral is acted by the integral time The smaller integral time is set the stronger integral action will be It is helpful to reduce overshoot and oscillation to make a stable system At this moment the decreasing error will be slow The integral control is often used with other two controls to become PI controller or
120. quantity of bytes in the message buffer The function returns the CRC value as a type of unsigned integer Unsigned int crc chk unsigned char data unsigned char length int j unsigned int reg_crc OxFFFF while length reg crc data for j 0 j lt 8 j if reg crc amp 0x01 LSB b0 1 reg crc reg crc 1 0 001 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters reg crc reg crc gt gt 1 return reg crc 3 5 Address list The contents of available addresses are shown as below Content Address Function GG means parameter group nn means parameter number AC drive for example the address of Pr 04 01 is 0401H Refer to P GGnnH chapter 5 for the function of each parameter When reading arameters parameter by command code 03H only one parameter can be read at one time 00B No function 01B Stop Bit 0 1 10B Run 11B Jog Run Bit 2 3 Reserved 00B No function 2000H 01B FWD it 4 Command 10B REV Write only 11B Change direction Bit 6 7 00B Comm forced 1st accel decel it 6 01B Comm forced 2nd accel decel Bit 8 15 Reserved 2001H Frequency command Bit 0 1 EF external fault on 2002H Bit 1 1 Reset Bit 2 15 Reserved Status Error code monitor 2100H 0 No error occurred Read only 1 Over current oc Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 149 Chapter 4 Par
121. same as the AO1 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 175 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 13 PG function Parameters for Extension Card Pulse generator card PG card is mainly applied in the detection components of speed control or position control It usually makes a closed loop speed control system with encoder The AC motor drive is used with encoder and PG card to have a complete speed control and position detection system Please make sure that the extension card is installed on the AC motor drive correctly before using group 12 parameters See Appendix B for details 13 00 PG Input Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Disable PG 1 Single phase 2 Forward Counterclockwise rotation 3 Reverse Clockwise rotation co 4 176 There are two outputs 1 phase and 2 phase output for the encoder output For the 1 phase output the encoder output is a group of pulse signal For the 2 phase output the encoder can output A and B pulse signals with 90 phase difference The encoder is defined by the timing of A and B pulses as the following figure It can not only measure the speed but distinguish motor rotation direction by A and B pulse signals PG card receives A and B pulses from encoder output and sends this feedback signal to the AC motor drive for speed or position control Setting 0 disable PG function Setting 1 for speed position control but can t disting
122. shaft output for load kW Motor efficiency normally approx 0 85 Motor power factor normally approx 0 75 Motor rated voltage V Motor rated current A for commercial power Correction factor calculated from current distortion factor 1 05 1 1 depending on PWM method Continuous motor capacity kVA Starting current rated current of motor Number of motors in parallel Number of simultaneously started motors Total inertia GD calculated back to motor shaft kg Load torque Motor acceleration time Motor speed Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 C 3 Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive C 2 General Precaution Selection Note 1 When the AC Motor Drive is connected directly to a large capacity power transformer 600kVA or above or when a phase lead capacitor is switched excess peak currents may occur in the power input circuit and the converter section may be damaged To avoid this use an AC input reactor optional before AC Motor Drive mains input to reduce the current and improve the input power efficiency When special motor is used or more than one motor is driven in parallel with a single AC Motor Drive select the AC Motor Drive current 21 25x Sum of the motor rated currents The starting and accel decel characteristics of a motor are limited by the rated current and the overload protection of the AC Motor Drive Compared to running the m
123. stop 2 Warn and keep running LL If temperature exceeds the motor PTC overheat warning level Pr 07 15 the drive will act according to Pr 07 17 and display t on the keypad Q Setting Pr 07 17 to 0 When the motor PTC overheat protection is activated it will display t L c on the digital keypad and the motor will stop to OHz by Pr 01 10 Pr 01 12 setting Setting Pr 07 17 to 1 When the motor PTC overheat protection is activated it will display Orr sa tt C onthe digital keypad and the motor will free run to stop Setting Pr 07 17 to 2 When the motor PTC overheat protection is activated it will display Oreo C amp on the digital keypad and the motor will keep running If the temperature decreases below the result Pr 07 15 minus 07 16 the warning display DLD CL wil disappear gt The digital keypad is optional Please refer to Appendix B for details When using without this optional keypad the FAULT LED will be ON once there is error messages or warning messages from the external terminals 07 13 Input Debouncing Time of the PTC Protection Unit 2 Settings 0 9999 is 0 19998ms Factory Setting 100 4 124 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Ea This parameter is to delay the signals on PTC analog input terminals 1 unit is 2 msec 2 units are 4 msec etc
124. suitable to use this function The solution are 1 moderate increase the acceleration time 2 setting Pr 01 16 Auto acceleration deceleration refer to Accel Decel time setting to 1 3 or 4 4 108 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Related parameters Pr 01 09 Accel Time 1 Pr 01 11 Accel Time 2 Pr 01 16 Auto acceleration deceleration refer to Accel Decel time setting Pr 03 00 Multi function Output Relay RA1 RB1 RC1 Pr 03 01 Multi function Output Terminal MO1 and Pr 06 03 Over Torque Detection Mode OL2 06 01 output current Over Current 2 Detection setting Level frequency b Over Current Stall output current prevention during Acceleration frequency held 4 Time NL ooo 4 Previous acceleration time actual acceleration time when over current stall prevention is enabled 06 02 Over current Stall Prevention during Operation Unit 1 Settings 20 to 250 Factory Setting 170 0 disable The over current stall prevention during operation function is a protection When the motor runs with constant speed the AC motor drive will decrease the output frequency automatically when momentary overload If the output current exceeds the setting specified in Pr 06 02 when the drive is operating the drive will decrease its output frequency by Pr 01 10 Pr 01 12 to prevent the motor stall If the output current is lo
125. supply circuit No Make necessary corrections Check if voltage is No ithi ificati such as change power supply within SRE Sine allen system for requirement Check if there is heavy load yes with high start current in the same power system Check if Lv occurs when Yes Suitable power breaker and magnetic contactoris ON transformer capacity E Yes Check if voltage between B1 and is greater than No Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction 200VDC for 115V 230V models Please contact DELTA 400VDC for 460V models s Control circuit has malfunction or misoperation due to noise Please contact DELTA Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 5 5 Over Heat OH AC motordrive overheats Heat sink overheats v Check if temperature of heat sink N No Temperature detection malfunctions is greater than 90 C Please contact DELTA Yes Y Yes Is load toolarge gt Reduce load No PG Y lt If cooling fan functions normally SING gt Change coolingfan Yes v Y gt lt Check if cooling fan is jammed gt Remove obstruction No Check if surrounding temperature S Yes Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or is within specification J misoperation due to noise P
126. the second frequency press source is controlled by AVI DC 0 10V These two frequencies can be added or subtracted by Pr 02 10 Related parameters Pr 02 00 Source of First Master Frequency Command Pr 02 09 Source of Second Frequency Command 02 02 Stop Method Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 STOP ramp to stop E F coast to stop 1 STOP coast to stop E F coast to stop 2 STOP ramp to stop E F ramp to stop 3 STOP coast to stop E F ramp to stop 4 60 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Ea When the 2 switch on the upper right corner is set to be ON as shown in the following diagram the motor stop method Pr 02 02 will force setting to 1 This setting Pr 02 02 can t be changed till the 2nd switch is set to be OFF Ea E F is external fault It can be triggered by setting one of Pr 04 05 04 08 to 14 When the AC motor drive receives the trigger it will stop output immediately and display EF on the keypad The motor won t run till the fault is cleared enter RESET Ea The parameter determines how the motor is stopped when the AC motor drive receives a valid stop command or detects External Fault Ramp the AC motor drive decelerates to Minimum Output Frequency Pr 01 05 according to the deceleration time Pr 01 10 and Pr 01 12 and then stops Coast the AC motor drive stops the output instantly upon command and the motor free runs unti
127. to set the integral time of controller When the integral time is long it will have small gain of 1 controller the slower response and bad external control When the integral time is short it will have large gain of 1 controller the faster response and rapid external control When the integral time is too small it may cause system oscillation When it is set to 0 0 the integral function is disabled ETE X Speed Control Output Frequency Limit Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 100 00Hz Factory Setting 10 00 This parameter is used to limit the max output frequency From the following PG speed diagram output frequency frequency command F speed detection value via PG feedback With the speed change of motor load the speed change will be sent to drive via PG card to change the output frequency So this parameter can be used to decrease the speed change of motor load ETE X Speed Feedback Display Filter Unit 1 Settings 0 to 9999 2ms Factory Setting 500 When 0 04 is set to 14 its display will be updated regularly This update time is set by Pr 13 06 4 178 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters With the large setting in Pr 13 06 it can slow the response speed to prevent the blinking of digital number on the digital keypad Too large setting may cause the delay of RPM value via PG card Speed Feedback Filter Related parameter
128. use in DVP PLC system To be operand in application command For example MOV H1A2B DO constant Constant K In PLC it is usually have K before constant to mean decimal number For example K100 means 100 in decimal number Exception The value that is made up of K and bit equipment X Y M S will be bit byte word or double word For example K2Y10 K4M100 K1 means a 4 bit data and K2 K4 can be 8 12 and 16 bit data separately Constant H In PLC it is usually have H before constant to mean hexadecimal number For example H100 means 100 in hexadecimal number D 4 4 The Function of Auxiliary Relay There are output coil and A B contacts in auxiliary relay M and output relay Y It is unlimited usage times in program User can control loop by using auxiliary relay but can t drive external load directly There are two types divided by its characteristics 1 Auxiliary relay for general It will reset to Off when power loss during running Its state will be Off when power on after power loss 2 Auxiliary relay for special Each special auxiliary relay has its special function Please don t use undefined auxiliary relay D 4 5 The Function of Timer The unit of timer is 1ms 10ms and 100ms The count method is count up The output coil will be On when the present value of timer equals to the settings The setting is K in decimal number Data register D can be also used as settings The real setting time of t
129. valid when Pr 02 01 is set to 5 in VFD E C models VFD E C models Download Execute Monitor PLC When AC motor drive is in STOP mode and this function is enabled it will display PLC2 in the PLC page and you can download execute monitor PLC When this function is disabled it will display PLCO in the PLC page and stop executing PLC 24 Program PLC2 program The motor will be stopped by Pr 02 02 When operation command source is external terminal the keypad models cannot be used to change PLC status And this function will be invalid when the AC Motor drive is in PLC1 status T Simple position This function should be used with Pr 01 20 Pr 01 25 for simple function position Refer to Pr 01 25 for details The OOB Out Of Balance Detection function can be used with F OOB Out of PLC for washing machine When this setting is enabled it will get Balance Detection A9 value from the settings of Pr 08 21 and Pr 08 22 PLC or host controller will decide the motor speed by this t A9 value Pr 08 23 Motor selection bit When this setting is enabled it can be used for motor selection 27 0 Pr 01 01 01 06 01 26 01 43 07 18 07 38 07 00 07 06 For example 1 27 2 28 When and MI2 are OFF it selects motor 0 og Motor selection bit When MI1 is ON and MI2 is OFF it selects motor 1 1 When is OFF and MI2 is ON it selects motor 2 When MI1 and MI2 are ON it selec
130. will be set to 0 and the coil and contact will be set to OFF D The content value will be set to 0 Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation H LD Load contact A of XO RST Y5 Clear contact Y5 Mnemonic Function TMR 16 bit timer T K TO T15 KO K32 767 Operand T D T0 T15 D0 D29 Explanations When TMR command is executed the specific coil of timer is ON and timer will start to count When the setting value of timer is attained counting value gt setting value the contact will be as following NO Normally Open contact Open collector NC Normally Closed contact Close collector Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation LD Load contact A of T5 timer H TMR T5 K1000 TMR T5K1000 Setting is K1000 Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 D 37 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Mnemonic Function CNT 16 bit counter C K C0 C7 K0 K32 767 Operand C D C0 C7 00 029 Explanations 1 When the CNT command is executed from OFFON which means that the counter coil is driven and 1 should thus be added to the counter s value when the counter achieved specific set value value of counter 7 the setting value motion of the contact is as follows NO Normally Open contact Continuity NC Normally Closed contact Non continuity 2 If there i
131. wiring 4 Check if frequency for each step is different No Change defective potentiometer Yes No Check if accel decel 4 time is set correctly Change frequencysetting Yes Y Please set suitable accel decel time by load inertia Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise Please contact DELTA Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 5 7 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 5 11 Motor Stalls during Acceleration Motor stalls during Check if acceleration Yes acceleration time is too short Increase setting time No v Check if the inertia of the motor and load is too high Yes Use special motor Reduce load or increase the capacity of AC motor drive Thicken or shorten the Y wiring between the es motor or AC motor drive Check for low voltage atinput No Reduce load or Yes increase the capacity load torque of AC motor drive 190 mg No Y Maybe AC motor drive has Check if the torque Yes malfunction or misoperation due to noise Please contact DELTA compensation is suitable No v Increase torque compensation 5 12 The Motor does not Run as Expected Motor does not run Check Pr 01 01 thru Pr 01 0 as expected and torque
132. 00 09 The first time you can set a password directly After successful setting of password the display will show 1 Be sure to record the password for later use To cancel the parameter lock set the parameter to 0 after inputting correct password into Pr 00 08 The password consists of min 1 digits and max 4 digits 4 42 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters How to make the password valid again after decoding by Pr 00 08 Method 1 Re input original password into Pr 00 09 Or you can enter a new password if you want to use a changed or new one Method 2 After rebooting password function will be recovered To lock parameters you can set Pr 00 02 to 1 or Pr 04 05 04 08 to 17 to prevent changing of parameters settings by unqualified personnel Please note that it is without password set EXE Control Method Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 V f Control 1 Vector Control This parameter determines the control method of the AC motor drive Control of V f Voltage frequency 1 To operate by the change of frequency and voltage without changing the mechanical characteristic of motor it can run by open loop method and also can use with PG card refer to Appendix B to run by close loop method In this control it gets the change of the electromagnetic torque of rotor and the load torque from the change of slip ratio 2 The V f control is the constant value control mode Although it prevents the main q
133. 00W150 265 250 30 5 3 60 930 BRA00WO040 B 4 Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Order P N BR500W030 BR500W100 BR1KW020 BR1KW075 Appendix B Accessories Model no L1 L2 Max Weight g BR500W030 BR500W100 335 320 30 5 3 60 1100 BR1KW020 BR1KWO075 400 385 50 5 3 100 2800 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 B 5 Appendix B Accessories Order P N BR1KOW050 A CKONS A 6c R4 6 2X 95 0 Order P N BR1KOW050 BR1K2W008 BR1K2W6P8 BR1K5W005 BR1K5W040 B 6 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix B Accessories Order P N BR200W150 BR200W250 22410 L142 L2 2 L3 2 W1 H1 BR200W150 165 150 110 30 60 BR200W250 B 1 2 Specifications for Brake Unit 230V Series 460V Series Model Name BUE XXXXX 20015 20037 40015 40037 Max Motor Power kW 45 Max Peak Discharge Current Brake Brake Start up Voltage DC Voltage DC 328 345 362 380 400 3V 656 690 725 760 800 6V DC Voltage 200 400VDC 400 800VDC Heat Sink Overheat Temperature over 100 C 212 F Power Charge Display Blackout until bus P N voltage is below 5OVDC Indoor no corrosive gases metallic d
134. 08 Production factory T Taoyuan W Wujiang Model 230V 3 phase 1HP 0 75kW If the nameplate information does not correspond to your purchase order or if there are any problems please contact your distributor 1 1 4 Drive Frames and Appearances 0 25 2HP 0 2 1 5kW Frame A Input terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 Keypad cover Control board cover Output terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 1 3 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 5HP 0 75 3 7kW Frame B Input terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 Keypad cover Case body Control board cover Output terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 7 5 15HP 5 5 11kW Frame C Input terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 Case body Keypad cover Control board cover Output terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 20 30HP 15 22kW Frame D Input terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 Case body Keypad cover v Control board cover _ Output terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 1 Introduction Internal Structure READY power indicator RUN status indicator FAULT fault indicator 3 1 Switch to ON for 50Hz refer to P 01 00 to P01 02 for details 2 Switch to ON for free run to stop refer to P02 02 3 Switch to ON for setting frequency source to ACI P 02 0072 8 Keypad mounting port 8 ACI terminal ACI AVI
135. 0V Minimum Output 01 42 Frequency Fmin 0 10 to 600 0 Hz Motor 3 Minimum Output 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 01 43 Voltage Vmin Motor 3 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V 4 6 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 2 Operation Method Parameters Parameter Explanation Y customer Setting Source of First 402 00 Master Frequency Command Source of First 402 01 Operation Command 02 02 Stop Method PWM Carrier 02 03 Frequency Selections Motor Direction 02 04 Control 02 05 Line Start Lockout 0 Digital keypad UP DOWN keys or Multi function Inputs UP DOWN Last used frequency saved 1 0 to 10V from AVI 2 4 to 20mA from ACI or 0 to 10V from AVI2 3 RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication 4 Digital keypad potentiometer 5 CANopen communication 0 Digital keypad 1 External terminals Keypad STOP RESET enabled 2 External terminals Keypad STOP RESET disabled 3 RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication Keypad STOP RESET enabled 4 RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication Keypad STOP RESET disabled 5 CANopen communication Keypad STOP RESET disabled 0 STOP ramp to stop E F coast to stop 1 STOP coast to stop E F coast to stop 2 STOP ramp to stop E F ramp to stop 3 STOP coast to stop E F ramp to stop i 0 Enable forward reverse operation 1 Disable reverse operation 2 Disabled forward operation 0 Disable Operati
136. 0V 20mA AVI Master Frequency Oto 10V 47K ACI 4 20mA 0 10V 8 1 3E Multi function contact output Refer to chapter2 4 for details Factory setting is malfunction indication Factory setting Driveis inoperation 48V50mA Max Multi function Photocoulper Output Analog Multi function Output Terminal factory setting Analog freq current meter 0 10VDC 2mA r Analog Signal common Factory setting output frequency RS 485 Serial interface 1 Reserved 2 EV GND SG SG Reserved Reserved Reserved Control circuit terminals Shieldedleads amp Cable rg For VFD E T series the braking resistor can be used by connecting terminals B1 and B2 directly But it can t connect DC BUS in parallel Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 2 7 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Figure 6 for models of VFD E Series VFD002E23T VFD004E23T 43T VFD007E23T 43T VFD015E23T 43T Fuse NFB No Fuse Breaker R L 1 S L2 T L3 Il Recommended Circuit zc when powersupply zs is turned OFF by a SA fault output Mc If the fault occurs the A contact will be ON to OFF ON turn off the power and MC protect the power system FWD Stop Factory setting NPN Mode REV Stop NPN Factory Multi step 1 t sw setting Multi step 2 PNP i Please refer to Figure 7 4 Multi step 3 forwiring of NPN Multi step 4 mode and PNP b
137. 1 Chapter 4 Parameters 4 1 Summary of Parameter Settings The parameter can be set during operation Group 0 User Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer 00 00 Identity Code of the AC motor drive Read only 00 01 Rated Current Display of the AC motor drive Read only Tg 00 02 Parameter Reset 0 Parameter can be read written 1 All parameters are read only 6 Clear PLC program NOT for VFD E C models 9 All parameters are reset to factory settings 50Hz 230V 400V or 220V 380V depends on Pr 00 12 10 All parameters are reset to factory settings 60Hz 220V 440V 400 03 Start up Display Selection 0 Display the frequency command value Fxxx 1 Display the actual output frequency Hxxx 2 Display the content of user defined unit Uxxx 3 Multifunction display see Pr 00 04 4 FWD REV command 5 PLCx PLC selections PLCO PLC1 PLC2 NOT for VFD E C models 400 04 Content of Multi function Display 0 Display the content of user defined unit Uxxx 1 Display the counter value c 2 Display PLC D1043 value C NOT for VFD E C models 3 Display DC BUS voltage u 4 Display output voltage E 4 2 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings Send Customer 5 Display PID analo
138. 1 MI2 Bit2 MI3 Bit3 MI4 Bit4 MI5 Bit5 MI6 Multi function Input Be 04 09 Contact Bit7 MI8 Bit8 MI9 Bit9 MI10 Bit10 MI11 Bit11 MI12 0 N O 1 N C P S MI1 to will be invalid when it is 3 wire control Digital Terminal 04 10 Input Debouncing 1 to 20 2ms Time Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 13 Chapter 4 Parameters mem uere umm per aeree forem pur ae erora preon 04 19 ACI AVI2 Selection mn en uen formere per AVI2 04 24 The Digital Input Read only Used by PLC NOT for 810 1 11 used by PLC models Bit1 1 MI2 used by PLC Bit2 1 MI3 used by PLC Bit3 1 MI4 used by PLC Bit4 1 MI5 used by PLC Bit5 1 MI6 used by PLC Bit6 1 used by PLC Bit7 1 MI8 used by PLC Bit8 1 MI9 used by PLC Bit9 1 MI10 used by PLC Bit10 1 MI11 used by PLC 4 14 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 0 0 0 Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Facts TY Customer Setting Read only The Analog Input BitO 1 AVI used by PLC Used by PLC NOT for VFD E C models Bit2 1 Al1 used by PLC Bit1 1 ACI AVI2 used by PLC Bit3 1 AI2 used by PLC Read only BitO MI1 Status Bit1 MI2 Status Bit2 MI3 Status Bit3 Status Bit4 MI5 Status Display the Status of Multi function Bit5 MI6 Status Input Terminal Bit6 MI7 Status Bit7 MI8 Status Bit8 MI9 Status Bit9 MI
139. 10 Status Bit10 MI11 Status Bit11 MI12 Status Internal External 0 4095 04 27 Multi function Input Terminals Selection Internal Terminal 0 4095 Group 5 Multi Step Speeds Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings Ege TY Customer etting 05 00 1st Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 05 01 2nd Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 15 Chapter 4 Parameters Factory Frequency Parameter Explanation Settings Setting Customer 05 02 3rd Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 405 03 4th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 405 04 5th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 405 05 6th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 405 06 7th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 405 07 8th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 405 08 9th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 05 09 10th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 05 10 11th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 05 11 12th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 05 12 13th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 05 13 14th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 05 14 15th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Group 6 Protection Parameters Factory 4 16 Over Voltage Stall Prevention Over Current Stall Prev
140. 2 Modbus ASCII 09 05 Reserved 09 06 Reserved Response Delay 0 200 unit 2ms 0 Baud rate 4800 bps 1 Baud rate 9600 bps Transmission Speed 09 08 for USB Card 2 Baud rate 19200 bps 2 3 Baud rate 38400 bps 4 Baud rate 57600 bps 4 24 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Factory 7 N 2 for ASCII 7 E 1 for ASCII 7 0 1 for ASCII 8 N 2 for RTU 8 E 1 for RTU 8 0 1 for RTU 8 N 1 Modbus RTU 8 E 2 Modbus RTU Communication 8 0 2 Modbus RTU Cm forUSB Fg 7 N 1 Modbus ASCII 10 7 E 2 Modbus ASCII 11 7 0 2 Modbus ASCII 0 Warn and keep operating Transmission Fault 4 warn and ramp to stop Treatment for USB Card 2 Warn and coast to stop 3 No warning and keep operating 09 11 Time out Detection 0 1 120 0 seconds for USB Card 0 0 Disable COM port for PLC 0 RS485 Communication 1 USB card NOT for VFD E C models Communication Protocol for USB Card 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 09 12 Group 10 PID Control Parameters Factory 0 Disable PID operation 1 Keypad based on Pr 02 00 PID Set Point 2 0 to 10V from AVI Selection 3 4 to 20mA from ACI or 0 to 10V from AVI2 4 PID set point Pr 10 11 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 25 Chapter 4 Parameters Factory 0 Positive PID feedback from external terminal AVI 0 10VDC 1 Negative PID feedback from external termin
141. 2 Transmission Type 5 RW U8 Synchrouous 253 Remote function 255 Asynchronous 3 Inhibit time RW 1016 100us itus 4 Reserved 3 RW U8 Reserved 5 Event timer 0 RW U16 1ms 0x1801 O Number 5 RO U8 0x80000280 1 COB ID used by PDO Node ID RW U32 00 Acyclic amp Synchrouous 01 240 Cyclic amp 2 Transmission Type 5 RW U8 Synchrouous 253 Remote function 255 Asynchronous Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 E 11 Appendix E CANopen Function Index Sub Definition Eun RIW Size Unit NOTE 3 Inhibit time RW Ut6 100us It reor 4 Reserved 3 RW U8 5 Event timer 0 RW 016 1ms 0 jNumber 2 RW U8 1 1 Mapped Object 0x60410010 RW U32 Ox1A00 2 2 Mapped Object 0x60430010 RW U32 3 3 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 4 4 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 0 Number 0 RW U8 1 1 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 0x1A01 2 2 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 3 3 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 4 4 Mapped Object 0 RW 032 Index Sub Definition Eon RW Size Unit Map NOTE Abort connection No action 0x6007 0 2 RW S16 Yes 2 Disable Voltage option code gt 3 Quick stop 0x603F 0 Error code 0 RO 016 Yes bit 0 3 switch status bit 4 rfg enable 0x6040 0 Control word 0 RW U16 Yes bit 5 rfg unlock bit 6 rfg use ref bit 7 Fault reset BitO Ready to switch on Bit1 Switched on
142. 2 00 Source of First Master Frequency Command Pr 02 09 Source of Second Frequency Command 4 68 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Initial Frequency Selection for keypad amp RS485 USB Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 By Current Freq Command 1 By Zero Freq Command 2 By Frequency Display at Stop EXE Initial Frequency Setpoint for keypad amp RS485 USB Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 600 0Hz Factory Setting 60 00 Ea These parameters are used to determinate the frequency at stop When setting Pr 02 14 to the initial frequency will be current frequency When setting Pr 02 14 to 1 the initial frequency will be 0 When setting Pr 02 14 to 2 the initial frequency will be Pr 02 15 P Display the Master Freg Command Source Settings Read Only Factory display 1 Ea You can read the master frequency command source by this parameter Display Value Bit Function 1 Bit021 Master Freq Command Source by First Freq Source Pr 02 00 2 Bit121 Master Freq Command Source by Second Freq Source Pr 02 09 4 Bit2 1 Master Freq Command Source by Multi input function Master Freq Command Source by PLC Freq command 8 1 NOT for VFD E C models Ea When it displays 4 it means that the master frequency command source is from multi input function Thus when Pr 04 05 04 08 are set to 1 Multi Step speed command 1 2 Multi Step speed command 2 3
143. 2 switch 3 NPN PNP Mounting port for extension RS485 port RJ 45 Dra The LED READY will light up after applying power The light won t be off until the capacitors are discharged to safe voltage levels after power off RFI Jumper Location Frame A near the output terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 1 5 Chapter 1 Introduction Frame B above the nameplate Frame C above the warning label Frame D near the input terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 Frame A A1 Power range Models 0 25 2hp 0 2 1 5kW VFD002E11A 21A 23A VFD004E11A 21A 23A 43A VFD007E21A 23A 43A VFD015E23A 43A VFD002E11C 21C 23C VFD004E11C 21C 23C 43C VFD007E21C 23C 43C VFD015E23C 43C VFD002E11T 21T 23T VFD004E11T 21T 23T 43T VFD007E21T 23T 43T VFD015E23T 43T A A2 0 25 2hp 0 2 1 5kW VFD002E11P 21P 23P VFD004E11P 21P 23P 43P VFD007E21P 23P 43P VFD015E23P 43P 1 5hp 0 75 3 7kW VFD007E11A VFD015E21A VFD022E21A 23A 43A VFD037E23A 43A VFD007E11C VFD015E21C VFD022E21C 23C 43C VFD037E23C 43C 7 5 15hp 5 5 11kW VFD055E23A 43A VFD075E23A 43A VFD110E23A 43A VFD055E23C 43C VFD075E23C 43C VFD110E23C 43C 20 30hp 15 22kW VFD150E23A 43A VFD150E23C 43C VFD185E43A 43C VFD220E43A 43C Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 1 Introduction RFI Jumper RFI Jumper The AC motor drive may
144. 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 79 Chapter 4 Parameters 2 1 0 2 2 2 O notused Weights 1 Used by PLC Bt 2 1 0 optional AO2 optional For Example If Pr 03 10 displays 1 it means that AFM is used by PLC Brake Release Frequency Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 20 0Hz Factory Setting 0 00 03 12 Brake Engage Frequency Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 20 0Hz Factory Setting 0 00 These two parameters are used to set control of mechanical brake via the output terminals Relay or MO1 by setting Pr 03 00 03 01 When Pr 03 00 03 01 is set to 21 the multi function output terminal will be activated when the output frequency reaches Pr 03 11 When the AC motor drive stops and the output frequency reaches Pr 03 12 this multi function output terminal will be activated Related parameters Pr 03 00 Multi function Output Relay RA1 RB1 RC1 Pr 03 01 Multi function Output Terminal MO1 AC DC magnetic plate F Load Motor Example When using Pr 03 11 and Pr 03 12 are used in life equipment as above figure The timing figure is shown as follows The DC brake is used before start up and after stop It can have high output torque at the beginning of start up The Brake Release Frequency Pr 03 11 can be set by the requirement The Brake Engage Frequency Pr 03 12 can be set by requirement to be used when stopping near OHz to prevent v
145. 23C 43C VFD075E23C 43C VFD110E23C 43C VFD150E23A 23C VFD150E43A 43C VFD185E43A 43C VFD220E43A 43C brake resistor optional _ A Fuse NFB No Fuse Breaker E 4 p B1 Motor R L1 R L1 U T1 S L2 S L2 V T2 IM T L3 T L3 W T3 C 3 Recommended Circuit pud when power supply E EOF a is turned OFF bya l SA fault output MC RB RA If the faultoccurs the Multi function contact output contact will be ON to D RC Refer to chapter2 4 for details ON ina i turn off the power and MC RB Factory setting is 7 protect the power system RC malfunction indication 24V FWD Stop Factory setting T REV St 1 MO1 Factory setting NPN Mode MI2 wee Drive is in operation NPN Factory Multi step 1 MI3 48V50mA Max Swi J 1 setting Multi step 2 MIA Multi function PNP i Photocoulper Output Please refer to Figure7 Multi step 3 MI5 MCM P P Tarwiring ol NEN Multi step 4 MI6 AFM Analog Multi function mode Digital Signal Common Output Terminal DCM factory setting Analog S freq current meter E ACM 0 10VDC 2mA Analog Signal common Factory setting output 10V frequency 3 Power supply RS 485 serial interface Factory setting 10V 20mA NOT for VED E C models ACIMode 5KQ 21 OAV 1 Reserved M Master Frequency ZEV l ise 1 Oto 10V 47K 2 3 GND ACI ea se ACI 4 865 ACI AVI switch 4 20
146. 255 0V 10 0 01 06 Voltage Vmin Motor 0 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V 20 0 01 07 Output Frequency 0 1 to 120 0 110 0 Upper Limit Output Frequency 0 0 to100 0 01 08 Md Lower Limit A01 13 Jog Acceleration 0 1 to 600 0 0 01 to 600 0 sec Time A01 14 Jog Deceleration 0 1 to 600 0 0 01 to 600 0 sec Time A 01 15 Jog Frequency 0 10 Hz to Fmax Pr 01 00 Hz 0 Linear Accel Decel 1 Auto Accel Linear Decel Auto acceleration 01 16 deceleration refer 2 Linear Accel Auto Decel to Accel Decel time setting 3 Auto Accel Decel Set by load 4 Auto Accel Decel set by Accel Decel Time setting 4 4 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters eee Ee Settings Setting Setting 01 17 Acceleration S 0 0 to 10 0 0 00 to 10 00 sec Curve 01 18 Deceleration S 0 0 to 10 0 0 00 to 10 00 sec Curve 0119 Accel Decel Time 0 Unit 0 1 sec 1 Unit 0 01 sec Delay Time at OHz 0 00 to 600 00 sec 01 20 BE for Simple Position Delay Time at 10Hz 0 00 to 600 00 sec 01 21 2 for Simple Position Delay Time at 20Hz 0 00 to 600 00 sec 01 22 for Simple Position Delay Time at 30Hz 0 00 to 600 00 sec 01 23 uh for Simple Position 01 24 Delay Time at 40Hz 0 00 to 600 00 sec for Simple Position Delay Time at 50Hz 0 00 to 600 00 sec 01 25 jh for Simple Position Maximum Output 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 220 0 01 27 Voltage Vmax Motor 1 460V
147. 26 will display 63 111111 for no action Weights 2 2 2 2 2 2 O Active For Example If Pr 04 26 displays 52 it means MI1 MI2 and MI4 are active The display value 527 3241644 1 X 2 1X 2f 1X 2 bit 6 X 2 bit 5 X 2 bit 3X 2 Weights 2 97 2 55 of 2 9 2 O Active i 1 0 Bit 2 Dr Dr Po s Do To we When extension is installed the number of the multi function input terminals will increase according to the extension card The maximum number of the multi function input terminals is shown as follows 4 100 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters 0 Active 7 0 5 4 Weights 2 2 2 22222222 2 1 0tt T MI2 MI3 MIA MI5 MI6 MI7 MI8 MI9 MI10 MI11 MI12 Internal External Multi function Input Terminals Selection Unit 1 Settings 0 to 4095 Factory Setting 0 Ea This parameter is used to select the terminals to be internal terminal or external terminal You can activate internal terminals by Pr 04 28 A terminal cannot be both internal terminal and external terminal at the same time Ea For standard AC motor drive without extension card the multi function input terminals are MI1 to MI6 as shown in the following Weights 25 2f 2 9 5 2 O external terminal Bit sT4IsT2T4 o ae terminal Ea The Setting method is convert binary number to decimal number for input Ea For example
148. 3 Multi function Output Terminal MO4 RA4 Multi function Output Terminal MO5 RA5 Multi function Output Terminal MO6 RA6 No function AC drive operational Master frequency attained Zero speed Over torque detection Base Block B B indication Low voltage indication Operation mode indication Fault indication Desired frequency 1 attained Terminal count value attained Preliminary count value attained Over Voltage Stall supervision Over Current Stall supervision Heat sink overheat warning Over Voltage supervision PID supervision Forward command Reverse command Zero speed output signal Warning FbE Cexx AoL2 AUE SAvE Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 27 Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Customer Setting 11 05 11 06 11 07 11 08 11 09 Multi function Output Terminal MO7 RA7 Multi function Input Terminal MI7 Multi function Input Terminal MI8 Multi function Input Terminal MI9 Multi function Input Terminal MI10 Multi function Input Terminal MI11 11 10 11 11 4 28 Multi function Input Terminal MI12 21 Brake control Desired frequency 22 23 attained Drive ready Desired frequency 2 attained No function Multi Step speed command 1 Multi Step speed command 2 Multi Step speed command 3 Multi Step speed command 4 External reset Acc
149. 3 GND 7 Reserved 4 56 8 Reserved ouu ol M n i E 4 LonTalk LonTalk Terminal definition for LonTalk system Terminal Symbol Function 1 These are twisted pair cables to connect XXX to LonTalk system Terminals 1 and 2 2 should be used as one group and the 4 same for terminals 3 and 4 B 10 2 5 LED Indications There are three LEDs in front panel of CME LWO 1 If the communication is normal power LED SP LED should be green red LED means abnormal communication and service LED should be OFF If LEDs display do not match refer to user manual for details B 10 3 Profibus Communication Module CME PD01 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 B 31 Appendix B Accessories B 32 gt p B 10 3 1 Panel Appearance Address Switches NETLED SPLED NETSP RELTA we CME PBO1 t mu Ju 3 RS 485 RJ45 1 Reserved 2 EV p 3 H SG il I L 1 5 SG d m 6 Reserved 48 7 Reserved 8 5 Profibus DP Interface DB9 SP LED Indicating the connection status between VFD E and CME PD01 NET LED Indicating the connection status between CME PD01 and PROFIBUS DP Address Switches Setting the address of CME PD01 on PROFIBUS DP network RS 485 Interface RJ45 Connecting to VFD E and supply power to CME PD01 PROFIBUS DP Interface DB9
150. 3 60 JJN 60 VFD075E43A 43C 19 18 40 JJS 40 VFD110E23A 23C 48 45 100 JJN 100 VFD110E43A 43C 26 24 50 JJS 50 VFD150E23A 23C 70 65 150 JJN 150 VFD150E43A 43C 35 32 70 JJN 70 VFD185E43A 43C 41 38 80 JJN 80 VFD220E43A 43C 49 45 100 JJN 100 B 4 AC Reactor B 4 1 AC Input Reactor Recommended Value 230V 50 60Hz 1 Phase kW HP Fundamental Max continuous Hductance mP Amps Amps 3 5 impedance 0 2 1 4 4 6 6 5 0 4 1 2 5 7 5 3 0 75 1 8 12 1 5 1 5 2 12 18 1 25 2 2 3 18 27 0 8 230V 50 60Hz 3 Phase Inductance mH kW HP Fundamental Max continuous Amps Amps 396 5 impedance impedance 0 2 1 4 2 3 9 20 0 4 1 2 2 3 6 5 12 0 75 1 4 6 3 6 5 1 5 2 8 12 1 5 3 B 12 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix B Accessories Inductance mH kW HP Fundamental Max continuous Amps Amps 3 5 impedance impedance 2 2 3 12 18 1 25 2 5 3 7 5 18 27 0 8 1 5 5 5 7 5 25 37 5 0 5 1 2 7 5 10 35 52 5 0 4 0 8 11 15 45 67 5 0 3 0 5 460V 50 60Hz 3 Phase kW HP M ps Amps 3 impedance 5 impedance 0 4 1 2 2 3 20 32 0 75 1 4 6 9 12 1 5 2 4 6 6 5 9 22 3 8 12 5 7 5 3 7 5 8 12 3 5 5 5 7 5 12 18 2 5 4 2 7 5 10 18 27 1 5 2 5 11 15 25 37 5 1 2 2 15 20 35 52 5 0 8 1 2 18 5 25 35 52 5 0 8 1 2 22 30 45 67 5 0 7 1 2
151. 4 Parameters Unit 0 01 Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Minimum Output Voltage Vmin Motor 1 Factory Setting 1 50 Unit 0 1 Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory Setting 10 0 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 20 0 Maximum Voltage Frequency Fbase Motor 2 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 60 00 Maximum Output Voltage Vmax Motor 2 Unit 0 1 Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Mid Point Frequency Fmid Motor 2 Factory Setting 220 0 Factory Setting 440 0 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Mid Point Voltage Vmid Motor 2 Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Minimum Output Frequency Fmin Motor 2 Factory Setting 1 50 Unit 0 1 Factory Setting 10 0 Factory Setting 20 0 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Minimum Output Voltage Vmin Motor 2 Factory Setting 1 50 Unit 0 1 Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory Setting 10 0 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 20 0 Maximum Voltage Frequency Fbase Motor 3 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 60 00 Maximum Output Voltage Vmax Motor 3 Unit 0 1 Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Mid Point Frequency Fmid Motor 3 Factory Setting 220 0 Factory Setting 440 0 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Mid Point Voltage Vmid Motor 3 Settings
152. 5 Zero Phase Reactor RF220X00A Dimensions are in millimeter and inch Recommended Wire Cable Size type Qty Note 2 Nominal AWG mm mm Wiring Method x10 x53 x55 4 Diagram Single A core lt 2 lt 336 lt 38 4 m o z12 z33 E35 1 lt 424 lt 50 4 ui ad IA Note 600V Insulated unshielded Cable Diagram A Please wind each wire 4 times around the core The reactor must be put at inverter output as close as possible Zero Phase Reactor 1 ED Power e SA2 VIT2 DE MOTOR 7 Suppl PPly T L3 WT3 Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix B Accessories Diagram B Please put all wires through 4 cores in series without winding Zero Phase Reactor PANNAN VA VON x Note 1 The table above gives approximate wire size for the zero phase reactors but the selection is ultimately governed by the type and diameter of cable fitted i e the cable must fit through the center hole of zero phase reactors Power Supply Note 2 Only the phase conductors should pass through not the earth core or screen Note 3 When long motor output cables are used an output zero phase reactor may be required to reduce radiated emissions from the cable B 17 Appendix B Accessories B 6 Remote Controller RC 01 Dimensions are in millimeter i i RC 01
153. 6 N O N C for standard AC motor drive The MI1 MI3 setting will be invalid when the operation command source is external terminal 2 3wire 5 4 43 2 41 40 Weights 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 N O Bit 1 N C 5 12 10 The Setting method It needs to convert binary number 6 bit to decimal number for input For example if setting MI5 MI6 to be N C and MI1 MI2 MIA to be N O The setting value Pr 04 09 should be bit5X2 bit4X2 bit2X27 1X2 1X244 1X27 3241644752 as shown in the following Weights 2 2 2 2 2 2 E Bit 4 MH MI2 MIA MIS MI6 Thesetting value NOTE al 2 16384 2 8192 2 4096 2 2048 2 1024 3241694 bos 2 512 2 256 2 128 2 64 2 32 Setting 04 09 2 46 27 8 24 272 2 1 When extension card is installed the number of the multi function input terminals will increase according to the extension card The maximum number of the multi function input terminals is shown as follows Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Weights 2 2 2 2 7 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 NC Bit polele 7 6 5 2 2 To u 04 10 Digital Terminal Input Debouncing Time Unit 2ms Settings 1 to 20 Factory Setting 1 Ea This parameter is used to set the response time of digital input terminals MI1 MI6 This parameter is to delay the signals on digital input terminals 1 unit is 2 msec
154. 75 100 125 150 rated frequency of the motor v rated frequency of the motor Standard motor Special Motor self cooled by fan forced external cooling Dra When the standard motor operates in low speed with rated current the motor overload protection will occur easily Thus please use the special motor when operates in low speed with rated current Refer to Appendix C 3 How to choose a suitable motor for motor selection 4 112 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Electronic Thermal Characteristic Unit 1 Settings 30 to 600 sec Factory Setting 60 The parameter determines the time required for activating the 12 electronic thermal protection function by the output frequency current of the AC motor drive and operation time to prevent motor from overheating The electronic thermal overload relay acts by Pr 06 06 setting 1 Pr 06 06 is set to O Operate with a Standard Motor self cooled by fan when the output current is greater than Pr 07 00 Motor Rated Current Motor 0 the corresponding motor rated current of motor rated frequency in standard motor figure in Pr 06 06 X150 the AC motor drive will start to count time When accumulated time exceeds Pr 06 07 Electronic Thermal Characteristic setting the electronic thermal overload relay protection OL1 will be ON 2 Pr 06 06 is set to 1 Operate with a Special Motor forced external cooling when the output current is greater th
155. 9 PIN connector that connects to PROFIBUS DP network Extended Socket 4 PIN socket that connects to PROFIBUS DP network Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix Accessories B 10 3 2 Dimensions 72 2 2 84 57 3 2 26 UNIT mm inch B 10 3 3 Parameters Settings in VFD E VFD E Baud Rate 9600 Pr 09 01 1 RTU 8 2 Pr 09 04 3 Freq Source Pr 02 00 4 Command Source Pr 02 01 3 B 10 3 4 Power Supply The power of CME PD01 is supplied from VFD E Please connect VFD E to CME PD01 by using 8 pins RJ 45 cable which is packed together with CME PD01 After connection is completed CME PD01 is powered whenever power is applied to VFD E B 10 3 5 PROFIBUS Address TR S So lt ADDL CME PD01 has two rotary switches for the user to select the PROFIBUS address The set value via 2 address switches ADDH and ADDL is in HEX format ADDH sets the upper 4 bits and ADDL sets the lower 4 bits of the PROFIBUS address Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 B 33 Appendix B Accessories Address Meaning 1 0x7D Valid PROFIBUS address or Ox7E 0xFE Invalid PROFIBUS address 10 4 CME COP01 CANopen CME COP01 CANopen communication module is specifically for connecting to CANopen communication module of Delta VFD E AC motor drive B 10 4 1 Product Profile COM port CANopen connection port RUN indicator
156. 99 FLA 0 4 FLA Torque 407 20 Compensation 0 0 to 10 0 0 0 Motor 1 Slip Compensation A 07 21 Used without PG 0 00 to 10 00 0 00 Motor 1 Motor Line to line 07 22 Resistance R1 0 65535 mQ 0 Motor 1 07 23 Motor Rated Slip 9 99 to 20 00 Hz 3 00 Motor 1 Motor Pole Number 07 24 Motor 1 2 to 10 4 07 25 Motor Rated Current 30 FLA to 120 FLA FLA Motor 2 4 20 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer 07 26 Motor No Load Current Motor 2 O FLA to 99 FLA 0 4 FLA 07 27 Torque Compensation Motor 2 0 0 to 10 0 0 0 M 07 28 Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 2 0 00 to 10 00 0 00 07 29 Motor Line to line Resistance R1 Motor 2 0 65535 mQ 07 30 Motor Rated Slip Motor 2 0 00 to 20 00 Hz 3 00 07 31 Motor Pole Number Motor 3 2to 10 07 32 Motor Rated Current Motor 3 30 FLA to 120 FLA FLA 07 33 Motor No Load Current Motor 3 O FLA to 99 FLA 0 4 FLA A 07 34 Torque Compensation Motor 3 0 0 to 10 0 0 0 A 07 35 Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 3 0 00 to 10 00 0 00 07 36 Motor Line to line Resistance R1 Motor 3 0 65535 mQ 07 37 Motor Rated Slip Motor 3 0 00 to 20 00 Hz 3 00 07 38 Motor Pole Number M
157. A ty 973 x x cos o 2 When one AC motor drive operates more than one motor 2 1 The starting capacity should be less than the rated capacity of AC motor drive a Acceleration time lt 60 seconds The starting capacity ELLAS n ks jJ 1X coso a Acceleration time 260 seconds 14 7 amp 1 nr Xl 5xthe capacity of AC motor drive kVA The starting capacity Ex ns ks jJ Pa 1x coso 1 1 the capacity of AC motor drive kVA Nr 2 2 The current should be less than the rated current of AC motor drive A a Acceleration time lt 60 seconds nr Iu 1 M ks 1 lt 1 5xthe rated current of AC motor drive A Acceleration time 260 seconds ny In 1 ks 1 lt the rated current of AC motor drive A 2 Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive 2 3 When it is running continuously The requirement of load capacity should be less than the capacity of AC motor drive kVA The requirement of load capacity kx P et capacity of AC motor drive kVA 7 The motor capacity should be less than the capacity of AC motor drive x43 xVu x Iu x10 lt the capacity of AC motor drive kVA The current should be less than the rated current of AC motor drive A amp the rated current of AC motor drive A Symbol explanation ta Motor
158. A2 used by PLC used by PLC MO4 RA4 used by PLC MOS RAS used by PLC MOG RAG used by PLC MO7 RA7 used by PLC Factory display 0 The equivalent 8 bit is used to display the status used or not used of each digital output The value that Pr 03 09 displays is the result after converting 8 bit binary into decimal value Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Ea For standard AC motor drive it only has 2 bit bitO and bit1 When extension card is installed the number of the digital output terminals will increase according to the extension card The maximum number of the digital output terminals is shown as follows used Weights 2 2 2 2 2 27 3 2 15Used by PLC Bt 7z e s 4 s 2 1 o Retay4 MO7 RA7 Ea For example when Pr 03 09 is set to 3 decimal 00000011 binary that indicates Relay1 and MO1 are used by PLC Pr 03 09 2 2 3 used Weights 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 UsedbyPLC 1 M01 MO2 RA2 MO3 RA3 MO4 RA4 MO5 RA5 MO6 RA6 MO7 RA7 The Analog Output Used by PLC NOT for VFD E C models Settings Read Only Factory display 0 BitO 1 AFM used by PLC Bit1 1 AO1 used by PLC Bit2 1 AO2 used by PLC Ea The equivalent 1 bit is used to display the status used or not used of each analog output The value that Pr 03 10 displays is the result after converting 1 bit binary into decimal value Revision Jan
159. Because the logical status is the same in the same horizontal line it needs to read the status of original contact to keep D 12 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function on analyzing other ladder diagram You can recognize the command MRD by the symbol 9 MPP command is used to read the start status of the top level and pop it out from stack Because it is the last item of the horizontal line it means the status of this horizontal line is ending MPS C 2 You can recognize this command by the symbol MPS C 2 pF L Basically that is all right to use the above ER C 2 MRD method to analyze but sometimes compiler will 1 MPP A omit the same outputs as shown at the right MRE m D 3 4 The Example for Designing Basic Program Start Stop and Latching In the same occasions it needs transient close button and transient open button to be start and stop switch Therefore if you want to keep the action you should design latching circuit There are several latching circuits in the following Example 1 the latching circuit for priority of stop When start normally open contact X1 On stop Y1 normally contact X2 Off and Y1 On are set at x1 STOP the same time if X2 On the coil Y1 will stop acting Therefore it calls priority of stop START Example 2 the latching circuit for priority of start When start
160. Bit2 Operation enabled Bit3 Fault Bit4 Voltage enabled Bit5 Quick stop Bit6 Switch on disabled 0x6041 0 Status word 0 RO U16 Yes Bit7 Warning Bit8 Bit9 Remote Bit10 Target reached Bit11 Internal limit active Bit12 13 Bit14 15 0x6042 vl target velocity 0 516 rpm Yes 0x6043 vi velocity 0 RO S16 Yes demand ramp function If Pr 01 19 is set to 0 1 the 0x604F 0 10000 RW U32 1ms Yes unit must be 100ms and time can t be set to 0 If Pr 01 19 is set to 0 1 the 0x6050 0 slow down time 10000 RW U32 1ms Yes must be 100ms can t be set to 0 If Pr 01 19 is set to 0 1 the 0x6051 0 vl quick stop time 1000 RW 032 1 Yes junit must be 100ms and can t be set to 0 E 12 Revision Jan 2009 OGEE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Factory Index Sub Definition Setting RW Size Unit Map NOTE 0 disable drive function 1 slow down on slow down ramp 2 slow down on quick stop Quick stop option ramp 2th decel time Ox605A 0 ode 2 RW 516 1ms Yes 5 slow down on slow down ramp and stay in QUICK STOP 6 slow down on quick stop ramp and stay in QUICK STOP o Mode of 2 RO U8 Yes Speed mode operation oxe061 o Mode of 2 RO Yes operation display E 2 How to Control by CANopen To control the AC motor drive by CANopen plea
161. Brake Pii qae AC Drive Part No Torque Me oe and n o for each AC gt n kw KG M uantity uantity Motor Drive 025 02 VFD002E11A 11C 11P 0 110 200W 2500 BUE 20015 1 BR200W250 1 320 2000 VFD002E11T 200W 2500 BR200W250 1 320 2000 2 o5 04 VFD004E11A 11C 11P 0216 200W 2500 BUE 20015 1 BR200W250 1 170 1000 VFD004E11T 200W 2500 BR200W250 1 170 1000 1 0 75 VFD007E11A 11C 11P 0 427 200W 1500 BR200W150 1 140 800 VFD002E21A 21C 21P 23A 200W 2500 0 25 0 2 23C 23P 0 110 BUE 20015 1 BR200W250 1 320 2000 VFD002E21T 23T 200W 2500 BR200W250 1 320 2000 VFD004E21A 21C 21P 23A 200W 2500 BR200W250 0 5 0 4 23C 23P 0 216 20015 1 1 1999 VFD004E21T 23T 200W 2500 BR200W250 1 170 1000 VFD007E21A 21C 21P 23A 200W 1500 1 0 75 23 23 0 427 BUE 20015 1 BR200W150 1 140 800 5 VFD007E21T 23T 200W 1500 BR200W150 1 140 800 o VFD015E21A 21C 300W 850 125 402 8 2 1 5 VFD015E23T 0 849 300W 850 125 800 i VFD015E23A 23C 23P 300W 850 BUE 20015 1 125 800 3 2 2 VFD022E21A 21C 23A 23C 1 262 600W 500 120 402 5 3 7 VFD037E23A 23C 2 080 600W 500 107 402 7 5 5 5 VFD055E23A 23C 3 111 1800W 37 50 85 340 10 7 5 VFD075E23A 23C 4 148 1200W 250 90 24Q 15 11 VFD110E23A 23C 6 186 1200W 80 BR1K2W008 2 100 80 20 15 VFD150E23A 23C 8 248 13000W 109 BR1K5W005 2 119 100 05 04 VFD004E43A 43C 43P 0 246 300W 4002 BUE 40015 1 BR300W400 1
162. C 43A 43C VFD150E23A 23C 43A 43C VFD185E43A 43C VFD220E43A 43C Built in EMI Filter For 230V 1 phase and 460V 3 phase models Enclosure Rating IP20 Pollution Degree 2 Installation Location Altitude 1 000 m or lower keep from corrosive gasses liquid and dust 0 o A A gt Ambient Temperature 10 C to 50 40 C for side by side mounting Non Condensing and not frozen Storage Transportation 20 C to 60 Temperature Ambient Humidity Below 9096 RH non condensing Vibration 9 80665m s 1G less than 20Hz 5 88m s 0 6G at 20 to 50Hz Environmental Conditions mm C 6 y Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 A 3 Appendix A Specifications This page intentionally left blank A 4 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix B Accessories B 1 All Brake Resistors amp Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives Note Please only use DELTA resistors and recommended values Other resistors and values will void Delta s warranty Please contact your nearest Delta representative for use of special resistors The brake unit should be at least 10 cm away from AC motor drive to avoid possible interference Refer to the Brake unit Module User Manual for further details o ed Equivalent Brake Unit Part Brake Resistors
163. CR END LF STX i Address s 0 Function gi oO oO Data address 07 ZE 7 Data content T T T LRC Check T CR END LF Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 145 Chapter 4 Parameters 4 146 RTU mode Command message Response message Address 01H Function 08H 00H Data address 00H 17H Data content 70H CRC CHK Low EEH CRC CHK High 1FH 4 10H write multiple registers write mu Example Set the multi step speed Pr 05 00 50 00 1388H Pr 05 01 40 00 AC drive address is 01H Address 01H Function 08H 00H Data address 00H 17H Data content 70H CRC CHK Low EEH CRC CHK High 1FH tiple data to registers Response message STX ei Address 1 0 Address 0 T Function 1 dq Function 0 0 T Starting data 5 address 0 oO oO Number of data 0 count by word KO 2 LRC Check g CR END LF ASCII Mode Command message STX ku Address 1 0 Address 0 T Function 1 T Function 0 0 oO Starting data 5 address 0 oO oO Number of data 0 count by word 0 2 Number of data 0 count by byte a EL The first data content g g oO The second data F content A oO
164. Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring to the group 9 for details Method2 control by the optional keypad KPE LEO2 Refer to Appendix B for details a When it needs to install the filter at the output side of terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 on the AC motor drive Please use inductance filter Do not use phase compensation capacitors or L C Inductance Capacitance or R C Resistance Capacitance unless approved by Delta DO NOT connect phase compensation capacitors or surge absorbers at the output terminals of AC motor drives Use well insulated motor suitable for inverter operation Terminals B1 B2 for connecting brake resistor Brakeresistor optional E BR Brake unit optional Refer to Appendix B for details pd BR pu gaara BR BUE B1 B2 B1 B2 B1 Connect a brake resistor brake unit applications with frequent deceleration ramps short deceleration time too low brake torque or requiring increased brake torque If the AC motor drive has a built in brake chopper frame B frame C VFDxxxExxT models connect the external brake resistor to the terminals B1 B2 or B1 B2 Models of frame A don t have a built in brake chopper Please connect an external optional brake unit BUE series and brake resistor Refer to BUE series user manual for details a Connect the terminals P N of the brake unit to the AC motor drive term
165. DELTA ELECTRONICS INC User Manual 4 4 SEE Power Range 1 phase 115V series 0 2 0 75kW 0 25 1HP 1 phase 230V series 0 2 2 2kW 0 25 3HP 3 phase 230V series 0 2 15kW 0 25 20HP 3 phase 460V series 0 4 22kW 0 50 30HP MELTA DELTA ELECTRONICS INC www delta com tw industrialautomation ASIA Delta Electronics Inc Taoyuan1 31 1 Xingbang Road Guishan Industrial Zone Taoyuan County 33370 Taiwan R O C TEL 886 3 362 6301 FAX 886 3 362 7267 Delta Electronics Jiang Su Ltd Wujiang Plant3 1688 Jiangxing East Road Wujiang Economy Development Zone Wujiang City Jiang Su Province People s Republic of China Post code 215200 TEL 86 512 6340 3008 FAX 86 512 6340 7290 Delta Electronics Japan Inc Tokyo Office Delta Shibadaimon Building 2 1 14 Shibadaimon Minato Ku Tokyo 105 0012 Japan TEL 81 3 5733 1111 FAX 81 3 5733 1211 Delta Electronics Korea Inc 234 9 Duck Soo BD 7F Nonhyun dong Kangnam Gu Seoul Korea Post code 135 010 TEL 82 2 515 5303 5 FAX 82 2 515 530 Delta Electronics Singapore Pte Ltd 8 Kaki Bukit Road 2 04 18 Ruby Warehouse Complex Singapore 417841 TEL 65 6747 5155 FAX 65 6744 9228 Delta Energy Systems India Pvt Ltd Plot No 27 amp 31 Sector 34 EHTP Gurgaon 122001 Haryana India TEL 91 124 4169040 FAX 91 124 4036045 AMERICA Delta Products Corporation USA Raleigh Office P O Box 12173 5101 Davis
166. Drive Research Triangle Park NC 27709 U S A TEL 1 919 767 3813 FAX 1 919 767 3969 EUROPE Deltronics Netherlands B V Eindhoven Office De Witbogt 15 5652 AG Eindhoven The Netherlands TEL 31 40 259 28 50 FAX 31 40 259 28 51 We reserve the right to change the information in this manual without prior notice 5011640606 200901 23 O6EE A ELTA WE2 E User Manual High Performance Flexible Options Micro Type AC Motor Drives Preface Thank you for choosing DELTA s high performance VFD E Series The VFD E Series is manufactured with high quality components and materials and incorporate the latest microprocessor technology available This manual is to be used for the installation parameter setting troubleshooting and daily maintenance of the AC motor drive To guarantee safe operation of the equipment read the following safety guidelines before connecting power to the AC motor drive Keep this operating manual at hand and distribute to all users for reference To ensure the safety of operators and equipment only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor drive are to do installation start up and maintenance Always read this manual thoroughly before using VFD E series AC Motor Drive especially the WARNING DANGER and CAUTION notes Failure to comply may result in personal injury and equipment damage If you have any questions please contact your deal
167. F OFF ON OFF 2 AND ANI command single device connects to a device or a block in series AND command AND command 44 ET Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 D 11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function The structures of ANDP and ANDF are the same but the action is in rising edge or falling edge 3 ORI command single device connects to a device or a block ca oh Lo ORcommand ORcommand OR command The structures of ORP and ORF are the same but the action is in rising edge or falling edge 4 ANB command a block connects to a device or a block in series ANB command 5 ORB command If there are several blocks when operate ANB or ORB they should be combined to blocks or network from up to down or from left to right 6 MPS MRD MPP commands Divergent memory of multi output It can produce many various outputs 7 command MPS is the start of divergent point The divergent point means the connection place between horizontal line and vertical line We should determine to have contact memory command or not according to the contacts status in the same vertical line Basically each contact could have memory command but in some places of ladder diagram conversion will be omitted due to the PLC operation convenience and capacity limit MPS command can be used for 8 continuous times and you can recognize this command by the symbol T 8 MRD command is used to read memory of divergent point
168. Fig 1 B B Speed Search with Last Frequency Downward Timing Chart Outputfrequency 1 H p Input signal Stop output voltage 2 o Q p outp j g Q vA DisableB B signal C Waiting time 08 07 08 08 Current Limit A amp forSpeed SearchS peed Speed Search Synchronization speed detection Time FWD Run 6G ke O gt B B Fig 2 B B Speed Search with Min Output Frequency Upward Timing C hart AITE Baseblock Time for Speed Search BB Unit 0 1 Settings 0 1 to 5 0 sec Factory Setting 0 5 When momentary power loss is detected the AC motor drive will block its output and then wait for a specified period of time determined by Pr 08 07 called Base Block Time before resuming operation This parameter should be set at a value to ensure that any residual regeneration voltage from the motor on the output has disappeared before the drive is activated again This parameter also determines the waiting time before resuming operation after External Baseblock and Auto Restart after Fault Pr 08 15 When using a PG card with PG encoder speed search will begin at the actual PG encoder feedback speed 4 130 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters RUM Current Limit for Speed Search Unit 1 Settings 30 to 20096 Factory Setting 150 En En It limits the drive output current during speed search When executing speed search the V f curve will be
169. H Address High 4 Exception code 02H Function Low 8 CRC CHK Low C3H Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Function High 6 CRC CHK High A1H o Exception code 2 LRC CHK Low T LRC CHK High 7 END 1 CR END 0 LF The explanation of exception codes Exception pec Explanation Illegal function code 01 The function code received in the command message is not available for the AC motor drive 02 Illegal data address The data address received in the command message is not available for the AC motor drive 03 Illegal data value The data value received in the command message is not available for the AC drive 04 Slave device failure The AC motor drive is unable to perform the requested action 10 Communication time out If Pr 09 03 is not equal to 0 0 Pr 09 02 0 2 and there is no communication on the bus during the Time Out detection period set by Pr 09 03 cE10 will be shown on the keypad 3 7 Communicati ion program of PC The following is a simple example of how to write a communication program for Modbus ASCII mode on a PC in C language include lt stdio h include lt dos h gt gt include lt conio h gt include lt proces s h define PORT OxO3F8 the address of the address offset value relative to COM1 define THR 0x0000
170. I4 Pr 04 07 Multi function Input Terminal MI5 Pr 04 08 Multi function Input Terminal MI6 02 18 Selection for Carrier Modulation Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 By carrier modulation of load current and temperature 1 By carrier modulation of load current 4 70 Setting 0 The PWM carrier frequency Fc will be decreased automatically by heat sink temperature and output current of the AC motor drive Please refer to the following figure for the decreasing the PWM carrier frequency It is used as a necessary precaution to prevent the AC motor drive from overheating and thus extends IGBT s life Example for 460V models Assume the carrier frequency to be 15kHz the ambient temperature is 35 degrees C with a single AC motor drive mounting method A If the output current exceeds 80 rated current Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters the AC motor drive will decrease the carrier frequency automatically according to the following figure If output current is 10096 rated current the carrier frequency will decrease from 15kHz to 12kHz Mounting method Method A Frame Frame B amp Method B Frame Frame amp Ea The relation between rated current and carrier frequency 25 C with mounting method A 100 15 C with mounting method B 90 35 C with mounting method 25 C with mounting method B 80
171. L V2 12 Appendix B Accessories B 9 Extension Card For details please refer to the separate instruction shipped with these optional cards or download from our website http www delta com tw industrialautomation Installation method B 9 1 Relay Card EME R2CA Relay Output Relay Output Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 B 25 Appendix B Accessories B 9 2 Digital Card EME D33A 94V 0 ET 0 E9 2 ab pog B 9 3 Analog I O Card EME A22A B 9 4 Communication Card CME USB01 B 26 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix B Accessories connect to extension card connect to PC 0 B 9 5 Speed Feedback EME PGO01 4 ty Q N B 10 Fieldbus Modules B 10 1 DeviceNet Communication Module CME DN01 B 10 1 1 Panel Appearance and Dimensions 1 For RS 485 connection to VFD E 2 Communication port for connecting DeviceNet network 3 Address selector 4 Baud rate selector 5 Three LED status indicators for monitor Refer to the figure below Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 B 27 Appendix B Accessories 59 7 2 35 72 2 2 84 35 8 1 41 Las 3 5 0 14 UNIT mm inch B 10 1 2 Wiring and Settings Refer to following diagram for
172. MI2 MI4 15 MI6 DCM DCM 24V ACM AVI ACI 10V RS 485 port Frame Control Terminals Torque Wire Terminals 1 5 kgf cm 4 4 in Ibf 12 24 AWG 8 3 0 2mm Terminals 2 2 kgf cm 1 7 in Ibf 16 24 AWG 1 3 0 2mm Frame A VFD002E11A 21A 23A VFD004E11A 21A 23A 43A VFD007E21A 23A 43A VFD015E23A 43A VFD002E11C 21C 23C VFD004E11C 21C 23C 43C VFD007E21C 23C 43C VFD015E23C 43C VFD002E11T 21T 23T VFD004E11T 21T 23T 43T VFD007E21T 23T 43T VFD015E23T 43T VFD002E11P 21P 23P VFD004E11P 21P 23P 43P VFD007E21P 23P 43P VFD015E23P 43P Frame B VFD007E11A VFD015E21A VFD022E21A 23A 43A VFD037E23A 43A VFD007E11C VFD015E21C VFD022E21C 23C 43C VFD037E23C 43C Frame C VFD055E23A 43A VFD075E23A 43A VFD110E23A 43A VFD055E23C 43C VFD075E23C 43C VFD110E23C 43C Frame D VFD150E23A 43A VFD150E23C 43C VFD185E43A 43C VFD220E43A 43C Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 2 21 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring This page intentionally left blank 2 22 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up CAUTION WARNING 3 1 Keypad Make sure that the wiring is correct In particular check that the output terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 are NOT connected to power and that the drive is well grounded Verify that no other equipment is connected to the AC motor drive Do NOT operate the AC motor drive with humid hands Please check if READY LED i
173. O 1 B 27 B 10 1 1 Panel Appearance and Dimensions B 27 B 10 1 2 Wiring and Settings se B 28 B 10 1 3 Mounting Method sse B 28 B 10 1 4 Power Supply eee meme B 29 B 10 4 5 EEDS Display eterni eene tege 2 B 29 B 10 2 LonWorks Communication Module CME LWO 1 B 30 B 10 2 1 Introduction retener eot itt en B 30 10 2 2 Dimensions nece iii B 30 B 10 2 3 Specifications B 30 B 10 2 4 Wiring eter rite reinen cree B 31 B 10 2 5 LED Indications nannan nanna nnna n B 31 B 10 3 Profibus Communication Module CME PD01 B 31 B 10 3 1 Panel Appearance B 32 B 10 3 2 Dimensions ee eure gott nn B 33 B 10 3 3 Parameters Settings in B 33 B 10 3 4 Power Supply iridoider B 33 B 10 3 5 PROFIBUS Address B 33 B 10 4 1 CANopen essen B 34 B 10 4 1 Product Profile oo cc 34 B 10 4 2 Specifications rettet 34 B 10 4 3 Components 35 B 10 4 4 LED Indicator Explanation amp Troubleshooting B 36 B 11 DIN Ra il 5 reci repre i eas B 38 B 11 1 MKE DRA
174. O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Ea If it doesn t receive PID feedback signal over Pr 10 08 setting the feedback signal fault will occur and please refer to Pr 10 09 for the fault treatment Related parameter Pr 10 09 Treatment of the Erroneous PID Feedback Signals Treatment of the Erroneous Feedback Signals for PID feedback error Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Warning and RAMP to stop 1 Warning and COAST to stop 2 Warning and keep operating Ea AC motor drive action when the feedback signals analog PID feedback are abnormal according to Pr 10 16 Ea Setting Pr 10 09 to 0 When the feedback signal fault occurs it will display FbE on the digital keypad and the motor will stop to OHz by Pr 01 10 Pr 01 12 setting It needs to clear RESET to clear the warning message Ea Setting Pr 10 09 to 1 When the feedback signal fault occurs it will display FbE on the digital keypad and the motor will free run to stop It needs to press RESET to clear the warning message Ea Setting Pr 10 09 to 2 When the feedback signal fault occurs it will display FbE on the digital keypad and the motor will keep running The warning message can be cleared after the feedback signal is normal Ea Related parameters Pr 10 00 PID Set Point Selection Pr 10 01 Input Terminal for PID Feedback Pr 10 12 PID Offset Level and Pr 10 13 Detection Time of PID Offset gt The digital keypad is optional Please refe
175. P DOWN key to change frequency commands press RIGHT LEFT key to adjus number A A MODE MODE MODE Y yY Yy Y 2x E 2x7 Or PRO MODE DATA d XX Press UP key to select 0 9 SAVE or READ MODE PROS Press PROG DATA for Y about 2 seconds or until XX XX it is flashing then save S parameters from PUOG to c AC drive or read parameters PROG MODE y DAT o from AC drive to PUOG XXXXX Adjust gt gt Number PROG DAT ERR END Cannot Succeed to write in Write in B 20 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 B 8 KPE LE02 Appendix B Accessories B 8 1 Description of the Digital Keypad KPE LE02 STOP 7 RESET Status Display Display the driver s current status LED Display Indicates frequency voltage current user defined units and etc Potentiometer For master Frequency setting RUN Key Start AC drive operation UP and DOWN Key Set the parameter number and changes the numerical data such as Master Frequency MODE Change between different display mode STOP RESET Stops AC drive operation and reset the drive after fault occurred ENTER Used to enter modify progra
176. P10 dEb error ACL Abnormal Communication Loop co 4 116 In Pr 06 08 to Pr 06 12 the five most recent faults that occurred are stored After removing the cause of the fault use the reset command to reset the drive Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 7 Motor Parameters Motor Rated Current Motor 0 Unit 1 Settings 30 FLA to 120 FLA Factory Setting FLA En Use the following formula to calculate the percentage value entered in this parameter Motor Current AC Drive Current x 10096 with Motor Current Motor rated current in A on type shield AC Drive Current Rated current of AC drive in A see Pr 00 01 Pr 07 00 must be greater than Pr 07 01 Example Suppose that the rated current of 460V 2 0HP 1 5kW is 4 2A with the factory setting 4 2A The range that user can set is from 1 3A 4 2X30 to 5 0A 4 2X120 But when Pr 07 00 is set to less than 1 7 4 2 40 it needs to set Pr 07 01 to be less than 30 FLA first In this way Pr 07 00 is greater than Pr 07 01 Pr 07 00 and Pr 07 01 must be set if the drive is programmed to operate in Vector Control mode Pr 00 10 1 They also must be set if the Electronic Thermal Overload Relay Pr 06 06 or Slip Compensation Pr 07 03 and Pr 07 06 functions are selected The full load current should be less than the rated current of the AC motor drive and should be greater than 1 2 rated current of the AC motor drive
177. PID controller This parameter is used to set the integral time of controller When the integral time is long it will have small gain of 1 controller the slower response and bad external control When the 4 160 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters integral time is short it will have large gain of controller the faster response and rapid external control When the integral time is too small it may cause system oscillation Ea When it is set to 0 0 the integral function is disabled Ea Related parameter Pr 10 05 Upper Bound for Integral Control 10 04 Differential Control D Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 1 00 sec Factory Setting 0 00 Ea The differential controller is used to show the change of system error and it is helpful to preview the change of error So the differential controller can be used to eliminate the error to improve system state With the suitable differential time it can reduce overshoot and shorten adjustment time However the differential operation will increase the noise interference Please note that too large differential will cause big noise interference Besides the differential shows the change and the output of the differential will be 0 when there is no change Therefore the differential control can t be used independently It needs to be used with other two controllers to make a PD controller or PID controller This parameter be used
178. PLC Ladder D 10 0 3 4 The Example for Designing Basic Program D 13 D 4 PLE DEVICES reote reete ne ie eren Pee eie ede D 18 D 4 1 Summary of DVP PLC Device D 18 0 4 2 Devices Functions seee e D 19 0 4 3 Value Constant H D 20 0 4 4 The Function of Auxiliary D 21 D 4 5 The F nctiorrof Timer teinte to desert tne ettet D 21 0 4 6 The Features and Functions of D 22 D 4 7 Register Types reiner eec tees etre qnit eed D 23 0 4 8 Special Auxiliary Relays D 24 D 4 9 Special Registers 25 ccena ie eesti inner D 25 D 4 10 Communication Addresses for Devices only for PLC2 mode D 26 0 4 11 Function Code only for PLC2 D 27 D 5 Commands D 27 0 5 1 Basic Commands sss eene D 27 D 5 2 Output Commands seem D 28 0 5 3 Timer and Counters isisi iadenin D 28 D 5 4 Main Control CommandQs eee D 28 0 5 5 Rising edge falling edge Detection Commands of Contact D 28 0 5 6 Rising edge falling edge Output Commands
179. Parameters This page intentionally left blank 4 188 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 5 1 Over Current OC OCA OC Over current Over current 7 Over current during acceleration during deceleration Remove short circuit PERGEN Check if there is any short circuits and or ground fault grounding between the U V W and motor jw No No Reduce the load or Yes E increase the power Check if load is too large of AC motor drive No No No Reduce torque compensation compensation Yes Reduce torque compensation Check if Check i No is too short by V is too short by load inertia load inertia No acceleration time deceleration time Yes Yes Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or error due to noise Please contact DELTA le N lei Yes Y AA Yes acceleration Yes Can deceleration time be made longer time be made longer No No Y Increase accel decel Reduce load or increase time the power of AC motor drive Reduce load or increase Check braking 1 the power of AC motor method Please drive contact DELTA Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 5 1 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 5 2 Ground Fault Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperati
180. Pr 01 06 and Pr 01 01 gt Pr 01 03 gt Pr 01 05 By this condition V f curve is shown in the following figure In vector control mode Pr 00 10 is set to 1 Pr 01 03 Pr 01 04 and Pr 01 06 are disabled But Pr 01 05 is still the minimum output frequency The V f curve of motor 0 to motor 3 can be selected by setting the multi function input terminals MI3 MI6 Pr 04 05 to Pr 04 08 to 27 and 28 To set the voltage and frequency for each motor please refer to Pr 01 01 01 06 for motor 0 factory setting Pr 01 26 01 31 for motor 1 Pr 01 32 01 37 for motor 2 and Pr 01 38 01 43 for motor 3 Related parameters Pr 01 01 Maximum Voltage Frequency Fbase Motor 0 Pr 01 02 Maximum Output Voltage Vmax Motor 0 Pr 01 03 Mid Point Frequency Fmid Motor 0 Pr 01 04 Mid Point Voltage Vmid Motor 0 and Pr 01 05 Minimum Output Frequency Fmin Motor 0 Voltage Maximum Output Voltage Vbase 01 04 a Mid point Voltage Vmid 01 06 Minimum 04 05 01 03 01 01 01 00 NEA Minimum Mid point Maximum Voltage Maximum otage Output Freq Frequency Output Vmin Freq Fmid Fbase Frequency Fmin V f Curve Frequency Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 ELM Output Frequency Upper Limit Unit 0 1 Chapter 4 Parameters Settings 0 1 to 120 0 Factory Setting 110 0 Ea This parameter must be equal to or greater than the Output Frequency Lower Limit Pr 01 08 The Maximum Outp
181. R command is used in the parallel connection of A contact The function of the command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts and then to perform the OR calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts thereafter saving the result into the accumulative register Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 D 31 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation LD Load contact A of 1 OR 1 Connect to contact A of X1 in parallel OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function ORI Parallel connection B contact X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand Y Y 4 v Y zs Explanations The ORI command is used in the parallel connection of B contact The function of the command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts and then to perform the OR calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts thereafter saving the result into the accumulative register Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation LD 1 Load contact A of ORI X1 Connect to contact B of X1 X1 in parallel OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function ANB Series connection Multiple Circuits Operand None Explanations To perform the ANB calculation between the previous reserved logic results and contents of the accu
182. SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Settings Function Description External Base 9 Block Refer to Pr 08 06 Parameter value 09 programs a Multi function Input Terminals for external Base Block control NOTE When a Base Block signal is received the AC motor drive will block all output and the motor will free run When base block control is deactivated the AC drive will start its speed search function and synchronize with the motor speed and then accelerate to Master Frequency external base block synchronous speed output Speed search starts detection frequency with last frequency command output B B time voltage 08 07 speed search UP Increase Master Frequency DOWN Decrease Master Frequency Increase decrease the Master Frequency each time an input is received or continuously when the input stays active When both inputs are active at the same time the Master Frequency increase decrease is halted Please refer to Pr 02 07 02 08 This function is also called motor potentiometer 12 Counter Trigger Parameter value 12 programs one of the Multi function Input Terminals MI3 MI6 Pr 04 05 Pr 04 08 to increment the AC drive s internal counter When an input is received the counter is incremented by 1 13 Counter Reset When active the counter is reset and inhibited To enable counting the input should be OFF Refer to Pr 03 05 and 03 06 Revisi
183. Setting 60 00 This parameter can be used to set frequency command or read keypad frequency command Related parameters Pr 02 12 Communication Frequency Command m Communication Frequency Command Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 60 00 This parameter be used to set frequency command read communication frequency command Ea It can use this parameter for remote control via communication The Selections for Saving Keypad or Communication Frequency Command Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Save Keypad amp Communication Frequency 1 Save Keypad Frequency only 2 Save Communication Frequency only Not for VFD E C model LL This parameter is used to save keypad or RS 485 frequency command Setting 0 After the AC motor drive is power off save keypad and communication frequency in the AC motor drive Setting 1 After the AC motor drive is power off only save keypad frequency in the AC motor drive and won t save communication frequency Setting 2 After the AC motor drive is power off only save communication frequency the motor drive and won t save keypad frequency The keypad or communication frequency only can be saved when 02 00 02 09 0 the source of frequency is from keypad or Pr 02 00 Pr 02 09 3 the source of frequency is from communication Related parameters Pr 0
184. UN moment Pulse width scan period M1004 Reserved M1005 Fault indication of the AC motor drives M1006 Output frequency is 0 M1007 The operation direction of AC motor drives FWD 0 REV 1 M1008 Reserved M1009 Reserved M1010 Reserved M1011 10ms clock pulse 5ms On 5ms Off M1012 100ms clock pulse 50ms On 50ms Off M1013 1s clock pulse 0 55 On 0 55 Off M1014 1min clock pulse 30s On 30s Off M1015 Frequency attained M1016 Parameter read write error M1017 Succeed to write parameter M1018 Enable high speed counter function When M1028 On M1019 Reserved M1020 Zero flag M1021 Borrow flag M1022 Carry flag DID D D D D D D D D D D M1023 Divisor is O M1024 Reserved M1025 RUN ON STOP OFF the AC motor drive R W D 24 Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function n Function SN M1026 The operation direction of the AC motor drive FWD OFF REV ON R W M1027 Reserved M1028 Enable ON disable OFF high speed counter function R W M1029 Clear the value of high speed counter R W M1030 Decide to count up OFF count down ON R W M1031 Reserved D 4 9 Special Registers Special D Function Read R Write W D1000 Reserved 01001 PLC
185. V1 12 CTL V2 12 Example 5 Interlock control Appendix D How to Use PLC Function xi LT 4 Y2 The figure above is the circuit of interlock control Y1 and Y2 will act according to the start contact X1 and X2 Y1 and Y2 will act not at the same time once one of them acts and the other won t act This is called interlock Even if X1 and X2 are valid at the same time Y1 and Y2 won t act at the same time due to up to down scan of ladder diagram For this ladder diagram Y1 has higher priority than Y2 Example 6 Sequential Control X1 X3 Y2 Example 7 Oscillating Circuit The period of oscillating circuit is A T AT Y1 If add normally close contact Y2 into Y1 circuit to be an input for Y1 to do AND function as shown in the left side Y1 is an input of Y2 and Y2 can stop Y1 after acting In this way Y1 and Y2 can execute in sequential JT LI LIT L I 1 9 AT AT The figure above is a very simple ladder step diagram When starting to scan Y1 normally close contact Y1 normally close contact is close due to the coil Y1 is OFF Then it will scan Y1 and the coil Y1 will be ON and output 1 In the next scan period to scan normally close contact Y1 Y1 normally close contact will be open due to Y1 is ON Finally coil Y1 will be OFF The result of repeated scan coil Y will output the vibrating pulse with cycle time T On T Off Revision Jan 2009 06
186. V1 12 CTL V2 12 E 7 Appendix E CANopen Function Type number 255 indicates the data is asynchronous transmission All PDO transmission data must be mapped to index via Object Dictionary Example Master transmits PDO data to Slave PDO1 CAN H gt gt CAN L gt gt gt Master Slave PDO1 data value Data 0 Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5 Data 6 Data 7 0x11 0x22 0x33 0x44 0x55 0x66 0x77 0x88 Index Sub efinition Value R W Size C 0x60400010 PDO1 Map X 2 x us 0x60400010 0x6040 0 0 Control word 0x2211 R W 2 Bytes Slave returns message to Master PDO1 CAN H CAN L 4 4 Master Slave PDO1 data value Data 0 Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5 Data 6 Data 7 OxF3 0x00 5 ndex Sub Definition Value R W Size C N PDO1 Map M 0x60410010 0 6041 0 Status Word sS OXES 8 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function E 1 4 4 EMCY Emergency Object Emergency objects are triggered when hardware failure occurs for a warning interrupt The data format of a emergency object is a 8 bytes data as shown in the following
187. VFD150E43A 43C 70 VFD185E43A 43C 80 VFD220E43A 43C 100 B 10 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 B 3 Fuse Specification Chart Smaller fuses than those shown in the table are permitted Appendix B Accessories 1 A Line Fuse Model Input Output 1 Bussmann P N VFD002E11A 11T 11C 6 1 6 15 JJN 15 11 VFD002E21A 21T 21C 4 9 1 6 10 JJN 10 121P VFD002E23A 23C 23T 1 9 1 6 5 JJN 6 23P VEDO04E11A 11C 11T 9 25 20 JJN 20 11 VFD004E21A 21C 21T 6 5 2 5 15 JJN 15 121P VFD004E23A 23C 23T 2 7 2 5 5 JJN 6 123P VFD004E43A 43C 43T 1 9 1 5 5 JJS 6 43P VFD007E11A 11C 18 4 2 30 JJN 30 VFD007E21A 21C 21T 9 7 42 20 JJN 20 121P VFD007E23A 23C 23T 5 1 42 10 JJN 10 23P VFD007E43A 43C 43T 3 2 2 5 5 JJS 6 43P VFD015E21A 21C 15 7 7 5 30 JJN 30 VFD015E23A 23C 23T 9 75 20 JJN 20 23P VFD015E43A 43C 43T 4 3 42 10 JJS 10 143P VFD022E21A 21C 24 11 50 JJN 50 VFD022E23A 23C 15 11 30 JJN 30 VFD022E43A 43C 7 1 5 5 15 JJS 15 VFD037E23A 23C 20 6 17 40 JJN 40 VFD037E43A 43C 11 2 8 2 20 JJS 20 VFD055E23A 23C 26 25 50 JJN 50 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 B 11 Appendix B Accessories I 1 Line Fuse Model Input Output 1 Bussmann P N VFD055E43A 43C 14 13 30 JJS 30 VFD075E23A 23C 34 3
188. actory 10 Current exceeds 2 times rated current during decel ocd 11 Current exceeds 2 times rated current during steady state operation ocn 12 Ground fault GFF 13 Reserved 14 Phase Loss PHL 15 Reserved 16 Auto Acel Decel failure CFA 06 10 Third Most Recent 17 SW Password protection codE Fault Record 18 Power Board CPU WRITE failure cF1 0 19 Power Board CPU READ failure cF2 0 20 CC OC Hardware protection failure HPF 1 06 11 Fourth Most Recent 21 OV Hardware protection failure HPF2 Fault Record 22 GFF Hardware protection failure HPF3 23 OC Hardware protection failure HPF4 24 U phase error cF3 0 dias Fifth Most Recent 25 V phase error cF3 1 Fault Record 26 W phase error cF3 2 27 DCBUS error cF3 3 28 IGBT Overheat cF3 4 29 Power Board Overheat cF3 5 30 Control Board CPU WRITE failure cF 1 1 31 Control Board CPU WRITE failure cF2 1 32 ACI signal error AErr 33 Reserved 4 18 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Factory Group 7 Motor Parameters 34 Motor PTC overheat protection PtC1 35 39 Reserved 40 Communication time out error of control board and power board CP10 41 dEb error 42 ACL Abnormal Communication Loop Parameter Explanation Settings Customer etting 07 00 Motor Rated Current 30 FLA to 120 FLA FLA Motor 0 Motor No Load P 07 01 Current
189. add the END command at the end of ladder diagram program or command program PLC will scan from address o to END command after executing it will return to address 0 to scan again D 5 9 Description of the Application Commands Mnemonic Steps Codes API command Function 16 bits 32 bits 16 bit 32 bit 10 CMP Y Compare 7 Transmission 11 ZCP Y Zone compare 9 Comparison 12 MOV Y Data Move 5 15 BMOV Y Block move 7 Four Perform the addition of 7 E Y Fundamental 29 ADD BIN data Operations of eum m Arithmetic m v erform the subtraction ii SUB of BIN data D 44 Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Mnemonic Steps API Codes Function Command 16 bits 32 bits 16 bit 32 bit Perform the 7 22 MUL Y multiplication of BIN data Perform the division of 7 Y 23 DIV BIN data 24 INC _ y oe the addition of 3 25 DEC _ Perform the subtraction 3 of 1 Rotation and 30 ROR Y Rotate to the right 5 Displacement 34 ROL Y Rotate to the left 50 rm 53 DHSCS X High speed counter 13 enable Control PID parameters 5 Y Special Ng of inverter command for AC motor Control frequency of 5 Y drive 140 FREQ inverter 141 RPR Y Read the parameter 9 142 WPR Y Write the parameter 7 D 5 10 Expl
190. ake unit is continuously on due to unusual high input voltage Under these circumstances the thermal overload relay switches off the power to the drive Never let the thermal overload relay switch off only the brake resistor as this will cause serious damage to the AC Motor Drive Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 NFB MC R L1 512 Oe T L3 6 Thermal Overload Relay or temperature Absorber SA Surge Appendix B Accessories MOTOR R L1 U T1 S L2 VIT2 T L3 WIT3 VFD Series P P Unit B1 Thermal Overload Relay 20 1 Hl BR Resistor Temperature sw Gs AMADOR ERREUR EU Switch Note1 When using the AC drive with DC reactor please refer to wiring diagram in the AC drive user manual for the wiring of terminal P of Brake unit Note2 Do NOT wire terminal N to the neutral point of power system Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 B 3 Appendix Accessories B 1 1 Dimensions and Weights for Brake Resistors Dimensions are in millimeter Order P N BR080W200 BR080W750 BR300W100 BR300W250 BR300W400 BR400W150 BR400W040 Model no L1 L2 H D w Max Weight g BRO80W200 140 125 20 5 3 60 160 BRO80W750 BR300W100 BR300W250 215 200 30 5 3 60 750 BR300W400 BR4
191. al AVI 0 10VDC Input Terminal for 2 Positive PID feedback from external PID Feedback terminal ACI 4 20mA AVI2 0 10VDC 3 Negative PID feedback from external terminal ACI 4 20mA AVI2 0 10VDC 410 02 i rM Gain 0 0 to 10 0 EE 10 03 Integral Time I 0 00 to 100 0 sec 0 00 0 00 to 100 0 sec 0 00 disable 10 04 Control 0 00 to 1 00 sec mua mI Upper Bound for 6 10208 Integral Control 10 06 Primary Delay Filter 9 9 to 2 5 sec xr Time 10 07 Output Freq 9 to 110 js Limit PID Feedback 10 08 Signal Detection 0 0 to 3600 sec 0 0 disable Time 0 Warn and RAMP to stop Treatment of the 10 09 Erroneous PID 1 Warn and COAST to stop Feedback Signals 2 Warn and keep operation Gain Over the PID 10 44 Source of PID Set 0 00 to 600 0Hz EI point 10 12 PID Offset Level 1 0 to 50 0 Detection Time of 10 13 PID Offset 0 1 to 300 0 sec so Sleep Wake Up 10 14 Detection Time 0 0 to 6550 sec EN 10 15 Sleep Frequency 000t96000H2 00 to 600 0 Hz 4 26 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Factory 10 16 Wakeup Frequency 0 00 to 600 0 Hz Minimum PID Output Frequency Selection 0 By PID control 1 By minimum output frequency Pr 01 05 Group 11 Parameters for Extension Card Parameter Explanation Factory Customer Setting 11 04 Multi function Output Terminal MO2 RA2 Multi function Output Terminal MO3 RA
192. ameters 4 150 Content Address Function 2 Over voltage ov 3 IGBT Overheat oH1 4 Power Board Overheat 0H2 5 Overload oL 6 Overload1 oL1 7 Overload2 oL2 8 External fault EF 9 Current exceeds 2 times rated current during accel ocA 10 Current exceeds 2 times rated current during decel ocd Current exceeds 2 times rated current during decel ocd 11 Current exceeds 2 times rated current during steady state operation ocn 12 Ground Fault GFF 13 Low voltage Lv 14 PHL Phase Loss 2100H 15 Base Block 16 Auto accel decel failure CFA 17 Software protection enabled codE 18 Power Board CPU WRITE failure CF1 0 19 Power Board CPU READ failure CF2 0 20 CC OC Hardware protection failure HPF1 21 OV Hardware protection failure HPF2 22 GFF Hardware protection failure HPF3 23 OC Hardware protection failure HPF4 24 U phase error cF3 0 25 V phase error cF3 1 26 W phase error cF3 2 27 DCBUS error cF3 3 28 IGBT Overheat cF3 4 29 Power Board Overheat cF3 5 30 Control Board CPU WRITE failure cF1 1 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Content Address Function 31 Control Board CPU WRITE failure cF2 1 32 ACI signal error AErr 33 Reserved 34 Motor PTC overheat protection P
193. an Pr 07 00 Motor Rated Current Motor 0 the corresponding motor rated current 96 of motor rated frequency in special motor figure in Pr 06 06 150 the AC motor drive will start to count time When accumulated time exceeds Pr 06 07 Electronic Thermal Characteristic setting the electronic thermal overload relay protection OL1 will be ON The actual action time of electronic thermal characteristic will be adjusted by the output current of the AC motor drive motor load rate 96 For large current it needs short time to activate the l t electronic thermal protection function For small current it needs long time to activate the 12 electronic thermal protection function as shown in the following figure Related parameters Pr 06 06 Electronic Thermal Overload Relay Selection and Pr 07 00 Motor Rated Current Motor 0 Please refer to Pr 06 06 Electronic Thermal Overload Relay Selection OL1 for curve figure of standard motor and special motor Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 113 Chapter 4 Parameters 300 F 60Hzor above F 40Hz F 20Hz F 50Hz 250 200 o 150 E a o 100 50 o 50 100 150 200 Load factor 4 114 Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Present Fault Record Second Most
194. an be used to prevent the resonance generated from the original frequency of the machines Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 131 Chapter 4 Parameters It keeps the drive from running at the resonance frequency of machinery or load system or other inhibition frequency There are three frequency areas can be set These parameters set the Skip Frequencies It will cause the AC motor drive never to remain within these frequency ranges with continuous frequency output These six parameters should be set as follows Pr 08 09 gt Pr 08 10 gt Pr 08 11 gt Pr 08 12 gt Pr 08 13 gt Pr 08 14 When it is set to 0 0 the skip frequency is invalid The frequency command F can be set within the range of skip frequency At this moment the output frequency H will be less than the lower limit of skip frequency When the drive accelerates decelerates the output frequency will pass the range of skip frequency 08 09 08 10 frequency is decreas ed v 08 11 A Internal T Frequency Command 08 13 08 14 w frequency is increased 0 Setting frequency command EXE Auto Restart After Fault Unit 1 Settings 0 to 10 Factory Setting 0 0 Disable 4 132 Only after an over current OC or over voltage OV fault occurs the AC motor drive can be reset restarted automatically up to 10 times Setting this parameter to O will disable automatic reset restart operation after any fault has occurred
195. anation for the Application Commands API Mnemonic Operands Function 10 CMP P S S Compare Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps x Y M K H KnX Kny KnM T C CMP CMPP 7 steps ale a 8 alls a elle lle D e Operands S1 Comparison Value 1 S2 Comparison Value 2 D Comparison result Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 D 45 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Explanations 1 2 3 4 Operand D occupies 3 consecutive devices See the specifications of each model for their range of use The contents in S1 and S2 are compared and the result will be stored in D The two comparison values are compared algebraically and the two values are signed binary values When b15 1 in 16 bit instruction the comparison will regard the value as negative binary values Program Example 1 2 4 D 46 Designate device YO and operand D automatically occupies YO Y1 and Y2 When X10 On CMP instruction will be executed and one of YO Y1 and Y2 will be On When X10 Off CMP instruction will not be executed and YO Y1 and Y2 remain their status before X10 Off If the user need to obtain a comparison result with 2 lt and make a series parallel connection between YO Y2 X10 YO I I If K10 D10 YO On Y1 1 4 1 10 010 Y1 On Y2 IfK10 lt D10
196. and execute the setting If it is set to 0 the motor will decelerate to OHz by the setting of deceleration time Pr 01 10 Pr 01 12 If it is set to 2 the motor will continue to run For these two settings the warning message will stop blinking when ACI signal is recovered Please press RESET key to clear it Related parameters Pr 01 10 Decel Time 1 and Pr 01 12 Decel Time 2 0207 Up Down Mode Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 By digital keypad up down keys mode 1 Based on Accel Decel Time acc to Pr 01 09 to 01 12 2 Constant speed acc to Pr 02 08 3 Pulse input unit acc to Pr 02 08 co 4 66 Time TEN DOWN 6 0 4 External terminal UP key ON OFF DCM This parameter determines the increase decrease of the master frequency when operated via the Multi function Inputs when Pr 04 05 Pr 04 08 are set to 10 Up command or 11 Down command When Pr 02 07 is set to 0 it uses the external terminals UP DOWN key to increase decrease the frequency F as shown at the right of the following figure Its function is the same as the UP DOWN key on the digital keypad In this mode it also can use UP DOWN key on the keypad to control Frequency frequency command 7 When Pr 02 07 is set to 1 increase decrease the frequency by acceleration deceleration settings Pr 01 09 01 12 It is valid only when the AC motor drive is running Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2
197. and of the AC motor drive to K300 3 00Hz and acceleration deceleration time is 0 When M11 ON setting frequency command of the AC motor drive to K3000 30 00Hz acceleration time is 50 and deceleration time is 60 Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function M10 M11 M11 M10 Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 D 63 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function D 6 Error Code Code ID Description Corrective Actions Check if the program is error and PLod 20 Data write error download the program again Power on again and download the PLSv 21 Data write error when executing program again 1 Please upload again 2 Return to the factory if it occurs PLdA 22 Program upload error continuously Check if the program is error and Command error when download download program again program PLFn 23 Power on again and download program 30 Program capacity exceeds again PLor memory capacity PLFF 31 Command error when executing PLSn 32 Check sum error There is no END command in PLEd 33 the program The command MC is continuous PECI 34 used more than nine times D 64 Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix E CANopen Function The built in CANopen function is a kind of remote control Master can control the AC motor drive by using CANopen protocol CANopen is a CAN b
198. art up display page after power is applied to the drive For setting 5 PLCO disable PLC1 run PLC PLC2 read write PLC programs into AC motor drive Please refer to Pr 00 04 for multi function display Related parameter Pr 00 04 Content of Multi function Display Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 39 Chapter 4 Parameters 0004 Content of Multi function Display Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Display the content of user defined unit fee 4 Display the counter value which counts the number of lc el pulses on TRG terminal c 2 Display PLC D1043 value C NOT for VFD E C models 3 Display the actual DC BUS voltage in VDC of the AC maed motor drive u Display the output voltage in VAC of terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 to the motor E 5 Display PID analog feedback signal value in 96 b Penn 6 Display the power factor angle in of terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 to the motor tutu 7 Display the output power in kW of terminals V and W nn to the motor P 1 ae EET 8 Display the estimated value of torque in Nm as it relates to current t LLLI Display the signal of AVI analog input terminal in V 1 nn 10 Display the signal of ACI analog input terminal in mA display the signal of AVI2 analog input terminal in V i 11 Display the temperature of IGBT h in C 12 Display 2 level 1 13 Display AVI4 ACI3 level i 14 Display PG
199. ased higher layer protocol It provides standardized communication objects including real time data Process Data Objects PDO configuration data Service Data Objects SDO and special functions Time Stamp Sync message and Emergency message And it also has network management data including Boot up message NMT message and Error Control message Refer to CiA website http www can cia org for details The content of this instruction sheet may be revised without prior notice Please consult our distributors or download the most updated version at http www delta com tw industrialautomation Delta CANopen supports functions a Support CAN2 0A Protocol Support CANopen 09301 V4 02 Support DSP 402 V2 0 Delta CANopen supports services PDO Process Data Objects PDO1 PDO2 SDO Service Data Object Initiate SDO Download Initiate SDO Upload Abort SDO SDO message can be used to configure the slave node and access the Object Dictionary in every node Special Object Protocol Support default COB ID in Predefined Master Slave Connection Set in DS301 V4 02 Support SYNC service Support Emergency service Network Management Support NMT module control Support NMT Error control Support Boot up Delta CANopen doesn t support service Time Stamp service Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 E 1 Appendix E CANopen Function E 1 Overview E 1 1 CANopen Protocol CANopen is a
200. ation Allow sufficient space around the unit for heat dissipation Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 1 Introduction The heat sink temperature may rise to 90 when running The material on which the AC motor drive is mounted must be noncombustible and be able to withstand this high temperature When AC motor drive is installed in a confined space e g cabinet the surrounding temperature must be within 10 40 C with good ventilation DO NOT install the AC motor drive in a space with bad ventilation Prevent fiber particles scraps of paper saw dust metal particles etc from adhering to the heatsink When installing multiple AC more drives in the same cabinet they should be adjacent in a row with enough space in between When installing one AC motor drive below another one use a metal separation between the AC motor drives to prevent mutual heating Installation with Metal Separation Installation without Metal Separation i Is ui Frame B Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 120 450mm Y 4 E S 1 1 4 a f 4 id BA j 120mm 150mm w Frame A Frame B C andD 1 11 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 2 2 DC bus Sharing Connecting the DC bus of the AC Motor Drives in Parallel 1 This function is not for VFD E T series 2 The AC motor drives can a
201. ation items After finishing Step 2 the program will be downloaded from WPLSoft to the AC motor drive by the communication format D 2 6 Program Monitor If you execute start monitor in the communication item during executing PLC the ladder diagram will be shown as follows M1000 Ti K10 KS Cmn Yo Y T2 KS I RST TL T2 D 2 7 The Limit of PLC The protocol of PLC is 7 E 1 Make sure that the AC drive is stop and stop PLC before program upload download The priority of commands WPR and FREQ is FREQ WPR When setting P 00 04 to 2 the display will be the value in PLC register D1043 A 0 999 display puo cx Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 D 5 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function B 1000 9999 display It will only display the first 3 digits The LED at the bottom right corner will light to indicate 10 times of the display value For example the actual value for the following figure is 100X10 1000 C 10000 65535 display It will only display the first digits The LED at the bottom right corner and the single decimal point between the middle and the right most numbers will light to indicate 100 times of the display value For example the actual value for the following figure is 100X100 10000 5 Whenit is changed to PLC2 RS 485 will be used by PLC 6 When it is in PLC1 and PLC2 mode the f
202. bsorb mutual voltage that generated to DC bus when deceleration Enhance brake function and stabilize the voltage of the DC bus The brake module can be added to enhance brake function after connecting in parallel Only the same power system can be connected in parallel 9 gv d t It is recommended to connect 5 AC motor drives in parallel no limit in horsepower but these 5 drives should be the same power system power should be applied at the same time only the same power system can be connected in parallel Power 208 220 230 380 440 480 depend on models IM IM 1 IM For frame A terminal is connected to the terminal of the brake module For frame B C and D terminal B1 isconnected to the terminal ofthe brake module 1 12 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 3 Dimensions Dimensions are in millimeter and inch Frame A D DI wi D2 III 1 E J ell a fa fs 02 51 52 Unit mm inch Frame w1 H H1 D D1 D2 S1 S2 A A1 72 0 60 0 142 0 120 0 152 0 50 0 4 5 5 2 5 2 2 83 2 36 5 59 4 72 5 98 1 97 0 18 0 20 0 20 A2 72 0 56 0 155 0 143 0 111 5 9 5 5 3 2 83 2 20 6 10 5 63 4 39 0 37 0 21 gt Frame A A1 VFD002E11A 21A 23A VFD004E11A 21A 23A 43A VFD007E21A 23A 43A
203. by the setting in the group 01 The level of speed search will affect the speed synchronization time The larger setting is set and the faster it will reach the speed synchronization But too large setting may cause overload When Pr 08 04 is set to 1 When the speed searches downward the output frequency starts with the master frequency The output voltage and output current will be increased from 0 When the output current reaches Pr 08 08 setting the output frequency continuous searches downward When the output frequency output voltage and V f setting frequency are the same it will be regarded as the synchronization reached and accelerate to the master frequency by curve When Pr 08 04 is set to 2 When the speed searches upward it will accelerate by V f curve Maximum Allowable Maximum Power Power Loss Time Allowable Power Input 4 Speed Synchronization Speed Search 08 04 1 08 04 2 Output Baseblock Time Baseblock Time Frequency 08 06 08 06 Output mee o Ae 5 Momentary Power Loss Operation Skip Frequency 1 Upper Limit Unit 0 01 Skip Frequency 1 Lower Limit Unit 0 01 Skip Frequency 2 Upper Limit Unit 0 01 Skip Frequency 2 Lower Limit Unit 0 01 Skip Frequency 3 Upper Limit Unit 0 01 Skip Frequency Lower Limit Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 0 00 Ea These parameters are used to set the frequencies that are inhibited to operate This function c
204. ccur it won t display any warning message on the digital keypad and the motor will still keep running See list of error messages below see section 3 6 in Pr 09 04 The digital keypad is optional Please refer to Appendix B for details When using without this optional keypad the FAULT LED will be ON once there is error messages or warning messages from the external terminals A Time out Detection Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 120 0 sec Factory Setting 0 0 0 0 Disable En If Pr 09 03 is not equal to 0 0 Pr 09 02 0 2 and there is no communication on the bus during the Time Out detection period set by Pr 09 03 cE10 will be shown on the keypad Communication Protocol Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 N 2 gt 1 Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 E 1 gt 2 Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 0 1 gt 3 Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 N 2 gt 4 Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 E 1 gt 5 Modbus mode protocol lt 8 0 1 gt Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 139 Chapter 4 Parameters Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 N 1 gt Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 E 2 gt Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 0 2 gt Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 N 1 gt 0 Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 E 2 gt 1 Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 0 2 gt 2 O ON Oo co Ea 4 140 1 Control by PC or PLC A VFD E can be set up to communica
205. cheme The 11 bit identifier structure in predefined connection is set as follows COB Identifier CAN Identifier 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function Code Node Number Object Function Code Node Number COB ID Object Dictionary Index Broadcast messages NMT 0000 0 SYNC 0001 0x80 0x1005 0x1006 0x1007 TIME STAMP 0010 0x100 0x1012 0x1013 Point to point messages Emergency 0001 1 127 0x81 OxFF 0x1014 0x1015 Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix E CANopen Function Object Function Code Node Number COB ID Object Dictionary Index TPDO1 0011 1 127 0x181 0x1FF 0 1800 RPDO1 0100 1 127 0x201 0x27F 0x1400 TPDO2 0101 1 127 0x281 Ox2FF 0x1801 RPDO2 0110 1 127 0x301 0x37F 0x1401 TPDO3 0111 1 127 0x381 Ox3FF 0 1802 RPDO3 1000 1 127 0x401 0x47F 0x1402 TPDO4 1001 1 127 0x481 Ox4FF 0x1803 RPDO4 1010 1 127 0x501 0x57F 0x1403 Default SDO tx 1011 1 127 0x581 0x5FF 0x1200 Default SDO rx 1100 1 127 0x601 0x67F 0x1200 NMT Error 1110 1 127 0x701 0x77F 0x1016 0x1017 Control E 1 4 CANopen Communication Protocol It has services as follows NMT Network Management Object SDO Service Data Object PDO Process Data Object EMCY Emergency Object E 1 4 1 NMT Network Management Object The Network Management NMT follows a Master Slave structure for executing
206. ction Port To connect with CANopen use the connector enclosed with CME COP01 or any connectors you can buy in the store for wiring Pin Signal Content 1 CAN GND Ground 0 V V 2 CAN L Signal 3 SHIELD Shield 12345 4 CAN H Signal 5 Reserved Baud Rate Setting o1 8 e Rotary switch BR sets up the communication speed on 2 CANopen network in hex Setup range 0 7 8 F are b Aes forbidden e n 0 BR Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 B 35 Appendix B Accessories B 36 Example If you need to set up the communication speed of CME COP01 as 500K simply Switch BR to 5 BR Value Baud rate BR Value Baud rate 0 10K 4 250K 1 20K 5 500K 2 50K 6 800K 3 125K 7 1M MAC ID Setting S 89 ol 8 2 Rotary switches ID L and ID H set up the y 2 j o Node ID on CANopen network in hex Setup ov ex range 00 7F 80 FF are forbidden ID H ID L Example If you need to set up the communication address of CME COP01 as 26 1AH simply switch ID H to 1 and ID L to A Switch Setting Content 0 7F Valid CANopen MAC ID setting Other Invalid CANopen MAC ID setting B 10 4 4 LED Indicator Explanation amp Troubleshooting There are LED indicators RUN ERROR and SP on CME COP01 to indicate the communication status of CME COP01 RUN LED LED Status State Indication OFF No power No power on CME COP01 card Single Flash Hid d
207. ction and even damage the motor and drive Related parameter Pr 07 03 Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 0 07 07 Slip Compensation Limit Unit 1 Settings 0 to 250 Factory Setting 200 This parameter sets the upper limit of the compensation frequency the percentage of Pr 07 06 4 120 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 En Chapter 4 Parameters Example when Pr 07 06 5Hz and Pr 07 07 150 the upper limit of the compensation frequency is 7 5Hz Therefore for a 50Hz motor the max output is 57 5Hz If the motor speed is lower than the target speed and the speed isn t changed after adjusting Pr 07 03 setting it may reach the upper limit of the compensation frequency and need to increase Pr 07 07 setting Related parameters Pr 07 03 Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 0 and Pr 07 06 Motor Rated Slip Motor 0 07 08 Torque Compensation Time Constant Unit 0 01 Settings 0 01 10 00 sec Factory Setting 0 30 En It is usually applied in those heavy load applications which the motor current is changed frequently The current is changed for the current compensation to increase the output torque Because the frequent current change will cause the machine vibration it can increase Pr 07 08 setting to solve this problem at this moment 07 09 Slip Compensation Time Constant Unit 0 01 Settings 0 05 10 00 sec Factory Setting 0 20 It is usually applie
208. cy Lower Limit is 10Hz and the Minimum Output Frequency Pr 01 05 is set to 1 0Hz then any Command Frequency between 1 0 10Hz will generate a 10Hz output from the drive If the command frequency is less than 1 0Hz drive will be in ready status without output Ea This parameter must be equal to or less than the Output Frequency Upper Limit Pr 01 07 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 49 Chapter 4 Parameters Output frequency 01 07 Output frequency upperlimit 01 08 Output frequency lower limit Frequency command eRe Acceleration Time 1 Taccel 1 Unit 0 1 0 01 v Deceleration Time 1 Tdecel 1 Unit 0 1 0 01 Acceleration Time 2 Taccel 2 Unit 0 1 0 01 uM PEE Deceleration Time 2 Tdecel 2 Unit 0 1 0 01 Settings 0 1 to 600 0 sec 0 01 to 600 0 sec Factory Setting 10 0 Acceleration deceleration time 1 2 can be switched by setting the external terminals MI3 MI12 MI7 MI12 are optional to 7 set Pr 04 05 Pr 04 08 to 7 or Pr 11 06 Pr 11 11 to 7 The factory settings are acceleration time 1 The Acceleration Time is used to determine the time required for the AC motor drive to ramp from 0 Hz to Maximum Output Frequency Pr 01 00 The Deceleration Time is used to determine the time required for the AC motor drive to decelerate from the Maximum Output Frequency Pr 01 00 down to 0 Hz If the setting of the acceleration deceleration time is too short it ma
209. d above 32MB and above is recommended Capacity 50MB and above CD ROM for installing WPLSoft Resolution 640x480 16 colors and above It is recommended to set display setting of Windows to 800x600 General mouse or the device compatible with Windows Printer with Windows driver At least one of COM1 to COMB can be connected to PLC All Delta DVP PLC series and VFD E series Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 D 1 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function D 2 Start up D 2 1 The Steps for PLC Execution Please operate PLC function by the following five steps 1 Switch the mode to PLC2 for program download upload A Go to PLCO page by pressing the MODE key B Change to PLC2 by pressing the UP key and then press the ENTER key after confirmation C If succeeded END is displayed and back to PLC2 after one or two seconds Eu Disable RunPLC Read write PLC program into AC drives You don t need to care about the PLC warning such as PLod PLSv and PIdA before downloading program to VFD E 2 Connection Please connect RJ 45 of AC motor drive to computer via RS485 to RS232 converter 3 Run the program The PLC status will always be PLC2 even if the AC motor drive is switched off There are three ways to operate PLC A In PLC1 page execute PLC program B In PLC2 page execute stop PLC program by using WPL software C After setting multi function input termi
210. d in those heavy load applications which the motor speed is changed frequently The speed is changed for the speed compensation to reach the synchronous speed Because the frequent speed change will cause the machine vibration it can increase Pr 07 09 setting to solve this problem at this moment Too long time constants set Pr 07 08 and Pr 07 09 to 10 give slow response too short values can give unstable operation Please set by your applications Accumulative Motor Operation Time Min Unit 1 Settings 0 Factory Display 0 Displays 0 1439 Accumulative Motor Operation Time Day Unit 1 Settings 0 Factory Display 0 Displays 0 65535 Pr 07 10 and Pr 07 11 are used to record the motor operation time They can be cleared by setting to 0 and time is less than 1 minute is not recorded Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 121 Chapter 4 Parameters When setting 07 11 to 0 it will reset the accumulative motor operation time the record will be reset to 0 07 12 Motor PTC Overheat Protection Unit 1 Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Disable 1 Enable 07 14 Motor PTC Overheat Protection Level Unit 0 1 Settings 0 1 10 0V Factory Setting 2 4 When the motor is running at low frequency for long time the cooling function of the motor fan will be lower To prevent overheating it needs to have a Positive Temperature Coefficient thermoistor on the mo
211. d not to expose the peeled off net in front of the terminal Please use the shield wire or tube for the power wiring and ground the two ends of the shield wire or tube Damaged insulation of wiring may cause personal injury or damage to circuits equipment if it comes in contact with high voltage The AC motor drive motor and wiring may cause interference To prevent the equipment damage please take care of the erroneous actions of the surrounding sensors and the equipment When the AC drive output terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 are connected to the motor terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 respectively To permanently reverse the direction of motor rotation Switch over any of the two motor leads Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 11 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring With long motor cables high capacitive switching current peaks can cause over current high leakage current or lower current readout accuracy To prevent this the motor cable should be less than 20m for 3 7kW models and below And the cable should be less than 50m for 5 5kW models and above For longer motor cables use an AC output reactor The AC motor drive electric welding machine and the greater horsepower motor should be grounded separately Use ground leads that comply with local regulations and keep them as short as possible No brake resistor is built in the VFD E series it can install brake resistor for those occasions that use higher load inertia or
212. data characters The format of data characters depends on the function code read data from register 06H write single register 08H loop detection Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 143 Chapter 4 Parameters 10H write multiple registers The available function codes and examples for VFD E are described as follows 1 O3H multi read read data from registers Example reading continuous 2 data from register address 2102H AMD address is 01H ASCII mode Command message Response message STX Y STX a 0 T Address ZE Address T T Function 3 Function EU 2 Number of data 0 Starting data Count by byte 4 dd my 2 Content of starting T QU address T 2102H Number of data 0 0 count by word 0 0 2 Content of address 0 LRC Check D 2109M a 7 0 CR T END LF LRC Check Ww CR END LF RTU mode Command message Response message Address 01H Address 01H Function 03H Function 03H Starting data 21H Number of data 04H address 02H count by byte Number of data 00H Content of address 17H count by word 02H 2102H 70H CRC CHK Low 6FH Content of address 00H CRC CHK High F7H 2103H 00H CRC CHK Low FEH CRC CHK High 5CH 2 06H single write write si
213. dded to the controller The integral time decides the relation between integral part and error The integral part will be increased by time even if the error is small It gradually increases the controller output to eliminate the error until it is 0 In this way a system can be stable without steady state error by proportional gain control and integral time control Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 157 Chapter 4 Parameters 3 Differential control D the controller output is proportional to the differential of the controller input During elimination of the error oscillation or instability may occur The differential control can be used to suppress these effects by acting before the error That is when the error is near 0 the differential control should be 0 Proportional gain P differential control D can be used to improve the system state during PID adjustment D When PID control is used in a constant pressure pump feedback application Set the application s constant pressure value bar to be the setpoint of PID control The pressure sensor will send the actual value as PID feedback value After comparing the PID setpoint and PID feedback there will be an error Thus the PID controller needs to calculate the output by using proportional gain P integral time l and differential time D to control the pump It controls the drive to have different pump speed and achieves constant pressure control by using a 4 20mA
214. detection time frequency will be 0 in sleep mode If sleep function is disabled output frequency H Pr 01 08 lower bound frequency The common adjustments of PID control are shown as follows Example 1 how to have stable control as soon as possible Please shorten Pr 10 03 Integral Time 1 setting and increase Pr 10 04 Differential Control D setting Response before adjustment b after adjustment Time Example 2 How to suppress the oscillation of the wave with long cycle If it is oscillation when the wave cycle is longer than integral time it needs to increase Pr 10 03 setting to suppress the oscillation 4 166 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Response before adjustment after adjustment 4 Time Example 3 How to suppress the oscillation of the wave with short cycle When the cycle of oscillation is short and almost equal Differential time setting it needs to shorten the differential time setting to suppress the oscillation If Differential time l 0 0 it can not suppress the oscillation Please reduce Pr 10 02 setting or increase Pr 10 06 setting Response before adjustment after adjustment Time Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 167 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 11 Multi function Input Output Parameters for Extension Card Make sure that the extension card is installed on the AC motor dri
215. drive operation B 7 2 Explanation of Display Message Display Message Descriptions The AC motor drive Master Frequency Command The Actual Operation Frequency present at terminals U V and W The custom unit u The output current present at terminals U V and W Press A to change the mode to READ Press PROG DATA for about 2 sec or until it s flashing read the parameters of AC drive to the digital keypad PUOG It can read 4 groups of parameters to PUOG read 0 read 3 Press to change the mode to SAVE Press PROG DATA for about 2 sec or until it s flashing then write the parameters from the digital keypad PUOG to AC drive If it has saved it will show the type of AC motor drive Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 B 19 Appendix B Accessories Display Message Descriptions The specified parameter setting The actual value stored in the specified parameter External Fault End displays for approximately 1 second if the entered input data have been accepted After a parameter value has been set the new value is automatically stored in memory To modify an entry use the A or v keys displays if the input is invalid Communication Error Please check the AC motor drive user manual Chapter 5 Group 9 Communication Parameter for more details B 7 3 Operation Flow Chart VFD PUO6 Operation Flow Chart Press U
216. ductive connecting the shield to terminal ACM can bring improvement If the analog input signals are affected by noise from the AC motor drive please connect a capacitor 0 1 F and above and ferrite core as indicated in the following diagrams AVI ACI ACM ferrite core wind each wires 3 times or more around the core Digital inputs MI1 MI6 DCM When using contacts or switches to control the digital inputs please use high quality components to avoid contact bounce Digital outputs MO1 MCM Make sure to connect the digital outputs to the right polarity see wiring diagrams When connecting a relay to the digital outputs connect surge absorber or fly back diode across the coil and check the polarity General Keep control wiring as far away as possible from the power wiring and in separate conduits to avoid interference If necessary let them cross only at 90 angle The AC motor drive control wiring should be properly installed and not touch any live power wiring or terminals Damaged insulation of wiring may cause personal injury or damage to circuits equipment if it comes in contact with high voltage The specification for the control terminals 2 20 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring RA RB RC The position of the control terminals Terminals 1 AFM MCM MO1 Terminals 2 MI1
217. e Ea When Pr 12 21 is set to 0 analog output voltage corresponds to the AC motor drive s output frequency When Pr 12 22 is set to 100 the max output frequency Pr 01 00 setting corresponds to the AFM output 10VDC or 20mA When Pr 12 21 is set to 1 analog output voltage corresponds the AC motor drive s output current When Pr 12 22 is set to 100 the 2 5 X rated current corresponds to the AFM output 10VDC or 20mA 4 174 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters E Ima If the scale of the voltmeter is less than 10V refer to following formula to set Pr 12 22 Pr 12 22 full scale voltage 10 100 Example When using voltmeter with full scale 5V Pr 12 22 should be set to 5 10 100 50 If Pr 12 21 is set to 0 the output voltage will correspond to the max output frequency 1223 AO2Terminal Analog Signal Mode Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 AVO2 1 ACO2 analog current 0 0 to 20 0mA 2 ACO2 analog current 4 0 to 20 0mA Besides parameter setting the voltage current mode should be used with the switch AVI3 AVI4 AVO1 AVO2 ACI2 ACO1 ACO2 12 24 2 Analog Output Signal Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Analog Frequency 1 Analog Current 0 to 250 rated current 2 Analog Output Gain Unit 1 Settings 1 to 20096 Factory Setting 100 Ea Setting method for the AO2 is the
218. e When goes from Off to On the content in DO minuses 1 automatically HE see 00 Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 D 55 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function API Mnemonic Operands Function 30 ROR P D n Rotate to the Right Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps an x Y M K KnM T C D ROR RORP 5 steps D amp elele n Operands D Device to be rotated Number of bits to be rotated in 1 rotation Explanations 1 This instruction rotates the device content designated by D to the right for n bits 2 This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions Program Example When XO goes from Off to On the 16 bits 4 bits as a group in D10 will rotate to the right as shown in the figure below The bit marked with will be sent to carry flag M1022 Rotate to the right upper bit lower bit pto Fr Tol oTopoT1 oT1 7 11022 Sorry 4 x bits After one rotation to the right 1 upper bit lower bit M1022 D10 o 1 o 1 o 1 1 1 1 o 1 1 0 1 o o gt 9 Carry t flag API Mnemonic Operands Function 31 ROL P D n Rotate to the Left Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps D ROL ROLP 5 steps D mE n
219. e 2 wire FWD STOP REV STOP Operation Control Modes 2 wire FWD REV RUN STOP 3 wire operation 04 05 Multi function Input No function Terminal MI3 Multi Step speed command 1 Multi Step speed command 2 Multi Step speed command 3 Multi Step speed command 4 External reset Accel Decel inhibit Accel Decel time selection command 04 06 Multi function Input Terminal M14 04 07 Multi function Input Terminal MI5 Jog Operation 04 08 Multi function Input External base block Terminal 16 10 Up Increment master frequency 11 Down Decrement master frequency 12 Counter Trigger Signal 13 Counter reset 14 E F External Fault Input 4 12 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 oO Oo O ao A Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Factory Customer Setting 5 PID function disabled 16 Output shutoff stop 17 Parameter lock enable 18 Operation command selection external terminals 19 Operation command selection keypad 20 Operation command selection communication 21 FWD REV command 22 Source of second frequency command 23 Run Stop PLC Program PLC1 NOT for VFD E C models 23 Quick Stop Only for VFD E C models 24 Download execute monitor PLC Program PLC2 NOT for VFD E C models 25 Simple position function 26 OOB Out of Balance Detection 27 Motor selection bit 0 28 Motor selection bit 1 BitO MI1 Bit
220. e as K1 output contact will be On immediately at the first count 2 General counter will be clear when PLC is power loss If counter is latched it will remember the value before power loss and keep on counting when power on after power loss 3 If using MOV command WPLSoft to send a value which is large than setting to CO register at the next time that X1 is from Off to On CO counter contact will be On and present value will be set to the same as settings 4 The setting of counter can use constant K or register D not includes special data register D1000 D1044 to be indirect setting 5 If using constant K to be setting it can only be positive number but if setting is data register D it can be positive negative number The next number that counter counts up from 32 767 is 32 768 D 22 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Example LD RST CO LD X1 x1 kK CNT co K5 CNT CO K5 co OUT YO 1 When X0 On RST command is executed reset to 0 and output contact reset to Off 2 When X1 is from Off to On e 1 n counter will count up add 1 K5 contact is On and present setting K5 CO won t accept X1 value trigger signal and remains K5 1 1 1 3 When counter CO attains settings CO 1 1 1 1 Contacts YO CO 32 bit high speed addition subtraction counter C235 1 S
221. e direction reverse This can only be changed by exchanging 2 wires to the motor Pr 01 00 60Hz Max output Freq Potentiometer Pr 04 00 100 Bias adjustment 04 01 0 Positive bias Pr 04 02 100 Input gain 04 03 1 Negative bias REV motion enabled Gain 10V 10V 100 100 OHz ov 10V Bias adjustment 60Hz 60Hz Gain 100 100 100 04 11 Minimum AVI Voltage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0V Factory Setting 0 0 0412 Minimum AVI Frequency percentage of Pr 01 00 Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 0 0 04 13 Maximum AVI Voltage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0V Factory Setting 10 0 Maximum AVI Frequency percentage of 01 00 Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 096 Factory Setting 100 0 EXE Minimum ACI Current Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 20 0mA Factory Setting 4 0 Minimum ACI Frequency percentage of Pr 01 00 Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 096 Factory Setting 0 0 4 86 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Maximum ACI Current Unit 0 01 Settings 0 0 to 20 0mA Factory Setting 20 0 EMI Maximum ACI Frequency percentage of Pr 01 00 Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 096 Factory Setting 100 0 EXA Terminal Mode Selection Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 ACI 1 AVI2 ETE Minimum AVI2 Voltage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0V Factory Setting 0 0 Minimum AVI2 Frequency percentage of Pr 1 00 Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to
222. e installation In order to retain the warranty coverage the AC motor drive should be stored properly when it is not to be used for an extended period of time Storage conditions are Qu 7 69 Store clean and dry location free from direct sunlight or corrosive fumes Store within an ambient temperature range of 20 C to 60 C Store within a relative humidity range of 0 to 90 and non condensing environment Store within an air pressure range of 86 kPA to 106kPA DO NOT place on the ground directly It should be stored properly Moreover if the surrounding environment is humid you should put exsiccator in the package DO NOT store in an area with rapid changes in temperature It may cause condensation and frost If the AC motor drive is stored for more than 3 months the temperature should not be higher than 30 Storage longer than one year is not recommended it could result in the degradation of the electrolytic capacitors When the AC motor drive is not used for longer time after installation on building sites or places with humidity and dust it s best to move the AC motor drive to an environment as stated above Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 1 1 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 Receiving and Inspection This VFD E AC motor drive has gone through rigorous quality control tests at the factory before shipment After receiving the AC motor drive please check for the follo
223. e maximum contacts in a row are 11 contacts If you need more than 11 contacts you could have the new row and start with continuous line to continue more input devices The continuous number will be produced automatically and the same input point can be used repeatedly The drawing is shown as follows XO X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 CO C1 HHIHH HH H HIE 00000 X6 n Row Number The operation of ladder diagram is to scan from left upper corner to right lower corner The output handling including the operation frame of coil and application command at the most right side in ladder diagram Take the following diagram for example we analyze the process step by step The number at the right corner is the explanation order D 10 Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function The explanation of command order 1 LD 2 OR MO 3 AND X1 4 LD X3 AND M1 ORB 5 LD Y1 AND X4 6 LD TO AND M3 ORB 7 ANB 8 OUT Y1 TMR TO K10 The detail explanation of basic structure of ladder diagram 1 LD LDI command give the command LD or LDI in the start of a block LD command LD command AND Block OR Block The structures of command LDP and LDF are similar to the command LD The difference is that command LDP and LDF will act in the rising edge or falling edge when contact is ON as shown in the following Rising ed ising edge Falling edge Time Time OFF ON OF
224. e refer to Appendix D How to use PLC function for details Operations Once the AC motor drive receives RUN command it will operate by parameters settings and PLC program till the 15th step speed frequency is completed ELI If it is repeat operation by PLC program the AC motor drive will operate by the settings from Pr 05 00 3 Pr 05 012 gt Pr 05 143 Pr 05 003 Pr 05 01 till the operation command is OFF Ea Related parameters Pr 01 15 Jog Frequency Pr 01 07 Output Frequency Upper Limit Pr 01 08 Output Frequency Lower Limit Pr 04 05 Multi function Input Terminal MI3 Pr 04 06 Multi function Input Terminal MI4 Pr 04 07 Multi function Input Terminal MI5 and Pr 04 08 Multi function Input Terminal 6 Frequency JOG Freq Run Stop PU external terminals communication co MI3 fo MIG 1 Eni Ej jon fon pi E OFF IE i ON 2nd speed MI3 to MI6 2 3rd speed to MI6 3 f 4th speed MI3 to MI6 4 Jog Freq Multi function terminals MI3 MI6 Multi speed via External Terminals Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 105 Chapter 4 Parameters MI6 4 MI5 3 MI4 2 MI3 1 Master frequency OFF OFF OFF OFF 1 speed OFF OFF OFF ON 2 speed OFF OFF ON OFF 3 speed OFF OFF ON ON 4 speed OFF ON OFF OFF 5 speed OFF ON OFF ON 6 speed OFF ON ON OFF 7 speed OFF ON ON ON 8
225. e set via this parameter And the communication address for each AC motor drive must be different and unique 0901 Transmission Speed Factory Setting 1 Settings 0 Baud rate 4800 bps bits second 1 Baud rate 9600 bps 2 Baud rate 19200 bps 3 Baud rate 38400 bps This parameter is used to set the transmission speed between the RS485 master PLC PC etc and AC motor drive 09 02 A Transmission Fault Treatment Factory Setting 3 Settings 0 Warn and keep operating 1 Warn and RAMP to stop 2 Warn and COAST to stop 3 No warning and keep operating This parameter is set to how to react if transmission errors occur 4 138 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 En Chapter 4 Parameters Setting 0 when transmission errors occur it will display warning message on the digital keypad and the motor will keep running The warning message can be cleared after the communication is normal Setting 1 when transmission errors occur it will display warning message on the digital keypad and the motor will stop by the deceleration time Pr 01 10 01 12 It needs to press RESET to clear the warning message Setting 2 When transmission errors occur it will display warning message cEXX on the digital keypad and the motor will free run to stop immediately It needs to press RESET to clear the warning message Setting 3 When transmission errors o
226. e within the range as indicated on the nameplate 2 Allthe units must be grounded directly to a common ground terminal to prevent lightning strike or electric shock 3 Please make sure to fasten the screw of the main circuit terminals to prevent sparks which is made by the loose screws due to vibration 4 Check following items after finishing the wiring A Are all connections correct B No loose wires C No short circuits between terminals or to ground Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 2 1 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Amen A charge may still remain in the DC bus capacitors with hazardous voltages even if the power has been turned off To prevent personal injury please ensure that the power is turned off and wait ten minutes for the capacitors to discharge to safe voltage levels before opening the AC motor drive 2 Only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor drives is allowed to perform installation wiring and commissioning 3 Make sure that the power is off before doing any wiring to prevent electric shock 2 1 Wiring Users must connect wires according to the circuit diagrams on the following pages Do not plug a modem or telephone line to the RS 485 communication port or permanent damage may result The pins 1 amp 2 are the power supply for the optional copy keypad only and should not be used for RS 485 communication 2 2 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Figure 1 for m
227. ecause of the high carrier frequency PWM control of the VFD series pay attention to the following motor vibration problems Resonant mechanical vibration anti vibration damping rubbers should be used to mount equipment that runs at varying speed Motor imbalance special care is required for operation at 50 or 60 Hz and higher frequency To avoid resonances use the Skip frequencies The motor fan will be very noisy when the motor speed exceeds 50 or 60Hz Special motors C 6 1 Pole changing Dahlander motor The rated current is differs from that of a standard motor Please check before operation and select the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully When changing the pole number the motor needs to be stopped first If over current occurs during operation or regenerative voltage is too high please let the motor free run to stop coast Submersible motor The rated current is higher than that of a standard motor Please check before operation and choose the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully With long motor cable between AC motor drive and motor available motor torque is reduced Explosion proof Ex motor Needs to be installed in a safe place and the wiring should comply with the Ex requirements Delta AC Motor Drives are not suitable for Ex areas with special precautions Gear reduction motor The lubricating method of reduction gearbox and speed range for continuous operation will be different and depend
228. ecifications Remarks When timer attains the T Present value of timer TO T15 16 points contact of timer will be On When timer attains the 7 Present value of counter C0 C7 8 bit counter 8 points contact of timer will be Es On g For latched DO D9 10 points 9 Total is 2 p Data For general D10 D29 20 points It can be memory area for storing data 0 oints 2 For special D1000 D1044 45 o points in Decimal K 32 768 K32 767 16 bit operation 5 Hexadecimal H0000 HFFFF 16 bit operation o Communication port for read write RS485 slave program Analog input output Built in 2 analog inputs and 1 analog output Function extension module optional Digital input output card A D D A card D 4 2 Devices Functions The Function of Input output Contacts The function of input contact X input contact X reads input signal and enter PLC by connecting with input equipment It is unlimited usage times for A contact or B contact of each input contact X in program The On Off of input contact X can be changed with the On Off of input equipment but can t be changed by using peripheral equipment WPLSoft The Function of Output Contact Y The mission of output contact Y is to drive the load that connects to output contact Y by sending On Off signal There are two kinds of output contact one is relay and the other is transistor It
229. ecommended to use Auto deceleration function or it will extend the deceleration time Related parameters Pr 01 09 Accel Time 1 Pr 01 10 Decel Time 1 Pr 01 11 Accel Time 2 and Pr 01 12 Decel Time 2 AMTES Acceleration S Curve Unit 0 1 0 01 Deceleration S Curve Unit 0 1 0 01 Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 0 S curve disabled 0 1 to 10 0 0 01 to 10 00 S curve enabled 10 0 10 00 is the smoothest This parameter is used to ensure smooth acceleration and deceleration via S curve The S curve is disabled when set to 0 0 and enabled when set to 0 1 to 10 0 0 01 to 10 00 Setting 0 1 0 01 gives the quickest and setting 10 0 10 00 the longest and smoothest S curve The AC motor drive will not follow the Accel Decel Times in Pr 01 09 to Pr 01 12 The diagram below shows that the original setting of the Accel Decel Time is only for reference when the S curve is enabled The actual Accel Decel Time depends on the selected S curve 0 1 to 10 0 The total Accel Time Pr 01 09 Pr 01 17 or Pr 01 11 Pr 01 17 The total Decel Time Pr 01 10 Pr 01 18 or Pr 01 12 Pr 01 18 eo 03 Fr 9 Disable S curve Enable S curve Acceleration deceleration Characteristics Related parameters Pr 01 09 Accel Time 1 Pr 01 10 Decel Time 1 Pr 01 11 Accel Time 2 and Pr 01 12 Decel Time 2 4 54 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters PME
230. econds and the AC motor drive displays Lu But if the AC motor drive is powered off due to overload even if the maximum allowable power loss time is lt 20 seconds the operation mode as set in Pr 08 04 is not executed In that case it starts up normally ETE Base Block Speed Search Factory Setting 1 Settings 0 Disable 1 Speed search starts with last frequency 2 Speed search starts with minimum output frequency Pr 01 05 This parameter determines the AC motor drive restart method after External Base Block is enabled one of Pr 04 05 04 08 is set to 9 Ea The speed search actions between Pr 08 04 and Pr 08 06 are the same The priority of Pr 08 06 is higher than Pr 08 04 That is Pr 08 04 will be invalid after Pr 08 06 is set and the speed search will act by Pr 08 06 Related parameters Pr 08 07 Baseblock Time for Speed Search BB Pr 04 05 Multi function Input Terminal Pr 04 06 Multi function Input Terminal MI4 Pr 04 07 Multi function Input Terminal MI5 and Pr 04 08 Multi function Input Terminal MI6 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 129 Chapter 4 Parameters 4 x aud b Input B B signal 3 Stop output voltage gt Output voltage V Disable B B signal waiting time 08 07 08 08 Current Limit A G Speed Search forSpeed SearchSpeed Rte rg ee ep renes Synchronization speed detection Output current A Time FWD Run 49 O gt BB
231. ect for Multi Step Speed application Command 4 The External Reset has the same function as the Reset key on 5 External Reset the Digital keypad After faults such as O H O C and O V are cleared this input can be used to reset the drive Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 89 Chapter 4 Parameters Settings Function Description 6 Accel Decel Inhibit When the command is active acceleration and deceleration is stopped and the AC motor drive maintains a constant speed Frequency setting frequency sd accel inhibit decel inhibit actual operation frequency accel inhibit decel inhibit actual operation frequency MIx GND ON ON ON ON operation ON OFF command Accel Decel Time 7 Selection Command Used to select the one of 2 Accel Decel Times Pr 01 09 to Pr 01 12 Frequency setting frequency 01 09 01 11 01 09 00 10 01 12 01 12 Time Mix GND ON ON operation ON ON ON OFF command Jog Operation Parameter value 08 programs one of the Multi function Input Terminals MI3 MI6 Pr 04 05 Pr 04 08 for Jog control NOTE Programming for Jog operation by 08 can only be done while the motor is stopped Refer to parameter Pr 01 13 Pr 01 15 01 15 8 Jog frequency Control 01 05 Min output frequency E J Jog accel time Jog decel time 01 13 01 14 MIx GND ON OFF 4 90 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE
232. ed Current Motor 0 Pr 07 03 Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 0 and Pr 07 06 Motor Rated Slip Motor 0 07 02 Torque Compensation Motor 0 Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0 Factory Setting 0 0 For the induction motor characteristic parts of the drive output voltage will be absorbed by the impedance of stator windings when motor load is large In this circumstance the output current will be too large and output torque is insufficient due to the motor voltage at inductance end of motor is insufficient and insufficient air gap magnetic field Using this parameter it will auto adjust output voltage by the load to get the best operation with the air gap magnetic field is held 84 V f control mode the voltage will decrease by the decreasing frequency It will cause lower torque in low speed due to less AC impedance and constant DC resistor Thus this parameter can be set for the AC drive increase its voltage output to obtain a higher torque in low speed high torque compensation can overheat the motor This parameter is only used for V f control mode Related parameters Pr 00 10 Control Method Pr 07 08 Torque Compensation Time Constant X Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 0 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 10 00 Factory Setting 0 00 When the induction motor generates the electromagnetic torque it needs the necessary slip But the slip can be ignored when
233. ed frequency by frequency command a signal is given for external system or control wiring frequency attained 4 36 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Output Signal for Base Block Chapter 4 Parameters General application Display running status current voltage can be read by connecting a frequency meter or voltage current meter Re Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters When executing Base Block a signal 03 00 03 01 ee Provide a signal for General application is given for external system or control running status e wiring Overheat Warning for Heat Sink Applications Purpose Functions Related P Parameters When heat sink is overheated it will 03 00 03 01 General application For safety send a signal for external system or control wiring Multi function Analog Output Applications Purpose Functions Related Parameters The value of frequency output 03 06 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 37 Chapter 4 Parameters 4 3 Description of Parameter Settings Group 0 User Parameters A This parameter can be set during operation 00 00 Identity Code of the AC Motor Drive Settings Read Only Factory setting 00 01 Rated Current Display of the AC Motor Drive
234. el Decel inhibit Accel Decel time selection command Jog Operation External base block 15 16 17 18 Up Increment master frequency Down Decrement master frequency Counter Trigger Signal Counter reset E F External Fault Input PID function disabled Output shutoff stop Parameter lock enable Operation command selection external terminals 19 Operation command selection keypad 20 Operation command selection communication 21 FWD REV command 22 Source of second frequency command 23 Run Stop PLC Program PLC1 N OT for VFD E C models Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Facts TY Customer Setting 23 Quick Stop Only for VFD E C models 24 Download execute monitor PLC Program PLC2 NOT for VFD E C models 25 Simple position function 26 OOB Out of Balance Detection 27 Motor selection bit 0 28 Motor selection bit 1 Group 12 Analog Input Output Parameters for Extension Card Parameter Explanation Factory Customer Setting 0 Disabled Source of the 1st frequency Function Source of the 2nd frequency Selection PID Set Point PID enable Positive PID feedback Negative PID feedback Analog Signal ACI2 analog current 0 0 20 0mA Mode AVI3 analog voltage 0 0 10 0V 12 02 Min AVIS Input 0 0 to 10 0V Voltage 12 03 Min AVIS Scale 9 9 to 100 0
235. emit the electrical noise The RFI jumper is used to suppress the interference Radio Frequency Interference on the power line Main power isolated from earth If the AC motor drive is supplied from an isolated power IT power the RFI jumper must be cut off Then the RFI capacities filter capacitors will be disconnected from ground to prevent circuit damage according to IEC 61800 3 and reduce earth leakage current 1 After applying power to the AC motor drive do not cut the RFI jumper Therefore please make sure that main power has been switched off before cutting the RFI jumper 2 The gap discharge may occur when the transient voltage is higher than 1 000V Besides electro magnetic compatibility of the AC motor drives will be lower after cutting the RFI jumper Do NOT cut the RFI jumper when main power is connected to earth 4 The RFI jumper cannot be cut when Hi pot tests are performed The mains power and motor must be separated if high voltage test is performed and the leakage currents are too high 5 To prevent drive damage the RFI jumper connected to ground shall be cut off if the AC motor drive is installed on an ungrounded power system or a high resistance grounded over 30 ohms power system or a corner grounded TN system 1 1 5 Remove Instructions Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 1 7 Chapter 1 Introduction Remove Keypad 1 Press and hold in the tabs on each side of the cover
236. ention during Accel 115 230V series 330 0V to 410 0V 460V series 660 0V to 820 0V 0 0 Disable over voltage stall prevention 0 Disable 20 to 250 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Factory Over Current Stall 0 Disable 06 02 Prevention during 170 Operation 20 to 250 0 Disabled 1 Enabled during constant speed operation After the over torque is detected keep running until OL1 or OL occurs 2 Enabled during constant speed operation Over Torque 06 03 Detection Mode After the over torque is detected stop OL2 running 3 Enabled during accel After the over torque is detected keep running until OL1 or OL occurs 4 Enabled during accel After the over torque is detected stop running Over Torque Detection Level 1010 200 Over Torque Electronic Thermal 0 Standard motor self cooled by fan Overload Relay 06 06 Selection 1 Special motor forced external cooling 2 2 Disabled 06 07 Electronic Thermal 30 to 600 sec Characteristic 0 No fault 1 Over current oc Present Fault Record Over voltage ov IGBT Overheat 0H1 Power Board Overheat 0H2 Overload oL Overload1 oL 1 Motor over load oL2 06 09 Second Most External fault EF Recent Fault Record Current exceeds 2 times rated current uring accel ocA Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 17 o N o oc A o N Chapter 4 Parameters F
237. equency and the motor rotor s speed are synchronous It is recommended to use this setting for those motor loads which have a large inertia and small resistance to save time by restarting without waiting the flywheel stops completely such as machinery equipment with a large inertia flywheel 4 128 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Ea Setting 2 the drive will operate by the min frequency It will accelerate to the master frequency after the drive output frequency and motor rotor speed are synchronous It is recommended to use this setting for those motor loads which have a small inertia and large resistance Ea When using with PG card the speed search will start with the actual motor speed detected by the drive and accelerate to the setting frequency setting 1 and 2 are invalid at this moment Ea Related parameters Pr 08 05 Maximum Allowable Power Loss Time Pr 08 07 Baseblock Time for Speed Search BB and Pr 08 08 Current Limit for Speed Search ETE Maximum Allowable Power Loss Time Unit 0 1 Settings 0 1 to 20 0 sec Factory Setting 2 0 Ea If the duration of a power loss is less than this parameter setting the AC motor drive will act by Pr 08 04 setting If it exceeds the Maximum Allowable Power Loss Time the AC motor drive output is then turned off coast stop The selected operation after power loss in Pr 08 04 is only executed when the maximum allowable power loss time is x20 s
238. er PLEASE READ PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR SAFETY AC input power must be disconnected before any wiring to the AC motor drive is made 2 Acharge may still remain in the DC link capacitors with hazardous voltages even if the power has been turned off To prevent personal injury please ensure that power has turned off before opening the AC motor drive and wait ten minutes for the capacitors to discharge to safe voltage levels Never reassemble internal components or wiring The AC motor drive may be destroyed beyond repair if incorrect cables are connected to the input output terminals Never connect the AC motor drive output terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 directly to the AC mains circuit power supply Ground the VFD E using the ground terminal The grounding method must comply with the laws of the country where the AC motor drive is to be installed Refer to the Basic Wiring Diagram 6 VFD E series is used only to control variable speed of 3 phase induction motors NOT for 1 phase motors or other purpose 7 VFD E series shall NOT be used for life support equipment or any life safety situation Amm DO NOT use Hi pot test for internal components The semi conductor used in AC motor drive easily damage by high voltage 2 There are highly sensitive MOS components on the printed circuit boards These components are especially sensitive to static electricity To prevent damage to these components do not touch these com
239. er Fault 0 Disable 08 17 Auto Energy Saving 4 Enable 0 AVR function enable 1 AVR function disable 08 18 AVR Function 2 AVR function disable for decel 3 AVR function disable for stop Compensation 0 0 5 0 408 20 Coefficient for Motor Instability 08 21 Sampling Time 9 1 to 120 0 sec 10 08 22 Number of OOB 00 to 32 Sampling Times 08 23 OOB Average Read only Sampling Angle 0 Disable 08 24 DEB Function 1 Enable 08 25 DEB Return Time 0 to 250 sec Group 9 Communication Parameters Factory or grs Setting Communication A 09 00 Address 1 to 254 1 0 20 Software Brake 115V 230V series 370 0to 430 0V 380 0 Level 460V series 740 0 to 860 0V 760 0 0 Baud rate 4800bps 1 Baud rate 9600bps 409 01 Transmission Speed 1 2 Baud rate 19200bps 3 Baud rate 38400bps Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 23 4 Parameters 7 Factory 0 Warn and keep operating Transmission Fault 1 Warn and ramp to stop 3 Treatment 2 Warn and coast to stop 3 No warning and keep operating 0 1 120 0 seconds 409 03 Time out Detection 0 0 Disable 0 7 N 2 Modbus ASCII 1 7 E 1 Modbus ASCII Communication 2 7 0 1 Modbus ASCII 3 8 N 2 Modbus RTU 4 8 1 Modbus RTU 5 8 0 1 Modbus RTU 6 8 N 1 Modbus RTU 7 8 E 2 Modbus RTU 8 8 0 2 Modbus RTU 9 7 N 1 Modbus ASCII 10 7 E 2 Modbus ASCII 11 7 0
240. erminals of AC M4 M4 MIS MG Drives 3IN 3OUT Card EMED33A 7 7 7 7 M7 MP Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 D 3 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Device ID 0 1 Terminals of AC RY MO1 Drives Relay Card 2C RY2 RY3 EME DR2CA Relay Card 3A EME R3AA RY2 RY3 RY4 HENE DIJA MO2 MO3 MO4 N lt D 2 3 WPLSoft Installation Download PLC program to AC drive Refer to D 3 to D 7 for writing program and download the editor WPLSoft V2 09 at DELTA website http www delta com tw product em plc plc software asp WPL Editor Ladder Diagram Mode Si 90 Bie Comp e Comments Seach Yew Communisten Options Yeda Help 2x sae ELITELE 2oogRs RERQHSE WRARAKRARRABBRE Hh Ah ja iv Replace 9500 Supe YEDE Type D 2 4 Program Input D 4 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Ri Ladder Diagram Mode 0 M1000 R ITMR Ti ITMR T2 v qo 14 72 RST T 20 ID 3791 D 2 5 Program Download Please do following s r program download CODE Step 1 Press button for compiler after inputting program in WPLSoft Step 2 After finishing compiler choose the item Write to PLC in the communic
241. ers Group 10 PID Control A Common applications for PID control 1 Flow control A flow sensor is used to feedback the flow data and perform accurate flow control 2 Pressure control A pressure sensor is used to feedback the pressure data and perform precise pressure control 3 Air volume control An air volume sensor is used to feedback the air volume data to have excellent air volume regulation 4 Temperature control A thermocouple or thermistor is used to feedback temperature data for comfortable temperature control 5 Speed control A speed sensor or encoder is used to feedback motor shaft speed or input another machines speed as a target value for closed loop speed control of master slave operation Pr 10 00 sets the PID setpoint source target value PID control operates with the feedback signal as set by Pr 10 01 either 0 10 voltage or 4 20mA current B PID control loop drive execute PID control output value Setpoint K lF T 8 _1_ TxS feedback signal sensor K Proportional gain P T Integral time l Ty Derivative control D S Operator C Concept of PID control 1 Proportional gain P the output is proportional to input With only proportional gain control there will always be a steady state error 2 Integral time l the controller output is proportional to the integral of the controller input To eliminate the steady state error an integral part needs to be a
242. etection in series connection OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function ANDF Falling edge series connection X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand v Y Y Y Y Explanations ANDF command is used in the series connection of the contacts falling edge detection Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation xo X1 LD X0 Load A contact of XO I W C n ANDF X1 X1 falling edge detection in series connection OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 D 41 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Mnemonic Function ORP Rising edge parallel connection X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand Y Y Y Y v Explanations The ORP commands are used in the parallel connection of the contact s rising edge detection Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation LD X0 Load A contact of XO x1 ORP X1 X1 rising edge detection in parallel connection OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function ORF Falling edge parallel connection X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand Y Y 4 Y EE Explanations The ORP commands are used in the parallel connection of the contact s falling edge detection Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation X0 LD Load A contact of x1 ORF X1 x1 falling edge detection in paralle
243. ethod rated output rated speed power and the change of load capacity The following table lists the factors you need to consider depending on your requirements Related Specification Item Speed and torque characteristics Time Overload Starting ratings capacity torque Friction load and weight load Liquid viscous load Inertia load Load with power transmission Constant torque Constant output Decreasing torque e e Decreasing output Constant load Load Shock load characteristics Repetitive load High starting torque Low starting torque Continuous operation Short time operation e Long time operation at medium low speeds Maximum output current instantaneous e Constant output current continuous Maximum frequency Base frequency e Power supply transformer capacity or percentage impedance Voltage fluctuations and unbalance e e Number of phases single phase protection Frequency Mechanical friction losses in wiring e e Load type Load speed and torque characteristics Duty cycle modification e Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 C 1 Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive C 1 Capacity Formulas 1 When one AC motor drive operates one motor The starting capacity should be less than 1 5x rated capacity of AC motor drive The starting capacity 2 kxN 2 92 375 x lt 1 5xthe capacity of _ AC _ motor drive kV
244. etion of counting the specified output terminal will be activated Pr 03 00 to Pr 03 01 set to 11 Ea It can be used as an indication for the AC motor drive run in low speed to stop Ea Related parameters Pr 03 00 Multi function Output Relay RA1 RB1 RC1 Pr 03 01 Multi function Output Terminal MO1 Pr 04 05 Multi function Input Terminal MI3 Pr 04 06 Multi function Input Terminal MI4 Pr 04 07 Multi function Input Terminal MI5 and Pr 04 08 Multi function Input Terminal 16 Ea Example The timing diagram for Pr 03 05 5 and Pr 03 06 3 c 000 c0003 Display c 0008 c006 1 c 0088 c00603 c O04 080 0002 2msecle Pr 00 04 1 TRG Counter Trigger width of trigger Sial Preliminary Count Value i should not be less than Pr 03 00 Pr 03 01 11 Ex 03 05 5 03 06 3 2ms lt 250 Hz Terminal Count Value j Pr 03 00 Pr 03 01 10 03 07 EF Active when Terminal Count Value Attained Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Terminal count value attained no EF display 1 Terminal count value attained EF active The is external fault It needs to set one of Pr 04 05 Pr 04 08 to 14 to active the terminal Ea If this parameter is set to 1 and the desired value of counter is attained the AC drive will treat it as a fault The drive will stop and show the EF message on the display If this parameter is set to 0 and the desired value of counter is attained the AC drive will continue run Ea
245. etting 0 Settings 0 Positive PID feedback from external terminal AVI 0 10VDC 1 Negative PID feedback from external terminal AVI 0 10VDC 2 Positive PID feedback from external terminal ACI 4 20mA AVI2 0 10VDC 3 Negative PID feedback from external terminal ACI 4 20mA AVI2 0 10VDC Ea Note that the measured variable feedback controls the output frequency Hz When 10 00 2 or 3 the set point Master Frequency for PID control is obtained from the AVI or ACI AVI2 external terminal 0 to 10V or 4 20mA or from multi step speed When Pr 10 00 1 the set point is obtained from the keypad E When Pr 10 01 1 or 3 Negative feedback Error Err setpoin SP feedback FB When the feedback will be increased by the increasing output frequency please use this setting Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 159 Chapter 4 Parameters When 10 01 to 0 or 2 Positive feedback Error Err feedback FB setpoint SP When the feedback will be decreased by the increasing output frequency please use this setting Ea Select input terminal accordingly Make sure this parameter setting does not conflict with the setting for Pr 10 00 Master Frequency Related parameters Pr 00 04 Content of Multi function Display set to 5 Display PID analog feedback signal value b Pr 10 11 Source of PID Set point and Pr 04 19 ACI AVI2 Selection X Source of PID Set
246. etting range of 32 bit high speed addition subtraction counter is K 2 147 483 648 K2 147 483 647 2 The settings can be positive negative numbers by using constant or data register D special data register D1000 D 1044 is not included If using data register D the setting will occupy two continuous data register The total band width of high speed counter that VFD E supports is up to 30kHz and 500kHz for pulse input D 4 7 Register Types There are two types of register which sorts by characters in the following 1 General The data in register will be cleared to 0 when PLC switches from RUN register to STOP or power is off 2 Special Each special register has the special definition and purpose It is used register to save system status error messages monitor state Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 D 23 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function D 4 8 Special Auxiliary Relays Special Read R M Function Write W Normally open contact a contact This contact is On when running and it is M1000 On when the status is set to RUN R Normally closed contact b contact This contact is Off in running and it is Off M1001 when the status is set to RUN On only for 1 scan after RUN Initial pulse is contact a It will get positive M1002 pulse in the RUN moment Pulse width scan period Off only for 1 scan after RUN Initial pulse is contact a It will get negative M1008 pulse in the R
247. evision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Start Auto Tuning by pressing RUN key after this parameter is set to 1 or 2 When setting to 1 it will only auto detect R1 value and Pr 07 01 must be input manually When set to 2 the AC motor drive should be unloaded and the values of Pr 07 01 and Pr 07 05 will be set automatically The steps for AUTO Tuning are 1 Make sure that all the parameters are set to factory settings and the motor wiring is correct 2 Make sure the motor has no load before executing auto tuning and the shaft is not connected to any belt or gear motor 3 Fillin Pr 01 01 Pr 01 02 Pr 07 00 Pr 07 04 and Pr 07 06 with correct values 4 After Pr 07 04 is set to 2 the AC motor drive will execute auto tuning immediately after receiving a RUN command Note The motor will run The total auto tune time will be 15 seconds Pr 01 09 Pr 01 10 Higher power drives need longer Accel Decel time factory setting is recommended After executing Auto tune Pr 07 04 is set to 0 After executing please check if there are values filled in Pr 07 01 and Pr 07 05 If not please press RUN key after setting Pr 07 04 again 6 Then you can set Pr 00 10 to 1 and set other parameters according to your application requirement 4 119 Chapter 4 Parameters Related parameters Pr 01 01 Maximum Voltage Frequency Fbase Motor 0 Pr 01 02 Maximum Output Voltage Vmax Motor 0 Pr 07 00 Motor Rated Current Motor
248. eypad is optional 0 to 10V from AVI 4 to 20mA from ACI or 0 to 10V from AVI2 RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication Digital keypad potentiometer Ro N CANopen communication En En These parameters set the Master Frequency Command Source of the AC motor drive The factory setting for master frequency command is 1 digital keypad is optional please refer to Appendix B for details Setting 2 use the ACI AVI switch on the AC motor drive to select ACI or AVI2 When setting to AVI AVI2 is indicated Please note the ACI AVI switch on the AC motor drive Switch to ACI for 4 to 20mA analog current signal ACI Pr 04 19 should be set to 0 and AVI for analog voltage signal AVI2 Pr 04 19 should be set to 1 When the 3 switch on the upper right corner is set to be ON as shown in the following diagram the source of first master frequency command Pr 02 00 will force setting to 2 This setting Pr 02 00 can t be changed till the 3 switch is set to be OFF in When the AC motor drive is controlled by external terminal please refer to Pr 02 05 for details PR 02 09 is only valid when one of Pr 04 05 04 08 is set to 22 When setting 22 is activated the source of the frequency command is the setting of Pr 02 09 The factory setting of the Source of frequency command is the first frequency command Only one of the source of first master frequency command and second master frequency command can be enable at one time
249. ferent types of control modes External Terminal MI1 OPEN STOP CLOSE FWD REV STOP ee Ml2 OPEN STOP CLOSE REV FWD STOP 5 MI1 OPEN STOP CLOSE RUN OPEN FWD CLOSE REV RUN STOP FWD REV 4 ee Mle DCM Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters 04 04 N 3 wire External Terminal STOP RUN L MI1 MI3 MI2 CLOSE RUN OPEN STOP OPEN FWD CLOSE REV REV FWD DCM Multi function Input Terminal MI3 Factory Setting 1 04 06 Multi function Input Terminal MI4 Factory Setting 2 04 07 Multi function Input Terminal MI5 Factory Setting 3 04 08 Multi function Input Terminal MI6 Factory Setting 4 Settings Function Description Any unused terminals should be programmed to 0 to insure they 0 No Function have no effect on operation Multi Step Speed 1 Command 1 These four inputs select the multi speed defined by Pr 05 00 to Pr 05 14 as shown in the diagram at the end of this table Multi Step Speed Command 2 NOTE Pr 05 00 to Pr 05 14 can also be used to control output 3 Multi Step Speed speed by programming the AC motor drive s internal PLC Command 3 function There are 17 step speed frequencies including Master Frequency and Jog Frequency to sel
250. fferent It is used to reserve present contents and at the same time saving the detection status of the acquired contact rising edge into the accumulative register Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation XO X1 LDP X0 Start rising edge detection m t I I Cv D AND X1 Series connection A contact of X1 OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function LDF Falling edge detection operation X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand Y Y Y v Y E Explanations Usage of the LDF command is the same as the LD command but the motion is different It is used to reserve present contents and at the same time saving the detection status of the acquired contact falling edge into the accumulative register Program Example D 40 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Ladder diagram Command code Operation X1 LDF X0 Start falling edge detection mE E Cn AND X1 Series connection A contact of X1 OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function ANDP Rising edge series connection X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand Y Y Y Y Y 25 Explanations ANDP command is used in the series connection of the contacts rising edge detection Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation XO X4 LD Load A contact of X0 1 X1 rising edge d
251. firmware version R D1002 Program capacity R D1003 Checksum R Reserved D1010 Present scan time Unit 0 1ms R 01011 scan time Unit 0 1ms 01012 scan time Unit 0 1ms pa Reserved 01020 Output frequency R D1021 Output current R The ID of the extension card 02 USB Card 03 12 Bit A D 2CH 12 Bit D A 2CH 01022 04 Relay Card 2C R 05 Relay Card 3A 06 3IN 3OUT Card 07 PG Card pe Reserved _ Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 D 25 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Special D Function Read R Write W D1025 The present value of the high speed counter C235 low byte R D1026 The present value of the high speed counter C235 high byte R D1027 Frequency command of the PID control R D1028 The value of AVI analog voltage input 0 10V corresponds to 0 R 1023 The value of ACI analog current input 4 20mA corresponds to 0 D1029 1023 orthe value of AVI2 analog voltage input 0 10V R corresponds to 0 1023 D1030 The value of V R digital keypad 0 10V corresponds to 0 1023 R D1031 D1035 Reserved 01036 PLC error code R D1037 D1039 Reserved D1040 Analog output value R W D1041 D1042 Reserved D1043 User defined when Pr 00 04 is set to 2 the register data will be R W displayed as C xxx 01044 High speed counter mode R W D 4 10 Communication Addresses for Devices only for PLC2 mode
252. g feedback signal value b 6 Output power factor angle n 7 Display output power P 8 Display the estimated value of torque as it relates to current t 9 Display AVI I V 10 Display ACI AVI2 i mA V 11 Display the temperature of IGBT h 12 Display AVI3 ACI2 level 13 Display AVI4 ACIG level i 14 Display PG speed in RPM G 15 Display motor number M User Defined 00 05 Coefficient K 0 1 to 160 0 1 0 00 06 Power Board Read only H H Software Version 00 07 Control Board Read only T4HE Software Version 00 08 Password Input 0 to 9999 0 00 09 Password Set 0 to 9999 0 0 V f Control 00 10 Control Method 0 1 Vector Control 00 11 Reserved 50Hz Base Voltage 0 230V 400V 00 12 0 Selection 1 220V 380V Group 1 Basic Parameters Factory 01 00 Output 50 00 to 600 0 Hz 60 00 Frequency Fmax Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 3 Chapter 4 Parameters Explanation Maximum Voltage 01 01 Frequency Fbase 0 10 to 600 0 Hz Motor 0 Maximum Output 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 01 02 Voltage Vmax Motor 0 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V i Mid Point Frequency 01 03 Fmid Motor 0 0 10 to 600 0 Hz Mid Point Voltage 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 10 0 01 04 Vid Motor 0 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V 20 0 Minimum Output 01 05 Frequency Fmin 0 10 to 600 0 Hz 1 50 Motor 0 Minimum Output 115V 230V series 0 1V to
253. he signal is abnormal Check if the master is connected Check if the master is connected Reset CAN bus Check if the communication protocol is correct Set Pr 08 24 to 0 Check if the input power is stable Check if the communication wiring is correct Return to the factory 6 5 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance 6 1 2 Reset There are three methods to reset the AC motor drive after solving the fault 12 key on keypad 2 Set external terminal to RESET set one of Pr 04 05 Pr 04 08 to 05 and then set to be ON 3 Send RESET command by communication Make sure that RUN command or signal is OFF before executing RESET to prevent damage or personal injury due to immediate operation 6 2 Maintenance and Inspections Modern AC motor drives are based on solid state electronics technology Preventive maintenance is required to keep the AC motor drive in its optimal condition and to ensure a long life It is recommended to have a qualified technician perform a check up of the AC motor drive regularly Daily Inspection Basic check up items to detect if there were any abnormalities during operation are Whether the motors are operating as expected Whether the installation environment is abnormal Whether the cooling system is operating as expected Whether any irregular vibration or sound occurred during operation Whether the motors are overheating during operation
254. ibration of counterforce for smooth operation 4 80 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Output frequency H setting frequency 03 11 Brake release frequency 03 12 Brake engage frequency DC brake 08 01 DC brake time Chapter 4 Parameters DC brake 08 02 DC brake time RUN STOP RUN STOP during stopping Brake control during start up ON OFF 1 21 P Display the Status of Multi function Output Terminals Settings Read Only Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bit5 Bit6 Bit7 RLY Status MO 1 Status MO2 RA2 Status Status MO4 RA4 Status MOS RAS Status MO6 RA6 Status MO7 RA7 Status Factory display 255 Ea When all output external terminals aren t activated Pr 03 13 will display 255 11111111 For standard AC motor drive without extension card the multi function output terminals falling edge triggered and Pr 03 13 will par 3 11 for no action Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Weights Bit 2 0 Active 1 Off a8 Relay 1 MO1 4 81 Chapter 4 Parameters For Example If Pr 03 13 displays 2 it means Relay 1 is active The display value 2 bit 1 X 2 E When extension card is installed the number of the multi function output terminals will increase according to the extension card The maximum number of the m
255. id point a potentiometer will give 40 Hz Once the Maximum Output Frequency is reached any further increase of the potentiometer or signal will not increase the output frequency To use the full potentiometer range please refer to Example 3 The value of external input voltage current 0 8 33V corresponds to the setting frequency 10 60Hz Thus the center of the keypad potentiometer is Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 83 Chapter 4 Parameters 40Hz and the value of external input voltage current 8 33 10V corresponds to the setting frequency 60Hz Please refer to example 3 for this part Pr 01 00 60Hz Max output Freq Potentiometer Pr 04 00 16 7 Bias adjustment Pr 04 01 0 Positive bias Pr 04 02 100 Input gain 04 03 0 No negative bias command 60Hz 40Hz Bias 10Hz Adjustment i OHz OV 5V 8 33V10V Bias adjustment 10Hz 60Hz Gain 100 100 16 7 Gain 100 Example 3 Use of bias and gain for use of full range This example also shows a popular method The whole scale of the potentiometer can be used as desired In addition to signals of 0 to 10V the popular voltage signals also include signals of 0 to 5V or any value under 10V Regarding the setting please refer to the following examples Pr 01 00 60Hz Max output Freq Potentiometer Pr 04 00 20 0 Bias adjustment Pr 04 01 0 Positive bias Pr 04 02 83 3 Input gain Pr 04 03 0 No negative bias command
256. ied STOPPED CME COP01 is in STOPPED state Green Blinking CME COP01 is in the PRE Green ee ee OPERATIONAL state CME COP01 is in the Green ON OPERATIONAL OPERATIONAL state Red ON Configuration error Node ID or Baud rate setting error Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 ERROR LED Single Flash Red Warning limit reached Double Flash Red Error control event Red ON SP LED LED Blinki Red mang CRC check error Connection failure No connection Red ON LED Blinking CME COP01 returns error Green code LED Descriptions Appendix B Accessories Indication CME COP01 is working condition At least one of error counter of the CANopen controller has reached or exceeded the warning level too many error frames A guard event or heartbeat event has occurred The CANopen controller is bus off Indication No power on CME COP01 card Check your communication setting in VFD E drives 19200 lt 8 N 2 gt RTU 1 Check the connection between VFD E drive and CME COP01 card is correct 2 Re wire the VFD E connection and ensure that the wire specification is correct Check the PLC program ensure the index and sub index is correct Communication is normal State Description LED ON Constantly on LED OFF Constantly off LED blinking Flash on for 0 2s and off for 0 2s LED single On for 0 2s and off for 1s flash On for 0 2s off for 0 25 on for 0 25 and off for 1s
257. imer unit of timer settings Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 D 21 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function D 4 6 The Features and Functions of Counter Features Item 16 bits counters 32 bits counters Type General General High speed Count direction Count up Count up down Settings 0 32 767 2 147 483 648 2 147 483 647 Designate for constant Constant K or data register D Constant K or data register D 2 for designated Present value change Counter will stop when attaining settings Counter will keep on counting when attaining settings Output contact When count attains settings contact will be On and latched When count up attains settings contact will be On and latched When count down attains settings contact will reset to Off Reset action The present value will reset to will reset to Off 0 when RST command is executed and contact Present register 16 bits 32 bits Contact action After scanning act together Act immediately when count Anter scanning attains It has no relation with act together scan period Functions When pulse input signal of counter is from Off to On the present value of counter equals to settings and output coil is On Settings are decimal system and data register D can also be used as settings 16 bit counters CO C7 1 Setting range of 16 bit counter is KO K32 767 is the sam
258. iminary Count Value Active when the internal counter reaches Preliminary Count Attained Value 12 Over Voltage Stall Active when the Over Voltage Stall function Pr 06 00 supervision operating Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 73 Chapter 4 Parameters Settings Function Description Over Current Stall Active when the Over Current Stall function Pr 06 01 supervision Pr 06 02 operating i Heat Sink Overheat When heatsink overheats it will signal to prevent OH turn off Warning the drive When it is higher than 85 C 185 F it will be ON 15 Over Voltage supervision Active when the DC BUS voltage exceeds level 2 Active when the PID feedback signal is abnormal Refer to 16 PID supervision Pr 10 12 and Pr 13 17 Forward command Active when the direction command is FWD 18 Reverse command Active when the direction command is REV Zero Speed Output 19 Active when the drive is standby or stop Signal Communication Warning 20 FbE Cexx AoL2 AUE Active when there is a Communication Warning SAVE i Brake Control Desired Active when output frequency gt Pr 03 11 Deactivated when Frequency Attained output frequency lt Pr 03 12 after STOP command 22 Drive Ready Active when the drive is on and no abnormality detected Desired Frequency 2 23 Active when the desired frequency 1 Pr 03 14 is attained Attained EE Desired Frequency 1 Attained
259. inals B1 The length of wiring should be less than 5m with cable a When not used please leave the terminals B1 open AN WEEN Short circuiting B2 or to B1 can damage the AC motor drive Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 2 15 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 2 3 2 Main Circuit Terminals Frame A Main circuit terminals vata R L1 S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 WITS Models Wire Torque Wire type VFD002E11A 21A 23A VFD004E11A 21A 23A 43A VFD007E21A 23A 43A VFD015E23A 43A VFD002E11C 21C 23C VFD004E11C 21C 23C 43C VFD007E21C 23C 43C Stranded VFD015E23C 43C 5 14kgf cm copper VFDOO2E11T 21T 23T 47 m 12in Ibf Only VFD004E11T 21T 23T 75 43 VFD007E21T 23T 43T VFD015E23T 43T VFD002E 11P 21P 23P VFD004E11P 21P 23P 43P VFD007E21P 23P 43P VFD015E23P 43P Frame B Main circuit terminals 9 R L1 5 12 T L3 U T1 V T2 W T3 B1 B2 Models Wire Torque Wire type VFD007E11A VFD015E21A VFD022E21A 23A 43A Stranded VFD037E23A 43A 8 18 AWG 18kgf cm copper VFD007E11C 8 4 0 8mm 15 6in Ibf Only VFD015E21C 75 C VFD022E21C 23C 43C VFD037E23C 43C
260. ing on brand The lubricating function for operating long time at low speed and for high speed operation needs to be considered carefully Synchronous motor The rated current and starting current are higher than for standard motors Please check before operation and choose the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully When the AC Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive motor drive operates more than one motor please pay attention to starting and changing the motor Power Transmission Mechanism Pay attention to reduced lubrication when operating gear reduction motors gearboxes belts and chains etc over longer periods at low speeds At high speeds of 50 60Hz and above lifetime reducing noises and vibrations may occur Motor torque The torque characteristics of a motor operated by an AC motor drive and commercial mains power are different Below you ll find the torque speed characteristics of a standard motor 4 pole 15kW AC motor drive Motor 180 180 155 60 seconds 155 60 seconds 140 continuous continuous E 100f jr 80 P 55H eem 0320 60 120 0320 60 120 ibo us Ade NE ase freq 2
261. ion result to the accumulative register the pointer of operation result doesn t move Mnemonic Function MPP Reads the current result of the internal PLC operations Operand None Explanations Reading content of the operation result to the accumulative register the stack pointer will decrease 1 Program Example Ladder diagram MPS x1 a END X 5 D 34 Command code Operation LD Load contact A of MPS Save in stack AND X1 Connect to contact A of X1 in series OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil MRD Read from the stack without moving pointer AND X2 Connect to contact A of X2 in series OUT Drive MO coil MPP Read from the stack OUT Y2 Drive Y2 coil END End program Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Mnemonic Function INV Inverting Operation Operand None Explanations Inverting the operation result and use the new data as an operation result Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation Hi LD Load A contact of uU INV Inverting the operation result OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function OUT Output coil X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 TO 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand Y Explanations Output the logic calculation result before the OUT command to specific device Motion of coil contact
262. ions cea ctc Ground fault Auto accel decel failure TL 7 7 Communication Error a dE Software protection failure r r Analog signal error EBRE PID feedback signal error PHL Phase Loss gue muse Auto Tuning Error Communication time out 4 error on the control board or power board Motor overheat protection PG signal error CANopen Guarding Time out Only for VFDxxxExxC Omer 6 4 Corrective Actions When one of the output terminal s is grounded short circuit current is more than 5096 of AC motor drive rated current the AC motor drive power module may be damaged NOTE The short circuit protection is provided for AC motor drive protection not for protection of the user 1 Check whether the IGBT power module is damaged 2 Check for possible poor insulation at the output line Check if the motor is suitable for operation by AC motor drive Check if the regenerative energy is too large Load may have changed suddenly Check the RS485 connection between the AC motor drive and RS485 master for loose wires and wiring to correct pins Check if the communication protocol address transmission speed etc are properly set Use the correct checksum calculation Please refer to group 9 in the chapter 5 for detail information Return to the factory Check the wiring of ACI 1 Check parameter settings Pr 10 01 and AVI ACI wiring 2 Check for possib
263. irst Freq Source Pr 02 00 Display the Master aor 02 16 Freq Command Bit1 1 by Second Freq Source Pr 02 09 Source Bit2 1 by Multi input function Bit3 1 by PLC Freq command NOT for VFD E C models Read Only BitO 1 by Digital Keypad Display the Bit1 1 by RS485 communication Operation A Command Source Bit2 1 by External Terminal 2 3 wire mode Bit3 1 by Multi input function 5 1 by CANopen communication Group 3 Output Function Parameters Parameter Explanation Facto Customer Setting 03 09 Reserved 03 10 Reserved Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 183 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 4 Input Function Parameters Parameter Explanation Factory Customer E 04 05 Multi function Input 0 No function Terminal MI3 Multi Step speed command 1 Multi Step speed command 2 04 06 Multi function Input Multi Step speed command 3 Terminal M14 Multi Step speed command 4 External reset 04 07 Multi function Input Accel Decel inhibit 3 Terminal MI5 Accel Decel time selection command Jog Operation oO Oo O OC A WwW M 04 08 Multi function Input External base block 23 Terminal M6 Up Increment master frequency Down Decrement master frequency Counter Trigger Signal Counter reset E F External Fault Input 15 PID function disabled 16 Output shutoff stop 17 Parameter lock enable 18 Operation command selection external terminals 19 Ope
264. is set to 0 then 5VDC will correspond to Maximum Output Frequency 03 05 Terminal Count Value Unit 1 Settings 0 to 9999 Factory Setting 0 This parameter sets the count value of the internal counter To increase the internal counter one of Pr 04 05 to 04 08 should be set to 12 It can be used in the counter control application Upon completion of counting the specified output terminal will be activated Pr 03 00 to Pr 03 01 set to 10 the count value will be reset after reaching the setting of Pr 03 05 Related parameters Pr 03 00 Multi function Output Relay RA1 RB1 RC1 Pr 03 01 Multi function Output Terminal MO1 Pr 04 05 Multi function Input Terminal MI3 Pr 04 06 Multi function Input Terminal MI4 Pr 04 07 Multi function Input Terminal MI5 and Pr 04 08 Multi function Input Terminal MI6 When the display shows c555 the drive has counted 555 times If display shows c555e it means that real counter value is between 5 550 and 5 559 ETE Preliminary Count Value Unit 1 Settings 0 to 9999 Factory Setting 0 When the counter value counts from c1 to this value the corresponding multi function output terminal will be activated 4 76 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters This parameter sets the count value of the internal counter To increase the internal counter one of Pr 04 05 to 04 08 should be set to 12 Upon compl
265. ision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 35 Chapter 4 Parameters Carrier Frequency Setting Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters The carrier frequency can be 02 03 General application Low noise increased when required to reduce motor noise Keep Running when Frequency Command is Lost UN Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters When the frequency command is lost 02 06 is For continuous by system malfunction the AC motor Air conditioners A operation drive can still run Suitable for intelligent air conditioners Output Signal during Running Applications Purpose Functions Related PP P Parameters Signal available to stop braking brake 03 00 03 01 E Provide a signal for release when the AC motor drive is General application running status running This signal will disappear 9 when the AC motor drive is free running Output Signal in Zero Speed EAM Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters When the output frequency is lower 03 00 03 01 Provide a signal for than the min output frequency General application running status signal is given for external system or control wiring Output Signal at Desired Frequency EN i Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters When the output frequency is at the 03 00 03 01 General application Provide a signal for running status desir
266. isplayed Ea The method to detect over torque is shown as follows 1 when output current exceeds over torque detection level Pr 06 04 2 when over torque time exceeds over torque detection time Pr 06 05 If a Multi function Output Terminal is set to over torque detection Pr 03 00 03 01 04 the output is on Please refer to Pr 03 00 03 01 for details Ea For general motor the output torque and output current of the AC motor drive will in proportion in V f control Thus it can use the output current of the AC motor drive to limit the output torque of motor Ea Related parameters Pr 03 00 Multi function Output Relay RA1 RB1 RC1 and Pr 03 01 Multi function Output Terminal MO1 06 06 Electronic Thermal Overload Relay Selection OL1 Factory Setting 2 Settings 0 Operate with a Standard Motor self cooled by fan 1 Operate with a Special Motor forced external cooling 2 Operation disabled Ea This parameter is used to set the operation selection of the electronic thermal overload relay Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 111 Chapter 4 Parameters This function is used to protect the motor from overloading overheating When the motor self cooled by fan operates in low frequency overload is seldom happened Refer to the following figure for the application When the rated current of motor is less than drive s or bad design of the motor heat dissipation it can use this parameter t
267. ith full voltage During constant speed operation it will auto calculate the best voltage value by the load power for the load This function is not suitable for the ever changing load or near full load during operation Ea The max energy saving is in the stable load output At this moment the output voltage is almost 70 of the rated voltage Output Voltage 100 70 During auto energy saving operation is the output voltage lowered as much as possible to keep the load The output voltage is maximally lowered to 7096 of the normal output voltage Output Frequency Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 133 Chapter 4 Parameters EXE Automatic Voltage Regulation AVR Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 AVR function enabled 1 AVR function disabled 2 AVR function disabled for deceleration 3 AVR function disabled for stop The rated voltage of the motor is usually 230V 200VAC 50Hz 60Hz and the input voltage of the AC motor drive may vary between 180V to 264 VAC 50Hz 60Hz Therefore when the AC motor drive is used without AVR function the output voltage will be the same as the input voltage When the motor runs at voltages exceeding the rated voltage with 12 20 its lifetime will be shorter and it can be damaged due to higher temperature failing insulation and unstable torque output AVR function automatically regulates the AC motor drive output voltage to the Maximum Out
268. l i connection OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil D 42 Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Mnemonic Function PLS Rising edge output X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand v Y a Explanations When X0 OFF ON rising edge trigger PLS command will be executed and MO will send the pulse of one time which the length is a scan time Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation LD Load A contact of XO MO PLS MO rising edge output SET LD Load the contact A of MO Timing Diagram SET YO YO latched ON xo 7 1 MO scan time YO Mnemonic Function PLF Falling edge output X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand v 4 Explanations When X0 ON OFF falling edge trigger PLF command will be executed and MO will send the pulse of one time which the length is the time for scan one time Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 D 43 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation LD Load A contact of MO PLF falling edge output LD Load the contact A of MO SET YO YO latched ON Timing Diagram MO scan time YO Mnemonic Function END Program End Operand None Explanations It needs to
269. l it comes to a complete standstill The motor stop method is usually determined by the characteristics of the motor load and how frequently it is stopped 1 It is recommended to use ramp to stop for safety of personnel or to prevent material from being wasted in applications where the motor has to stop after the drive is stopped The deceleration time has to be set accordingly 2 If motor free running is allowed or the load inertia is large it is recommended to select coast to stop For example blowers punching machines centrifuges and pumps Ea Related parameters Pr 01 10 Decel Time 1 Pr 01 12 Decel Time 2 Pr 04 05 Multi function Input Terminal MI3 Pr 04 06 Multi function Input Terminal MI4 Pr 04 07 Multi function Input Terminal MI5 and Pr 04 08 Multi function Input Terminal MI6 Dra The digital keypad is optional Please refer to Appendix B for details When using without this optional keypad the FAULT LED will be ON once there is error messages or warning messages from the external terminals Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 61 Chapter 4 Parameters Frequency Frequency output output frequency tion motor motor speed speed Time Time stops according ta freeruntostop operation decel eration time operation command RUN STOP command RUN STOP ramp to stop and free run to stop Frequency i Frequency frequency output
270. le fault between system response time and the PID feedback signal detection time Pr 10 08 Check input phase wiring for loose contacts Check cabling between drive and motor Retry again NA 1 Press RESET key to set all parameters to factory setting 2 Return to the factory 1 Check if the motor is overheat 2 Check Pr 07 12 to Pr 07 17 settings Check the wiring of PG card 2 Try another PG card Connect to CAN bus again and reset CAN bus Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance Corrective Actions P uuu CANopen Heartbeat Time out lA Lj rw tee Only for VFDxxxExxC Check if CANopen synchronous message is r c4 CANopen SYNC Time out 44 Only for VFDxxxExxC abnormal c3 e CANopen SDO buffer overflow Only for VFDxxxExxC ra CAN Boot up fault Only for 5 VEDxxxEXxxC i Error communication protocol of CANopen Only for VFDxxxExxC It will be displayed during deceleration when Pr 08 24 is not set to 0 and unexpected power off occurs such as momentary power loss Abnormal Communication 1 Loop 2 22 n r Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 _ CANopen SDO Time out Check if command channels are full 9 Only for VFDxxxExxC Too short time between commands please check SDO message sent from the master Reset CAN bus Check if it connects to terminal resistor Check if t
271. lease contact DELTA No Y Adjust surrounding temperature to specification 5 6 Overload OL OL1 OL2 AA Check for correct settings at No 7 06 06 06 07 gt Modify setting Yes Is load too large No Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise Yes gt Reduce load or increase the power of AC motor drive 5 4 Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 5 7 Keypad Display is Abnormal Abnormal display or no display Cycle power to AC motor drive Fix connector and eliminate noise Display Yes v normal he No SS correctly and Check if all connectors are connect no noise is present AC motor drive works normally p 5 8 Phase Loss PHL AC motor drive has malfunction Please contact DELTA Phase loss Check wiring at S and T terminals Ne y Yes Check if the screws of Correct wiring No terminals are tightened gt gt Tighten all screws y Yes Check if the input voltage of R S T is unbalanced Yes No v Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise Please contact DELTA Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Please check the wiring and power system for abnormal
272. m 48VDC 50mA Refer to Pr 03 01 for programming Max 48Vdc 50mA WY rn T MO1 DCM MO1 Multi function Output 1 Mot Photocoupler 4 MCM internal circuit Multi function output Common for Multi function Outputs 10V Potentiometer power supply 10VDC 3mA Analog voltage Input Impedance 47 10V avi circuit Resolution 10 bits Range 0 10VDC 0 Max Output Frequency Pr 01 00 Selection Pr 02 00 Pr 02 09 Pr 10 00 internal circuit Set up Pr 04 11 Pr 04 14 04 19 04 23 ACM Common for AVI ACI AFM Analog current Input Impedance 2500 100kO acy ean Resolution 10 bits Range 4 20 R 0 Max Output Frequency Pr 01 00 5 Selection Pr 02 00 Pr 02 09 Pr 10 00 ACM internalcircuit Set up Pr 04 15 Pr 04 18 Analog output meter 0 to 10V 2mA bon Tm Impedance 100kQ AFM Output current 2mA max iT patentiometer Resolution 8 bits ax 2m4 Range 0 10VDC internal circuit ACM Function Pr 03 03 to Pr 03 04 NOTE Control signal wiring size 18 AWG 0 75 mm with shielded wire Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 2 19 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Analog inputs AVI ACI ACM Analog input signals are easily affected by external noise Use shielded wiring and keep it as short as possible 20m with proper grounding If the noise is in
273. mA 0 10V E M When switching to AVI o5 ACM 4 it indicates AVI2 8 lt 1 7 Reserved Analog Signal Common L E 8 Reserved Yo For VFD E C models please referto figure 8 M 2 6 ain circuit power terminals Controlcircuit terminals Shielded leads amp Cable Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Figure 5 for models of VFD E Series VFD002E11T 21T VFD004E11A 21T VFD007E21T Fuse NFB No Fuse Breaker R L1 S L2 Recommended Circuit when power supply is turned OFF bya fault output If the fault occurs the contact will be ON to turn off the power and E protect the power system OFF Factory setting NPN Mode NPN t Please refer to Figure 7 for wiring of NPN mode and PNP mode Factory setting ACI Mode AVI ACI AVI switch When switching to AVI it indicates AVI2 e FWD Stop REV Stop Factory Multi step 1 setting e Multi step 2 4 Multi step 3 4 Multi step 4 Digital Signal Common T 5 259 X Analog Signal Common T Main circuit power terminals Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring BR brake resistor 4 optional A B1 B2 2 R L1 U T1 lt S L2 V T2 W T3 d RB RA RC i l RB 24V RE MI1 _ Mot MI2 IS MI3 FA MI4 MCM MI5 MI6 AFM DCM E ACM E 10V Power supply 1
274. maller than or equal to the rated voltage of the motor as indicated on the motor nameplate This parameter value must be equal to or greater than the Mid Point Voltage Pr 01 04 If the output voltage of the AC motor drive is smaller than this setting the output voltage can t reach this setting due to input voltage limit If this setting is greater than the rated voltage of the motor it may cause over current of the motor output to damage motor or trigger the over current protection If this setting is smaller than the rated voltage of the motor it may cause the insufficient motor torque Related parameters Pr 01 01 Maximum Voltage Frequency Fbase Motor 0 Pr 01 03 Mid Point Frequency Fmid Motor 0 Pr 01 04 Mid Point Voltage Vmid Motor 0 Pr 01 05 Minimum Output Frequency Fmin Motor 0 and Pr 01 06 Minimum Output Voltage Vmin Motor 0 01 03 Mid Point Frequency Fmid Motor 0 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 1 50 co 4 46 This parameter sets the Mid Point Frequency of the V f curve With this setting the V f ratio between Minimum Frequency and Mid Point frequency can be determined This parameter must be equal to or greater than Minimum Output Frequency Pr 01 05 and equal to or less than Maximum Voltage Frequency Pr 01 01 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 BBB n D Chapter 4 Parameters Please note that unsuitable setting may cause over curre
275. me Guarding time is invalid 0 Number 0x3 RO U8 1 Vender ID 0x000001DD RO U32 0x1018 0x00002600 2 Product code model RO U32 3 Revision 0x00010000 RO 032 Server SDO 0x1200 0 Parameter 2 RO U8 COB ID Client gt 0x0000600 1 Server Node ID RO 032 E 10 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Index Sub Definition Size Unit NOTE COB ID Client 0x0000580 Server Node ID BO 928 Number 2 RO U8 0x00000200 1 COB ID used by PDO Node ID RW U32 00 Acyclic amp 0x1409 2 Transmission 5 RW U8 01 240 Cyclic amp Synchronous 255 Asynchronous 0 Number 2 RO U8 0x80000300 1 COB ID used by PDO Node ID RW U32 0x1401 00 Acyclic amp Synchronous 2 Transmission Type 5 RW U8 01 240 Cyclic amp Synchronous 255 Asynchronous 0 Number 2 RW U8 1 1 Mapped Object 0x60400010 RW U32 0x1600 2 2 Mapped Object 0x60420020 RW 032 3 3 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 4 4 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 O0 Number 0 RW U8 1 1 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 0x1601 2 2 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 3 3 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 4 4 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 0 Number 5 RO U8 0x00000180 1 COB ID used by PDO Node ID RW U32 00 Acyclic amp Synchrouous 01 240 Cyclic amp 0x1800
276. mming parameters Display Message Descriptions jesroP FWDe REV le Displays the AC drive Master Frequency jesroP FWDe REV e e RUN je stop FWDe REV 6 le estor FWDe REV le jesroP FWDe REV e le estor FWDe REV 6 le jesroP FWDe REV 6 le FWDe REV le Displays the actual output frequency at terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 User defined unit where U F x Pr 00 05 Displays the output current at terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 Displays the AC motor drive forward run status Displays the AC motor drive reverse run status The counter value C Displays the selected parameter Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 B 21 Appendix B Accessories Display Message FWDe EE estor FWDe REV estor estor FWDe REV le jesroP FWDe REV le Descriptions Displays the actual stored value of the selected parameter External Fault Display End for approximately 1 second if input has been accepted by pressing Eni key After a parameter value has been set the new value is automatically stored in memory To modify an entry use the and keys Display Err if the input is invalid gt When the setting exceeds 99 99 for those numbers with 2 decimals i e unit is 0 01 it will only display 1
277. mulative register D 32 Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Program Example Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Ladder diagram Command code Operation XO ANB X1 LD X0 Load contact A of XO 2 ORI X2 Connect to contact B of X2 in parallel Block A Block B LDI X1 Load contact B of X1 OR Connect to contact A of X3 in parallel ANB Connect circuit block in series OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function ORB Parallel connection Multiple circuits Operand None Explanations To perform the OR calculation between the previous reserved logic results and contents of the accumulative register Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation xo x1 Block A LD Load contact A of XO at m Cu ANI x1 Connect to contact B of X1 in series ORB Block B LDI X2 Load contact B of X2 AND Connect to contact A of X3 in series ORB Connect circuit block in parallel OUT 1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function MPS Store the current result of the internal PLC operations Operand None Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 D 33 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Explanations To save contents of the accumulative register into the operation result the result operation pointer pluses 1 Mnemonic Function MRD Reads the current result of the internal PLC operations Operand None Explanations Reading content of the operat
278. n Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 230V 400V 1 220V 380V This parameter determines the base voltage for 50Hz When Pr 00 02 is set to 9 the base voltage for 50Hz will set by Pr 00 12 Related parameter Pr 00 02 Parameter Reset 4 44 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 1 Basic Parameters Maximum Output Frequency Fmax Unit 0 01 Settings 50 00 to 600 0 Hz Factory Setting 60 00 Ea This parameter determines the AC motor drive s Maximum Output Frequency All the AC motor drive frequency command sources analog inputs 0 to 10V and 4 to 20mA are scaled to correspond to the output frequency range Ea Please note that output frequency may be not in this setting range due to parameter setting 1 Pr 00 10 is set to 0 when enabling Pr 07 03 Slip Compensation in V f mode it may be not in this setting range 2 Pr 00 10 is set to 1 The AC motor drive will auto compensate slip in vector mode so it also may be not within this setting range Ea Related parameters 00 10 Control Method 04 12 Min AVI Frequency 04 14 Max AVI Frequency 04 16 Min ACI Frequency 04 18 Max ACI Frequency 04 19 ACI AVI2 Selection 04 21 Min AVI2 Frequency 04 23 Max AVI2 Frequency and 07 03 Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 0 Output Frequency 01 00 Max Output Frequency Analog Input OV AmA 10V 20mA Signal Maximum Voltage Frequency Fbase Motor 0
279. n Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix E CANopen Function Controller CANopen eroe i STE rror Display Error Description Error Code Code bit 0 7 cf 0020H Internal EEPROM not be read 5530h E r 0021H Analog signal error FFOOh 7 BEC Y 0023H Motor overheat protection 7120h 3 PLErR 0024H PG signal error 7300h 7 cP iQ 0029H Communication time out error on the 7500h 4 control board or power board Definition of Index ERE Factory T Index Sub Definition Setting R W Size Unit NOTE 0 1000 O Abort connection option code 0x00010192 RO Hes 0 1001 O Error register 0 RO U8 COB ID SYNC 0x1005 0 message 0x80 RW U32 ox1006 0 Communication cycle Rw U32 us 500us 15000us period 0 Manufacturer device 0x1008 0 name 0 RO U32 Manufacturer abad Rs hardware version 0 iind ic Manufacturer software 0x100A 0 versioni 0 RO U32 0 100 0 Guarding time 016 ms 0x80 node 1 0 1000 0 Guarding factor 0 RW U8 0x0000080 0x1014 0 COB ID emergency Node ID 032 It is set to be 0x1015 O Inhibit time EMCY 0 RW U16 100us multiple of 10 0 Number 0 1 RO U8 Heartbeat time can 0x1016 1 Consumer heartbeat oxo RW U32 1ms be used when time Guarding time is invalid Heartbeat time can 0x1017 0 Producer heartbeat 0x0 RW U16 1ms be used when ti
280. n Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 33 Chapter 4 Parameters Overheat Warning deceleration pause Acceleration deceleration Applications Purpose Functions When AC motor drive overheats it 03 00 03 01 Air conditioner Safety measure uses a thermal sensor to have 04 05 04 08 overheat warning Two wire three wire Applications Purpose Functions 2 02 00 FWDISTOP 9 wr teres REV STOP ooe MA LOSE REV 02 09 DEM 04 04 t RUNISTOR e MELOS RUN edi orward an so MI2 OPEN FWD General application reverse by external PAREY REV terminals DEM 3 wire ien MI1 CLOSE RUN eT MI3 OPEN STOP 2 FWD REV FWD CLOSE REV DCM Operation Command Applications Purpose Functions T Selecting the Selection of AC motor drive control by 02 01 General application source of control external terminals digital keypad or 04 05 04 08 signal RS485 Frequency Hold Applications Purpose Functions our General application Acceleration Hold output frequency during 04 05 04 08 4 34 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Auto Restart after Fault Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters us continuous and The AC motor drive can be Bo ISTORIG Air conditioners reliable ope
281. nal Circuit 2 17 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring The position of the control terminals RA RB RC AFM MCM MO1 ggo RS 485 MI1 MI2 Ml4 MI5 MI6 DCM DCM 24V ACM AVI ACI 10V Terminal symbols and functions Factory Settings NPN mode ON Connect to DCM Terminal Symbol Terminal Function ON Run in MI1 direction MI1 Forward Stop command OFF Stop acc to Stop Method ON Run in MI2 direction MI2 Reverse Stop command OFF Stop acc to Stop Method MI3 Multi function Input 3 Refer to Pr 04 05 to Pr 04 08 for programming the MI4 Multi function Input 4 Multi function Inputs MI5 Multi function Input 5 ON the activation current is 16mA OFF leakage current tolerance is 10 A MIG Multi function Input 6 24V DC Voltage Source 24VDC 20mA used for PNP mode Common for digital inputs and used for NPN DCM Digital Signal Common mode Multi function Relay output Resistive Load N O a 5A N O 3A N C 240VAC 5A N O 3A N C 24VDC Multi function Relay output Inductive Load RB N C b 1 5A N O 0 5A N C 240VAC 1 5A N O 0 5A N C 24VDC Refer to Pr 03 00 for programming RC Multi function Relay common 2 18 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Terminal z Factory Settings NPN mode Terminal Function Symbol ON Connect to DCM Maximu
282. nals MI3 to MI9 to 23 RUN STOP PLC it will display PLC1 for executing PLC when the terminal is ON It will display PLCO to stop PLC program when terminals are OFF When external terminals are set to 23 and the terminal is ON it cannot use keypad to change PLC mode Moreover when it is PLC2 you cannot execute PLC program by external terminals D 2 Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function gt When power on after power off the PLC status will be in PLC1 Warning AN This RUN instruction will affect the state of the connected PLC Do you wish to continue No 4 When you in PLC2 please remember to change to PLC1 when finished to prevent anyone modifying PLC program gt When output input terminals MI1 MI9 Relay1 Relay 4 MO1 MOA are used in PLC program they cannot be used in other places For example When YO in PLC program is activated the corresponding output terminals Relay RA RB RC will be used At this moment parameter 03 00 setting will be invalid Because the terminal has been used by PLC gt The PLC corresponding input points for MI1 to MI6 are to X5 When extension card are added the extension input points will be numbered from X06 and output points will start from Y2 as shown in chapter D 2 2 D 2 2 Device Reference Table Device ID 0 1 To T
283. ncrease the deceleration time 2 used with a brake resistor refer to appendix B for details to consume the regenerative energy by heat Related parameters Pr 01 10 Decel Time 1 Pr 01 12 Decel Time 2 Pr 03 00 Multi function Output Relay RA1 RB1 RC1 and Pr 03 01 Multi function Output Terminal MO1 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 107 Chapter 4 Parameters high voltage at DC side over voltage gt detection level a X oZ output Time frequency frequency Held e Deceleration characteristic when over voltage stall prevention enabled Time previous deceleration time actual time to decelerate to stop when over voltage stall prevention is enabled Stall Prevention during Acceleration Unit 1 Settings 20 to 25096 Factory Setting 170 0 disable A setting of 100 is equal to the Rated Output Current of the drive During acceleration the AC drive output current may increase abruptly and exceed the value specified by Pr 06 01 due to rapid acceleration or excessive load on the motor When this function is enabled the AC drive will stop accelerating and keep the output frequency constant until the current drops below the maximum value B D When it stalls due to the small motor power or operate with factory setting please decrease the setting of Pr 06 01 When the acceleration time is obstruction in the application it is not
284. ng machines and other power equipment Connect a noise filter at the mains input terminal of the AC motor drive to filter noise from the power circuit In short solutions for electromagnetic noise exist of no product disconnect disturbing equipment no spread limit emission for disturbing equipment and no receive enhance immunity 5 14 Environmental Condition Since the AC motor drive is an electronic device you should comply with the environmental conditions Here are some remedial measures if necessary 1 To prevent vibration the use of anti vibration dampers is the last choice Vibrations must be within the specification Vibration causes mechanical stress and it should not occur frequently continuously or repeatedly to prevent damage to the AC motor drive Store the AC motor drive in a clean and dry location free from corrosive fumes dust to prevent corrosion and poor contacts Poor insulation in a humid location can cause short circuits If necessary install the AC motor drive in a dust proof and painted enclosure and in particular situations use a completely sealed enclosure The ambient temperature should be within the specification Too high or too low temperature will affect the lifetime and reliability For semiconductor components damage will occur once any specification is out of range Therefore it is necessary to periodically check air quality and the cooling fan and provide extra cooling of necessary
285. nge Check for abnormal load in motor Check for correct wiring of input power to R S T for 3 phase models without phase loss Check whether the motor is overloaded Reduce torque compensation setting in Pr 07 02 Use the next higher power AC motor drive model Check for possible motor overload Check electronic thermal overload setting Use a higher power motor Reduce the current level so that the drive output current does not exceed the value set by the Motor Rated Current Pr 07 00 Reduce the motor load Adjust the over torque detection setting to an appropriate setting Pr 06 03 to Pr 06 05 Return to the factory When the external input terminal B B is active the AC motor drive output will be turned off Deactivate the external input terminal B B to operate the AC motor drive again Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance Fault Fault Descriptions Name Over current during acceleration Over current during deceleration Over current during constant speed operation cc cf External Fault c F ig Internal EEPROM can not be programmed 1 Internal EEPROM can not be programmed c 7 5 Internal EEPROM can not be 2 3 1 Internal EEPROM can not be cre read c F 30 U phase error TH c E 32 W phase error 33 OVortv erg a Temperature sensor error ef 35 Correcti
286. ngle data to register Example writing data 6000 1770H to register 0100H AMD address is 01H ASCII mode Command message Response message STX bi STX s 0 T Address Ww Address Ww Function v Function T 4 144 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Command message Chapter 4 Parameters Response message oO Data address v T T Data content T 0 T LRC Check T CR END LF RTU mode Command message Address 01H Function 06H 01H Data address 00H 17H Data content 70H CRC CHK Low EEH CRC CHK High 1FH oO Data address v ZE 7 Data content T T T LRC Check T CR END LF Response message Address 01H Function 06H 01H Data address 00H 17H Data content 70H CRC CHK Low EEH CRC CHK High 3 08H loop detection This command is used to detect if the communication between master device PC or PLC and AC motor drive is normal The AC motor drive will send the received message to the master device ASCII mode Response message Command message STX id Address s T Function g T T Data address Oo ZE T Data content T 0 T LRC Check T
287. normally open contact X1 On stop 1 2 normally contact X2 Off and Y1 On coil Y1 will START STOP Y1 be active and latching are valid at the same time if X2 0n coil Y1 will be active due to latched contact Therefore it calls priority of start Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 D 13 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Example 3 the latching circuit of SET and RST commands The figure at the right side is latching circuit that made up of RST and SET command SET Y1 It is top priority of stop when RST command is set X2 behind SET command When executing PLC from up mw to down The coil Y1 is ON and coil Y1 will be OFF when X1 and X2 act at the same time therefore it calls Top priority of start priority of stop x2 N Y1 It is top priority of start when SET command is set after x1 RST command When X1 and X2 act at the same SET Y time Y1 is ON so it calls top priority of start The common control circuit Example 4 condition control 1 1 0 M x2 X4 Y1 Y2 4 X1 and X3 can start stop Y1 separately X2 and X4 can start stop Y2 separately and they are all self latched circuit Y1 is an element for Y2 to do AND function due to the normally open contact connects to Y2 in series Therefore Y1 is the input of Y2 and Y2 is also the input of Y1 D 14 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW
288. ns module communication is abnormal 3 Network Green LED means DeviceNet communication is normal Red LED means abnormal Refer to user manual for detail information Chapter 5 Troubleshooting Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 B 29 Appendix B Accessories B 10 2 LonWorks Communication Module CME LW01 B 10 2 1 Introduction Device CME LW01 is used for communication interface between Modbus and LonTalk CME LW01 needs be configured via LonWorks network tool first so that it can perform the function on LonWorks network No need to set CME LWO1 address This manual provides instructions for the installation and setup for CME LWO1 that is used to communicate with Delta VFD E firmware version of VFD E should conform with CME LW01 according to the table below via LonWorks Network B 10 2 2 Dimensions 72 2 2 84 59 7 2 35 ri 57 3 2 26 34 8 1 37 3 5 0 14 1 LP UNIT mm inch B 10 2 3 Specifications Power supply 16 30VDC 750mW Communication Modbus in ASCII format protocol 9600 7 N 2 LonTalk free topology with FTT 10A 78 Kbps LonTalk terminal 4 pin terminals wire gauge 28 12 AWG wire strip length 7 8mm RS 485 port 8 pins with RJ 45 B 30 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix B Accessories B 10 2 4 Wiring Service LED Service Pin PowerLED SPLED sp 1 Reserved 5 SG 2 EV 6 Reserved
289. nt it may cause motor overheat and damage motor or trigger the over current protection Please note that unsuitable setting may cause insufficient motor torque When it is vector control the settings of Pr 01 03 Pr 01 04 and Pr 01 06 are invalid This setting must be greater than Pr 01 05 Related parameters Pr 01 01 Maximum Voltage Frequency Fbase Motor 0 Pr 01 02 Maximum Output Voltage Vmax Motor 0 Pr 01 04 Mid Point Voltage Vmid Motor 0 Pr 01 05 Minimum Output Frequency Fmin Motor 0 and Pr 01 06 Minimum Output Voltage Vmin Motor 0 Mid Point Voltage Vmid Motor 0 Unit 0 1 Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory Setting 10 0 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 20 0 This parameter sets the Mid Point Voltage of any V f curve With this setting the V f ratio between Minimum Frequency and Mid Point Frequency can be determined This parameter must be equal to or greater than Minimum Output Voltage Pr 01 06 Related parameters Pr 01 01 Maximum Voltage Frequency Fbase Motor 0 Pr 01 02 Maximum Output Voltage Vmax Motor 0 Pr 01 03 Mid Point Frequency Fmid Motor 0 Pr 01 05 Minimum Output Frequency Fmin Motor 0 and Pr 01 06 Minimum Output Voltage Vmin Motor 0 Minimum Output Frequency Fmin Motor 0 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 1 50 En This parameter sets the Minimum Output Frequency of the AC motor dri
290. o 8 bit address consists of 2 ASCII codes Function Hi Command code Function Lo 8 bit command consists of 2 ASCII codes DATA n 1 Contents of data to Nx8 bit data consist of 2n ASCII codes DATA 0 n lt 20 maximum of 40 ASCII codes 4 142 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters LRC CHK Hi LRC check sum LRC CHK Lo 8 bit check sum consists of 2 ASCII codes END Hi End characters END Lo END1 CR 0DH ENDO LF 0AH RTU mode START A silent interval of more than 10 ms Address Communication address 8 bit address Function Command code 8 bit command DATA n 1 Contents of data to nx8 bit data lt 40 20 x 16 bit data DATA 0 CRC CHK Low CRC check sum CRC CHK High 16 bit check sum consists of 2 8 bit characters END A silent interval of more than 10 ms 3 2 Address Communication Address Valid communication addresses are in the range of 0 to 254 A communication address equal to 0 means broadcast to all AC drives AMD In this case the AMD will not reply any message to the master device OOH broadcast to all AC drives 01H AC drive of address 01 OFH AC drive of address 15 10H AC drive of address 16 FEH AC drive of address 254 For example communication to AMD with address 16 decimal 10H ASCII mode Address 1 0 gt 1 31H 0 30H RTU mode Address 10H 3 3 Function Function code and DATA
291. o limit the output current of the AC motor drive to prevent motor from overheating or damage Setting 0 the electronic thermal relay is used for standard motor heatsink is fixed on rotor shaft When operating in low speed the motor heat dissipation function will be bad Thus it needs to decrease the action time of the electronic thermal relay to ensure the motor life Setting 1 the electron thermal relay is used for special motor heatsink uses independent power The heat dissipation function has no direction relation with rotation speed Thus the electronic thermal relay is still held in low speed to ensure the motor load ability in low speed In the frequent power ON OFF applications it can t use this parameter even set 0 or 1 for protection due to this function will be reset once the power is OFF Thus it needs to add the thermal relay on each motor when an AC motor drive is connected with several motors Setting 0 or 1 when the electronic thermal relay protection is enabled in low speed operation the AC motor drive will display OL 1 and free run to stop It needs to press RESET to clear the warning message Related parameter Pr 06 07 Electronic Thermal Characteristic x S x 8100 S 100 o 2 80 80 5 60 60 40 40 9 2 20 5 20 5 2 z 25 50 75 100 125 150 2 25 50
292. oad A contact X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 TO 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand v Y Y Y Explanations The LD command is used on the A contact that has its start from the left BUS or the A contact that is the start of a contact circuit Function of the command is to save present contents and at the same time save the acquired contact status into the accumulative register Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation X1 LD X0 Load contact A of XO H miem r gt AND 1 Connect to contact A of X1 in series OUT 1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function LDI Load B contact X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand Y v Y 2 Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 D 29 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Explanations The LDI command is used on the B contact that has its start from the left BUS or the B contact that is the start of a contact circuit Function of the command is to save present contents and at the same time save the acquired contact status into the accumulative register Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation Xo 1 79 LDI Load contact B of AND X1 Connect to contact A of X1 in series OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function AND Series connection A contact X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand Y v Y Y Y Explanations The
293. odels of VFD E Series VFD002E11A 21A VFD004E11A 21A VFD007E21A VFD002E11C 21C VFD004E11C 21C VFD007E21C VFD002E11P 21P VFD004E11P 21P VFD007E21P Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring brake resistor optional BR l t BUE brake unit optional Fuse NFB None Fuse Breaker R L1 R L1 S L2 S L2 Recommended Circuit when power supply OE is turned OFF bya fault output l SA If the fault occurs the Y MC RB contact will be ON to turn off the power and t RC protect the power system ON Factory setting NPN Mode NPN i swt PNP Please refer to Figure7 for wiring of NPN mode and PNP mode setting Factory setting ACI Mode ACI AVI switch When switching to AVI it indicates AVI2 Factory MC e FWD Stop REV Stop Multi step 1 Multi step 2 p3 Multi step 3 Multi step 4 Digital Signal Common Lo 5KO Analog Signal Common T Main circuit power terminals Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 10V Power supply 10V 20mA AVI ACI ACM E Master Frequency Oto 10V 47K 9 4 20mA 0 10V AFM ACM Control circuit terminals Multi function contact output Refer to chapter 2 4 for details Factory setting is malfunction indication Factory setting Driveis in operation 48V50mA Max Multi function Photocoulper Output Analog Multi func
294. on due to noise Please contact DELTA GFF Is output circuit cable or motor of AC motor drive grounded ves Remove ground fault Ground fault 5 3 Over Voltage OV Over voltage Reduce voltage to No Is voltage within be within spec specification Yes x Yes Has over voltage occurred without load 5 3 3 Maybe AC motor drive No has malfunction or Y misoperation due to No When OV occurs check if the noise Please contact 4 voltage of DC BUS is greater DELTA than protection value js Yes Vv No Dose OV occur when Increase sudden acceleration deceleration stops time Yes No Increase Yes acceleration Increase setting time time No Y Need to consider using Reduce moment No m brake unit or of inertia Reduce moment of load inertia DC brake ns Use brake unit or DC brake p _ 5s Need to check control method Please contact DELTA 5 2 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 5 4 Low Voltage Lv Low voltage v Is input power correct Or power cut Yes including momentary power loss 4 Restart afterreset No Check if there is any malfunction yes Change defective component component or disconnection in andicheck connection power
295. on Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 91 Chapter 4 Parameters Settings Function Description Parameter value 14 programs one of the Multi function Input Terminals MI3 MI6 Pr 04 05 Pr 04 08 to be External Fault E F inputs voltage frequency setting frequency 14 External Fault Time Mlx GND ON OFF Reset ON OFF operation ON command PID function When an input ON with this setting is ON the PID function will be disabled disabled AC motor drive will stop output and the motor free run if one of these settings is enabled If the status of terminal is changed AC motor drive will restart from OHz voltage frequency setting 16 Output Shutoff Stop frequency a Time MIx GND ON OFF ON operation ON command i Parameter lock When this setting is enabled all parameters will be locked and enable write parameters is disabled 4 92 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Settings Function Description Operation ON Operation command via Ext Terminals Command OFF Operation command via Pr 02 01 setting 18 Selection Pr 02 01 setting external When the settings 18 19 and 20 are ON at the same time the terminals priority should be setting 18 gt setting19 gt setting20 Operation ON Operation command via Digital Keypad Command OFF Operation command via Pr 02 01 setting 19 Selection Pr 02 01
296. on status is not changed even if operation command source Pr 02 01 is changed 1 Enable Operation status is not changed even if operation command source Pr 02 01 is changed Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 47 pem 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Factory Customer Setting Loss of ACI Signal 0200 4 20mA Up Down Mode Accel Decel Rate of Change of 02 08 UP DOWN Operation with Constant Speed Source of Second 02 09 Frequency Command Combination of the First and Second 0210 Master Frequency Command 402 11 Keypad Frequency 0 00 to 600 0Hz 60 00 Command Communication 02 12 Frequency Command 4 8 2 Disable Operation status will change if operation command source Pr 02 01 is changed 3 Enable Operation status will change if operation command source Pr 02 01 is changed 0 Decelerate to 0 Hz 1 Coast to stop and display AErr 1 2 Continue operation by last frequency command 0 by UP DOWN Key 1 Based on accel decel time 2 Constant speed Pr 02 08 3 Pulse input unit Pr 02 08 s m 0 Digital keypad UP DOWN keys or Multi function Inputs UP DOWN Last used frequency saved 1 0 to 10V from AVI 2 4 to 20mA from ACI or 0 to 10V from AVI2 3 RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication 4 Digital keypad potentiometer 5 CANopen communication 0 First Master Frequency Command 1 First Master Frequency Command Second Master Frequency Command 2 Fi
297. ons SPWM Sinusoidal Pulse Width Modulation control V f or sensorless vector control 0 01Hz 0 01Hz Including the auto torque auto slip compensation starting torque can be 15096 at 3 0Hz 150 of rated current for 1 minute Three zones setting range 0 1 600Hz 0 1 to 600 seconds 2 Independent settings for Accel Decel time Setting 20 to 25096 of rated current Operation frequency 0 1 600 0Hz output 0 100 rated current Start time 0 60 seconds stop time 0 60 seconds Approx 2096 up to 12596 possible with optional brake resistor or externally mounted brake unit 1 15hp 0 75 11kW models have brake chopper built in 4 point adjustable V f pattern Setting by A Y Potentiometer 5kQ 0 5W 0 to 10VDC 4 to 20mA RS 485 interface Multi function Inputs 3 to 9 15 steps Jog up down Set by RUN and STOP 2 wires 3 wires MI1 MI2 MI3 JOG operation RS 485 serial interface MODBUS programmable logic controller Multi step selection 0 to 15 Jog accel decel inhibit 2 accel decel switches counter external Base Block ACI AVI selections driver reset UP DOWN key settings NPN PNP input selection Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix A Specifications General Specifications AC drive operating frequency attained zero speed Base Block fault Multi function Output Indication indication overheat alarm emergency stop and status selections of input terminals Analog Output Signal Output f
298. ontact to prevent resistor over load Use the contact to Switch power off to the AC motor drive When using more than 2 brake units equivalent resistor value of parallel brake unit can t be less than the value in the column Minimum Equivalent Resistor Value for Each AC Drive the right most column in the table Please read the wiring information in the user manual of the brake unit thoroughly prior to installation and operation When using with the brake resistor or brake unit it needs to disable over voltage stall prevention function set Pr 06 00 to 0 It is recommended to disable AVR auto voltage regulation function set Pr 08 18 to 1 Definition for Brake Usage ED Explanation The definition of the barking usage ED is for assurance of enough time for the brake unit and brake resistor to dissipate away heat generated by braking When the brake resistor heats up the resistance would increase with temperature and brake torque would decrease accordingly Suggested cycle time is one minute 100 ED 1 70 100 Cycle Time For safety reasons install a thermal overload relay between brake unit and brake resistor Together with the magnetic contactor MC in the mains supply circuit to the drive it offers protection in case of any malfunctioning The purpose of installing the thermal overload relay is to protect the brake resistor against damage due to frequent brake or in case the br
299. otor 3 2to 10 Group 8 Special Parameters Parameter 08 00 Factory Bicis Setting Customer DC Brake Current Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 21 Chapter 4 Parameters ME Setting anii Setting DC Brake Time DC Brake Time Start Point for DC Brake 0 00 to 600 0Hz 0 Operation stops after momentary power loss Momentary Power 1 Operation continues after momentary Loss Operation power loss speed search starts with the Selection Last Frequency 2 Operation continues after momentary power loss speed search starts with the minimum frequency 08 05 Maximum Allowable 9 4 to 20 0 sec 2 0 Power Loss Time 0 Disable speed search pare plosk Speed 4 Speed search starts with last frequency 1 2 Starts with minimum output frequency 08 07 B B Time for Speed 9 4 to 5 0 sec 0 5 Search Current Limit for 08 09 Skip Frequency 1 9 99 to 600 0 Hz Upper Limit 08 10 Skip Frequency 1 99 to 600 0 Hz EAE Lower Limit Skip Frequency 2 08 11 Upper Limit 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0812 S9KpFrequency2 9 49 to 600 0 Hz Lower Limit 08 13 Skip Frequency 3 o 99 to 600 0 Hz Upper Limit 0 00 0 Skip Frequency 3 oa Lower Limit 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 08 15 Auto Restart After to 10 0 disable Fault 4 22 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Factory 08 16 Auto Reset Time at 0 1 to 6000 sec Restart aft
300. otor D O L Direct On Line a lower starting torque output with AC Motor Drive can be expected If higher starting torque is required such as for elevators mixers tooling machines etc use an AC Motor Drive of higher capacity or increase the capacities for both the motor and the AC Motor Drive When an error occurs on the drive a protective circuit will be activated and the AC Motor Drive output is turned off Then the motor will coast to stop For an emergency stop an external mechanical brake is needed to quickly stop the motor Parameter Settings Note C4 1 The AC Motor Drive can be driven at an output frequency up to 400Hz less for some models with the digital keypad Setting errors may create a dangerous situation For safety the use of the upper limit frequency function is strongly recommended High DC brake operating voltages and long operation time at low frequencies may cause overheating of the motor In that case forced external motor cooling is recommended Motor accel decel time is determined by motor rated torque load torque and load inertia If the stall prevention function is activated the accel decel time is automatically extended to a length that the AC Motor Drive can handle If the motor needs to decelerate within a certain time with high load inertia that can t be handled by the AC Motor Drive in the Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor D
301. otor is 08 04 08 08 machine fan and all running motor completely stopped it can be restarted inertia loads without detection of motor speed The AC motor drive will auto search motor speed and will accelerate when its speed is the same as the motor speed DC Brake before Running Applications Purpose Functions Piso When e g windmills Keep the free If the running direction of the free 08 00 fans and pumps rotate running motor at running motor is not steady please 08 01 freely by wind orflow standstill execute DC brake before start up without applying power Energy Saving Applications Purpose Functions Bici Punching machines Energy saving and Energy saving when the AC motor 08 17 fans pumps and less vibrations drive runs at constant speed yet full precision machinery power acceleration and deceleration For precision machinery it also helps to lower vibrations Multi step Operation Applications Purpose Functions Conveying machinery operation by To control 15 step speeds and duration 04 05 04 10 ying y multi step speeds by simple contact signals 05 00 05 14 Switching acceleration and deceleration times Applications Purpose Functions Switching When an AC motor drive drives two or Auto turntable for acceleration and 04 05 04 08 conveying machinery deceleration times by external signal more motors it can reach high speed but still start and stop smoothly Revisio
302. owing method 1 if the output current exceeds the over torque detection level Pr 06 04 and the detection time is longer than the setting of Pr 06 05 Over Torque Detection Time the warning message OL2 is displayed on digital keypad optional It needs to press RESET to clear the warning message 2 If a Multi function Output Terminal is set to over torque detection Pr 03 00 03 01 04 the output is on Please refer to Pr 03 00 03 01 for details 4 110 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Ea Setting 1 or 2 it is used to detect with constant speed For setting 2 it will free run to stop after over torque is detected Ea Setting 3 or 4 it is used to detect during acceleration For setting 4 it will free run to stop after over torque is detected Ea Related parameters Pr 03 00 Multi function Output Relay RA1 RB1 RC1 Pr 03 01 Multi function Output Terminal MO1 Pr 06 01 Over Current Stall Prevention during Accel Pr 06 02 Over Current Stall Prevention during Operation Pr 06 04 Over Torque Detection Level and Pr 06 05 Over Torque Detection Time JE w Over Torque Detection Level OL2 Unit 1 Settings 10 to 200 Factory Setting 150 Over Torque Detection Time OL2 Unit 0 1 Settings 0 1 to 60 0 sec Factory Setting 0 1 Ea Pr 06 04 is proportional to the Rated Output Current of the drive Ea Pr 06 05 sets the time for how long over torque must be detected before OL2 is d
303. per Output Please refer to Figure 7 4 Multi step 3 MI5 MCM 4 for wiring ie Multi step 4 o MI6 AFM Analog Multi function Output Digital Signal Common 3 Terminal mode 9 9 DCM factory setting Analog freq tA EC ACM current meter 0 10VDC 2mA E Analog Signal common Factory setting output frequency RS 485 serial interface Factory setting 10V 20mA NOT for VFD E C models ACI Mode J4 AV 1 Reserved AVI Master Frequency 2 EV 1 Oto 10V 47K 2 S GND ACI ACI AVI switch 4 20mA 0 10V 6 Reserved When switching to AVI tL YY ACM 8 4 7 Reserved It indicates AVI2 Analog Signal Common T E 8 Reserved For VFD E C models please referto figure 8 Main circuit power terminals 24 Control circuit terminals Shielded leads amp Cable Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Figure 3 for models of VFD E Series Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring VFD007E11A VFD015E21A VFD022E21A VFD007E11C VFD015E21C VFD022E21C Fuse NFB No Fuse Breaker R L1 S L2 Recommended Circuit when power supply is turned OFF bya fault output If the fault occurs the contact will be ON to MC iturn off the power and protect the power system OFF ON e FWD Stop Factory setting e REV Stop NPN Factory Multi step 1 1 fe setting Multi step 2 PNP i Please refer to Figure 7 e Multi step 3
304. ponents or the circuit boards with metal objects or your bare hands 3 Only qualified persons are allowed to install wire and maintain AC motor drives 1 Some parameters settings can cause the motor to run immediately after applying power 2 DO NOT install the AC motor drive in a place subjected to high temperature direct sunlight high humidity excessive vibration corrosive gases or liquids or airborne dust or metallic particles 3 Only use AC motor drives within specification Failure to comply may result in fire explosion or electric shock 4 To prevent personal injury please keep children and unqualified people away from the equipment 5 When the motor cable between AC motor drive and motor is too long the layer insulation of the motor may be damaged Please use a frequency inverter duty motor or add an AC output reactor to prevent damage to the motor Refer to appendix B Reactor for details 6 Therated voltage for AC motor drive must be x 240V x 480V for 460V models and the short circuit must be lt 5000A RMS x10000A RMS for the gt 40hp 30kW models DeviceNet is a registered trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association Inc Lonwork is a registered trademark of Echelon Corporation Profibus is a registered trademark of Profibus International CANopen is a registered trademark of CAN in Automation CiA Other trademarks belong to their respective owners Table of Contents
305. poof Percentage Max AVI3 Input 12 05 Max AVIS Scale 9 9 to 100 0 100 0 a Percentage 42 06 Min ACI2 Input 0 0 to 20 0mA pao Current 12 07 Min ACI2 Scale 0 0 to 100 0 poo Percentage Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 29 Chapter 4 Parameters Setting 20 0 Max ACI2 Scale 12 09 0 0 to 100 096 100 0 0 Disabled Source of the 1st frequency Al2 Function Source of the 2nd frequency Selection PID Set Point PID enable Positive PID feedback Negative PID feedback 1208 Max ACI2 Input 0 0 to 20 0mA Current i 12 12 Min Input 0 0 to 10 0V Voltage 42 143 Min Scale 0 0 to 100 0 Percentage 12 144 Input 0 0 to 10 0V 10 Voltage Max AVI4 Scale 12 15 Percentage 0 0 to 100 0 100 0 12 16 Min ACI3 Input 0 0 to 20 0mA Current 12 17 Mn ACI3 Scale 0 0 to 100 0 wf Percentage 12 148 Max ACIS Input 0 0 to 20 0mA 20 Current 1249 Max Scale 9 9 to 100 0 100 0 0 AVO1 AO1 Terminal Analog Signal Mode 1 1 analog current 0 0 to 20 0mA 2 1 analog current 4 0 to 20 0mA AO1 Analog Output 0 Analog Frequency Signal 1 Analog Current 0 to 250 rated current 1222 A91 Analog Output 4 to 200 4 30 Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 AI2 Analog Signal 0 ACI3 analog current 0 0 20 0mA Mode 1 analog voltage 0 0 10 0V Chapter 4
306. power Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 5 9 Motor cannot Run Motor cannot run Reset after clearing fault and then RUN Check KPE LE02 for normal display Yes if there is any fault code displayed It can run when no faults occur Press RUN key to check if it can run Press UP key to setfrequency ves N Nor REV command Check if non fuse breaker and magnetic contactor are ON No Set them to ON Yes Y Check if any faults Check if input occur such as voltage is normal Lv PHL or disconnection Yes Y Input RUN command 5 Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise Please contact DELTA by keypad Check if input FWD No Y Press UP to check if motor Yes can run 4 Set frequency or not Modify frequency N Yes setting if upper bound freq supe and setting freq is lower than the min output freq No Motor has malfunction Check if the setting oftorque compensation is correct Check if there is any output voltage from terminals U V and No Check if the wiring of terminal FWD and between REV DCM is correct Yes Change switch or relay Correct connection IN o
307. put Voltage Pr 01 02 For instance if Pr 01 02 is set at 200 VAC and the input voltage is at 200V to 264VAC then the Maximum Output Voltage will automatically be reduced to a maximum of 200VAC Setting 0 when AVR function is enabled the drive will calculate the output voltage by actual DC bus voltage The output voltage won t be changed by DC bus voltage Setting 1 when AVR function is disabled the drive will calculate the output voltage by DC bus voltage The output voltage will be changed by DC bus voltage It may cause insufficient over current M Setting 2 the drive will disable the AVR during deceleration such as operated from high speed to low speed Setting 3 the drive will disable the AVR function at stop to accelerate the brake When the motor ramps to stop the deceleration time is longer When setting this parameter to 2 with auto acceleration deceleration the deceleration will be quicker co Related parameter Pr 01 16 Auto acceleration deceleration refer to Accel Decel time setting Software Brake Level Unit 0 1 the Action Level of the Brake resistor Settings 115 230V series 370 0 to 430 0V Factory Setting 380 0 460V series 740 0 to 860 0V Factory Setting 760 0 4 134 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Ea This parameter sets the DC bus voltage at which the brake chopper is activated Users can
308. put coil Y1 is square wave of a period 2T D 16 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Example 10 Delay Circuit T10 Cr vat LL _ 4 1 0 1 100 When input is ON output coil Y1 will be ON at the same time due to the corresponding normally close contact OFF makes timer T10 to be OFF Output coil Y1 will be OFF after delaying 100 seconds K1000 0 1 seconds 7100 seconds once input is OFF and T10 is ON Please refer to timing chart above Example 11 Output delay circuit in the following example the circuit is made up of two timers No matter input XO is ON or OFF output Y4 will be delay m r T5 T6 D T5 YA Tr 5 seconds gt l I 3 seconds Example12 Extend Timer Circuit In this circuit the total delay time from input T11 Kn1 km is close and output Y1 is ON 1 2 T T11 where T is clock period T12 v xo T11 T12 Y1 Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 D 17 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function D 4 PLC Devices D 4 1 Summary of DVP PLC Device Number Items Specifications Remarks Control Method Stored program cyclic scan system Processing Method Batch processing when END instruction is executed refresh instruction is available Execution Speed Basic commands minimum 0 24 us
309. r 4 Parameters This parameter allows the user to reset all parameters to the factory settings except the fault records Pr 06 08 Pr 06 12 50Hz Pr 01 00 and Pr 01 01 are set to 50Hz and Pr 01 02 will be set by Pr 00 12 60Hz Pr 01 00 and Pr 01 01 are set to 60Hz and 01 02 is set to 115V 230V 460V When Pr 00 02 1 all parameters are read only To write all parameters set Pr 00 02 0 When Pr 00 02 6 it clears all PLC program But this function is NOT for VFD E C models When the parameter settings are abnormal all parameters can be reset to factory setting by setting Pr 00 02 to 9 or 10 When Pr 00 02 9 all parameters are reset to factory setting for 50Hz users and voltage will be different by Pr 00 12 setting When Pr 00 02 10 all parameters are reset to factory setting for 60Hz users Related parameter Pr 00 12 50Hz Base Voltage Selection me When Pr 00 02 9 or 10 all parameter are reset to factory setting but it doesn t clear all PLC program Only Pr 00 02 6 can clear all PLC program 00 03 X Start up Display Selection Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Display the frequency command value Fxxx 1 Display the actual output frequency Hxxx e505 2 Display the output current in A supplied to the motor 25 3 Display the content of user defined unit Uxxx 4 FWD REV command 5 PLCx PLC selections PLCO PLC1 PLC2 NOT for VFD E C models En This parameter determines the st
310. r to Appendix B for details When using without this optional keypad the FAULT LED will be ON once there is error messages or warning messages from the external terminals EH Over the PID Detection Value Unit 0 1 0 0 to 10 0 Settings Factory Setting 1 0 Ea This is the gain adjustment over the feedback detection value Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 163 Chapter 4 Parameters This parameter will affect Pr 00 04 setting 5 directly That is Pr 00 04 setting 5 Display PID analog feedback signal value b PID detection value X Gain Over the PID Detection Value Related parameters Pr 00 04 Content of Multi function Display and Pr 10 01 Input Terminal for PID Feedback PID Offset Level Unit 0 1 Settings 1 0 to 50 096 Factory Setting 10 0 This parameter is used to set max allowable value of PID error Detection Time of PID Offset Unit 0 1 Settings 0 1 to 300 0 sec Factory Setting 5 0 M This parameter is used to set detection of the offset between set point and feedback M When the offset is higher than the setting of Pr 10 12 for a time exceeding the setting of Pr 10 13 PID feedback signal fault occurs and operates by the treatment set in Pr 10 09 M Related parameters Pr 10 00 PID Set Point Selection Pr 10 01 Input Terminal for PID Feedback Pr 10 09 Treatment of the Erroneous PID Feedback Signals and Pr 10 12 PID Offse
311. ration command selection keypad 20 Operation command selection communication 21 FWD REV command 22 Source of second frequency command 23 Quick Stop Only for VFD E C models 24 Download execute monitor PLC Program PLC2 NOT for VFD E C models 25 Simple position function 26 OOB Out of Balance Detection 4 184 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Factory Customer Setting 27 Motor selection bit 0 28 Motor selection bit 1 Group 7 Motor Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Customer Setting Torque 07 08 Compensation Time 0 01 10 00 Sec 0 30 Constant Group 9 Communication Parameters Factory 09 12 09 19 CANopen 0 disable 09 20 Communication 1 peius 1 1 to 127 CANbus Baud Rate DE Reserved Gain of CANbus 00 2 00 CANopen Guarding Time out it 1 CANopen Heartbeat Time out it 2 CANopen SYNC Time out it 3 CANopen SDO Time out Read ORA enn it 4 CANopen SDO buffer overflow only it 5 CANbus Off it 6 Error protocol of CANopen it 7 CANopen boot up fault Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 185 Chapter 4 Parameters Factory 0 Disable By Delta rule 1 Enable By DS402 09 24 DS402 Protocol Group 11 Parameters for Extension Card Parameter Explanation Factory Customer Setting No function Multi function Input A 11 06 Terminal MI7
312. ration restarted reset automatically up to 10 remote pumps without operator y up gt times after a fault occurs intervention Emergency Stop by DC Brake 03 Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters AC motor drive can use DC brake for 08 00 Emergency stop emergency stop when quick stop is 08 02 High speed rotors without brake needed without brake resistor When 08 03 resistor used often take motor cooling into consideration Over torque Setting A Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters The over torque detection level be 06 00 06 05 set Once stall OV stall and over To protect Pumps fans and machines and to forque 9005 output frequency extruders have cantin ous will be adjusted automatically It is suitable for machines like fans and reliable operation pumps that require continuous operation Upper Lower Limit Frequency y Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters Control the motor When user cannot provide 01 07 me upper lower limit gain or bias from 01 08 Pump and fan speed within signal i b upper lower limit externa signa it can be set individually in AC motor drive Skip Frequency Setting Applications Purpose Functions Moses The AC motor drive cannot run at 08 09 08 14 Pumps and fans To prevent constant speed in the skip frequency machine vibrations range Three skip frequency ranges can be set Rev
313. re used to select one of the AC motor drive Multi step speeds max 15 speeds The speeds frequencies are determined by Pr 05 00 to 05 14 as shown in the following keypad communication via Pr 02 01 The operation time of multi step speeds be set by PLC program E The run stop command can be controlled by the external terminal digital Ea Each one of multi step speeds can be set within 0 0 600 0Hz during operation Ea These parameters can be applied in small machinery food processing machinery washing equipment to control the operation procedure It can be used instead of traditional circuit such as relay switch or counter E Explanation for the timing diagram for multi step speeds and external terminals The Related parameter settings are 1 Pr 05 00 05 14 setting multi step speeds to set the frequency of each step speed 2 Pr 04 05 04 08 setting multi function input terminals multi step speed 1 4 3 The repeat operation setting of 1st 15th step speed frequency can use PLC program to control Please refer to Appendix D How to use PLC function for details 4 104 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters 4 The operation direction setting of 1st 15th step speed frequency can use PLC program to control Please refer to Appendix D How to use PLC function for details 5 The operation time setting of 1st 15th step speed frequency can use PLC program to control Pleas
314. requency current Contact will be On when drive malfunctions 1 Form C change over contact and 1 open collector output for standard type Built in PLC NOT for CANopen models AVR accel decel S Curve over voltage over current stall prevention 5 fault records reverse inhibition momentary power loss restart DC brake auto torque slip compensation auto tuning adjustable carrier frequency output frequency limits parameter Operation Functions lock reset vector control PID control external counter MODBUS communication abnormal reset abnormal re start power saving fan control sleep wake frequency 1st 2nd frequency source selections 1st 2nd frequency source combination NPN PNP selection parameters for motor 0 to motor 3 DEB and OOB Out Of Balance Detection for washing machine Alarm Output Contact Over voltage over current under voltage external fault overload ground Protection Functions fault overheating electronic thermal IGBT short circuit PTC 6 key 7 segment LED with 4 digit 5 status LEDs master frequency output Display Keypad optional frequency output current custom units parameter values for setup and lock faults RUN STOP RESET FWD REV PLC VFD002E11T 21T 23T VFD004E11T 21T 23T 43T VFD007E21T 23T 43T VFDO015E23T 43T VFD007E11A 11C VFD015E21A 21C Built in Brake Chopper VFD022E21A 21C 23A 23C 43A 43C VFD037E23A 23C 43A 43C VFD055E23A 23C 43A 43C VFD075E23A 23C 43A 43C VFD110E23A 23
315. result 0 zero flag M1020 On B Ifthe operation result lt 32 768 borrow flag M1021 On C Ifthe operation result gt 32 767 carry flag M1022 On Program Example In 16 bit BIN subtraction When On the content in DO will minus the content in D10 and the remainder will be stored in D20 D 52 LP sus Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function API Mnemonic Operands Function 22 MUL P S S2 D Multiplication Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps oF x Y M K H KnX KnM T C D MUL 7 steps 5 e Tele ie S ele o Wele D Operands S1 Multiplicand 52 Multiplicator D Product Explanations 4 In 16 bit instruction D occupies 2 consecutive devices 2 This instruction multiplies S1 by S2 in BIN format and stores the result in D Be careful with the positive negative signs of S1 S2 and D when doing 16 bit and 32 bit operations 16 bit command D 1 CD b15is a symbol bit b15 is a symbol bit b31 is a symbol bit b15 of D 1 Symbol bit O refers to a positive value Symbol bit 1 refers to a negative value When D serves as a bit device it can designate K1 K4 and construct a 16 bit result occupying consecutive 2 groups of 16 bit data Program Example The 16 bit DO
316. rive required time either use an external brake resistor and or brake unit depending on the model to shorten deceleration time only or increase the capacity for both the motor and the AC Motor Drive C 3 How to Choose a Suitable Motor Standard motor When using the AC Motor Drive to operate a standard 3 phase induction motor take the following precautions 1 The energy loss is greater than for an inverter duty motor 2 Avoid running motor at low speed for a long time Under this condition the motor temperature may rise above the motor rating due to limited airflow produced by the motor s fan Consider external forced motor cooling 3 When the standard motor operates at low speed for long time the output load must be decreased 4 The load tolerance of a standard motor is as follows Load duty cycle 50 P d continuous L 9 36 20 60 Frequency Hz 5 If 10096 continuous torque is required at low speed it may be necessary to use a special inverter duty motor 6 Motor dynamic balance and rotor endurance should be considered once the operating speed exceeds the rated speed 60Hz of a standard motor Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 C 5 Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive T Motor torque characteristics vary when an AC Motor Drive instead of commercial power supply drives the motor Check the load torque characteristics of the machine to be connected B
317. rst Master Frequency Command Second Master Frequency Command 0 00 to 600 0Hz 60 00 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Y customer Setting 0 Save Keypad amp Communication The Selections for Frequency Saving Keypad or 02 13 Communication 1 Save Keypad Frequency only Frequency Command 2 Save Communication Frequency only Initial Frequency 0 by Current Freg Command Selection for 02 14 keypad amp 1 by Zero Freq Command RS485 USB 2 by Frequency Display at Stop Initial Frequency 02 15 Setpoint for keypad 0 00 600 0Hz 60 00 amp RS485 USB Read Only BitO 1 by First Freq Source Pr 02 00 Display the Master ads 02 16 Freq Command Bit1 1 by Second Freq Source Pr 02 09 Source Bit2 1 by Multi input function Bit3 1 by PLC Freq command NOT for VFD E C models Read Only BitO 1 by Digital Keypad Bit121 by RS485 communication Display the Sama 02 47 Operation Bit2 1 by External Terminal 2 3 wire mode Command Source Bit3 1 by Multi input function Bit4 1 by PLC Operation Command NOT for VFD E C models 5 1 by CANopen communication 0 by carrier modulation of load current and 02 18 Selection of Carrier temperature Modulation 1 by carrier modulation of load current Group 3 Output Function Parameters Parameter Explanation Facto customer Setting 0 No function Multi function 1 AC drive operational
318. s 2 words 32 bits b31 b0 It can used to Word represent 00000000 FFFFFFFF of hexadecimal system The relations among bit nibble byte word and double word of binary number are shown as follows DW 4 Double Word w1 wo lt Word BY3 BY2 BY1 BYO lt _ NB7 NB6 NB5 NB4 NB3 NB2 NB1 NBO lt Nibble jp ares ores 5 Octal Number OCT The numbers of external input and output terminal of DVP PLC use octal number Example External input XO X7 X10 X17 device number Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function External output YO Y7 Y10 Y17 device number 3 Decimal Number DEC The suitable time for decimal number to use in DVP PLC system To be the setting value of timer T or counter C such as TMR CO K50 K constant To be the device number of M T C and D For example M10 T30 device number To be operand in application command such as MOV K123 DO K constant BCD Binary Code Decimal BCD It shows a decimal number by a unit number or four bits so continuous 16 bits can use to represent the four numbers of decimal number BCD code is usually used to read the input value of DIP switch or output value to 7 segment display to be display 5 Hexadecimal Number HEX The suitable time for hexadecimal number to
319. s ON its contact will act contact a is close contact b is open when attaining desired time The time value of timer is set by settings and each timer has its regular period User sets the timer value and each timer has its timing period Once the coil is OFF the contact won t act contact a is open and contact b is close and the timer will be set to zero Equipment indication TO T1 T15 The symbol of equipment is T and the number uses decimal system The different number range corresponds with the different timing period Counter Counter is used to count It needs to set counter before using counter i e the pulse of counter There are coil contacts and storage unit of counter in counter When coil is from OFF to ON that means input a pulse in counter and the counter should add 1 There are 16 bit 32 bit and high speed counter for user to use Equipment indication CO C1 C7 The symbol of equipment is C and the number uses decimal Data register PLC needs to handle data and operation when controlling each order timer value and counter value The data register is used to store data or parameters It stores Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function 16 bit binary number i e a word in each register It uses two continuous number of data register to store double words Equipment indication DO D1 D29 The symbol of equipment is D and
320. s ON when power is applied Check if the connection is well when option from the digital keypad KPE LEO2 It should be stopped when fault occurs during running and refer to Fault Code Information and Maintenance for solution Please do NOT touch output terminals U V W when power is still applied to L1 R L2 S L3 T even when the AC motor drive has stopped The DC link capacitors may still be charged to hazardous voltage levels even if the power has been turned off There are three LEDs on the keypad LED READY It will light up after applying power The light won t be off until the capacitors are discharged to safe voltage levels after power off LED RUN It will light up when the motor is running LED FAULT It will light up when fault occurs Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 3 1 Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up 3 2 Operation Method The operation method can be set via communication control terminals and optional keypad KPE LEO2 RS485 port RJ 45 It needs to use VFD USB01 or IFD8500 converter to connect tothe PC Control terminals MI1 to MI6 Keypad mounting port 3 2 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up Operation Method Operation Command Frequen ur cues Sue Source When setting communication by the PC it needs to use VFD USBO1 or Operate from the IFD8500 converter to connect to the PC communication NN Refer to the
321. s counting pulse input after counting is attained the contacts and the counting values will be unchanged To re count or to conduct the CLEAR motion please use the RST command Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation LD Load contact A of C2 counte Hip Te Tes ind CNT C2K100 Setting is K100 Mnemonic Function MC MCR Master control Start Reset Operand NO N7 Explanations D 38 1 MC is the main control start command When the MC command is executed the execution of commands between MC and MCR will not be interrupted When MC command is OFF the motion of the commands that between MC and MCR is described as follows Timer The counting value is set back to zero the coil and the contact are both turned OFF Accumulative timer The coil is OFF and the timer value and the contact stay at their present condition Subroutine timer The counting value is back to zero Both coil and contact are turned OFF Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Counter The coil is OFF and the counting value and the contact stay at their present condition Coils driven up by the OUT command All turned OFF Devices driven up by the SET and RST commands Stay at present condition Application commands All of them are not acted but the nest loop FOR NEXT command will still be
322. s different And the operation of the AC motor drive will be 1 When setting or 1 the status of AC motor drive is not changed by the terminal status 2 When setting 2 or 3 the status of AC motor drive is changed by the terminal status MI1 DCM close ON OFF Pr 02 01 0 RUN STOP RUN Stoe output frequency Pr 02 05 20r 3 C This action will follow MI1 DCM Change operation or MI2 DCM status 02 01 1 2 ONis close OFF is open output frequency Pr 02 05 0 or 1 Ea When Pr 02 05 is set to 1 or 3 it does not guarantee that the motor will never run under this condition It is possible the motor may be set in motion by a malfunctioning switch Ea Related parameters Pr 02 01 Source of First Operation Command Loss of ACI Signal 4 20mA Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Decelerate to OHz 1 Coast to stop and display AErr 2 Continue operation by the last frequency command Ea This parameter determines the behavior when ACI is lost ta Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 When setting to 1 it will display warning message AErr on the keypad optional in case of loss of ACI signal and execute the setting The AC motor drive will stop outputting immediately the motor will free run to stop Please press RESET key to clear it 4 65 Chapter 4 Parameters Ea co When setting 0 or 2 it will display warning message AErr on the keypad optional in case of loss of ACI signal
323. se set parameters by the following steps Step 1 Operation source setting set Pr 02 01 to 5 CANopen communication Keypad STOP RESET disabled Step 2 Frequency source setting set Pr 02 00 to 5 CANopen communication Step 3 CANopen station setting set Pr 09 13 CANopen Communication Address 1 127 Step 4 CANopen baud rate setting set Pr 09 14 CANBUS Baud Rate Step 5 Set multiple input function to quick stop when necessary Set Pr 04 05 to 04 08 or Pr 11 06 to 11 11 to 23 According to DSP 402 motion control rule CANopen provides speed control mode There are many status can be switched during Start to Quick Stop To get current status please read Status Word Status is switched by the PDO index control word via external terminals Control word is a 16 byte in index 0x6040 and each bit has specific definition The status bits are bit 4 to bit 6 as shown in the following Bit 4 ramp function enabled Bit 5 ramp function disabled Bit 6 rfg use reference Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 E 13 Appendix E CANopen Function 4 Following is the flow chart for status switch Power Disable E 14 9 OXXXXX0X Fault Start Fault Reaction Active X0XX1111 Not Ready to Switch On X0XX0000 reni X0XX1000 XXXXXXXX Switch OnDisable X1XX0000 OXXXXXO0OX OXXXX110 or QStop 1 OXXXX01X QStop 0 OXXXX01X Ready to Switch On
324. series 0 1V to 510 0V 440 0 Mid Point 01 28 Frequency Fmid 0 10 to 600 0 Hz Motor 1 1 50 Mid Point Voltage 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 10 0 0123 Vmid Motor 1 Vmid Motor 1 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V 20 0 Minimum Output 01 30 Frequency Fmin 0 10 to 600 0 Hz 1 50 Motor 1 Minimum Output 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 10 0 01 31 Voltage Vmin Motor 1 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V 20 0 Maximum Voltage 01 32 Frequency Fbase 0 10 to 600 0 Hz 60 00 Motor 2 Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 5 Maximum Voltage 01 26 Frequency Fbase 0 10 to 600 0 Hz 60 00 Motor 1 Chapter 4 Parameters Maximum Output 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 01 33 Voltage Vmax Motor 2 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V Mid Point 01 34 Frequency Fmid 0 10 to 600 0 Hz Motor 2 Mid Point Voltage 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 01 35 Vmid Motor 2 Vmid Motor 2 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V Minimum Output 01 36 Frequency Fmin 0 10 to 600 0 Hz Motor 2 Minimum Output 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 01 37 Voltage Vmin Motor 2 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V Maximum Voltage 01 38 Frequency Fbase 0 10 to 600 0 Hz Motor 3 Maximum Output 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 01 39 Voltage Vmax Motor 3 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V Mid Point 01 40 Frequency Fmid 0 10 to 600 0 Hz Motor 3 Mid Point Voltage 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 01 41 mig Motor 3 460V series 0 1V to 510
325. setting Digital When the settings 18 19 and 20 are ON at the same time the Keypad priority should be setting 18 gt setting19 gt setting20 Operation ON Operation command via Communication Command OFF Operation command via Pr 02 01 setting 20 Selection Pr 02 01 setting Communication When the settings 18 19 and 20 are ON at the same time the priority should be setting 18 gt setting19 gt setting20 This function has top priority to set the direction for running If 21 Forward Reverse Pr 02 04 0 Used to select the first second frequency command source Refer Source of second to Pr 02 00 and 02 09 22 frequency tg ON 2 Frequency command source command enabled OFF 1 Frequency command source ON Run PLC Program OFF Stop PLC Program When AC motor drive is in STOP mode and this function is Run Stop PLC enabled it will display PLC1 in the PLC page and execute PLC a Program PLC1 program When this function is disabled it will display PLCO in the NOT for VFD E C models PLC page and stop executing PLC program The motor will be stopped by Pr 02 02 When operation command source is external terminal the keypad cannot be used to change PLC status And this function will be invalid when the AC Motor drive is in PLC2 status Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 93 Chapter 4 Parameters Settings Function Description Quick Stop 23 ONLY for It is only
326. should be lt 10m Refer to appendix B for details Zero phase reactors are used to Zero phase reduce radio noise especially when Reactor audio equipment is installed near the Ferrite Core inverter Effective for noise reduction Common on both the input and output sides Choke Attenuation quality is good for a wide Optional range from AM band to 10MHz Appendix B specifies the zero phase reactor RF220X00A EMI filter To reduce electromagnetic interference Brake Used to reduce the deceleration time resistor and of the motor Please refer to the chart Brake unit in Appendix B for specific Brake Optional resistors Motor surge voltage amplitude Rue MR depends on motor cable length For Optional applications with long motor cable 720m it is necessary to install moabunack mias Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 2 3 Main Circuit 2 3 1 Main Circuit Connection Figure 1 For frame A VFD002E11A 21A 23A VFD004E11A 21A 23A 43A VFD007E21A 23A 43A VFD015E23A 43A VFD002E11C 21C 23C VFD004E11C 21C 23C 43C VFD007E21C 23C 43C VFD002E11P 21P 23P VFD004E11P 21P 23P 43P VFD007E11P 21P 23P 43P VFD015E23P 43P Brake Resistor Optional ABRE Brake Unit BUE No fuse breaker on NEB MC os R rae R L1 U T1 O s pra 4 2 v T2 M db L3 W T3 O er c
327. signal corresponding to 0 10 bar as feedback to the drive VFD E water pump no fuse breaker NO SU M i NFB Ve R R LI U T1 i S 8 2 V T2 m a T T L3 W T3 i Se 77 pM N throttle feedback4 20mA corresponds to pressure 0 10 bar sensor ACI AVI C 4 20mA 0 10V DC ACM S analog signal common AVI switch ACI 1 Pr 00 04 is set to 5 Display PID analog feedback signal value b 2 Pr 01 09 Acceleration Time will be set as required 4 158 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters 3 Pr 01 10 Deceleration Time will be set as required 4 Pr 02 01 1 to operate from the digital keypad 5 Pr 10 00 1 the setpoint is controlled by the digital keypad 6 Pr 10 01 3 Negative PID feedback from external terminal ACI 4 20mAy AVI2 0 10VDC 7 Pr 10 01 10 17 will be set as required 7 1 When there is no vibration in the system increase Pr 10 02 Proportional Gain P 7 2 When there is no vibration the system reduce Pr 10 03 Integral Time 1 7 3 When there is no vibration in the system increase Pr 10 04 Differential Time D 8 Refer to Pr 10 00 10 17 for PID parameters settings 1000 PID Set Point Selection Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Disable 1 Digital keypad UP DOWN keys 2 AVI 0 10VDC 3 ACI 4 20 AVI2 0 10VDC 4 PID set point Pr 10 11 EUN Input Terminal for PID Feedback Factory S
328. speed ON OFF OFF OFF 9 speed ON OFF OFF ON 10 speed ON OFF ON OFF 11 speed ON OFF ON ON 12 speed ON ON OFF OFF 13 speed ON ON OFF ON 14 speed ON ON ON OFF 15 speed ON ON ON ON 4 106 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 6 Protection Parameters 06 00 Over Voltage Stall Prevention Unit 0 1 En Settings 115V 230V series 330 0 to 410 0V Factory Setting 390 0 460V series 660 0 to 820 0V Factory Setting 780 0 0 Disable Over voltage Stall Prevention with brake unit or brake resistor During deceleration the DC bus voltage may exceed its Maximum Allowable Value due to motor regeneration When this function is enabled the AC motor drive will not decelerate further and keep the output frequency constant until the voltage drops below the preset value again With moderate inertia load over voltage stall prevention will not occur and the real deceleration time will be equal to the setting of deceleration time The AC drive will automatically extend the deceleration time with high inertia loads If the deceleration time is critical for the application a brake resistor or brake unit should be used When the function of over voltage stall prevention is activated the deceleration time of the AC motor drive will be larger than the setting When the deceleration time is obstruction in the application it is not suitable to use this function The solution are 1 moderate i
329. speed in RPM 15 Display motor number 00 03 M LL When Pr00 03 is set to 03 the display is according to the setting of Pr00 04 LL When Pr 00 04 is set to 0 please refer to Pr 00 05 for details i Related parameter Pr 00 05 User Defined Coefficient K f 4 40 Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Please refer to Appendix B 8 KPE LEO2 for the 7 segment LED Display of the Digital Keypad 00 05 User Defined Coefficient Unit 0 1 Settings 0 1 tod 160 0 Factory Setting 1 0 Ea The coefficient K determines the multiplying factor for the user defined unit The display value is calculated as follows U User defined unit Actual output frequency Pr 00 05 Example If user wants to use RPM to display the motor speed when 4 polse motor runs at 60Hz The user can display the motor speed by setting Pr 00 04 to 0 The application is shown as follows From the formula of motor speed user defined unit U RPM 60X120 4 1800 disregard slip Therefore User Defined Coefficient K is 30 0 L 120 Formula of motor speed n n speed RPM revolution per minute P pole number of motor f operation frequency Hz 00 06 Power Board Software Version Settings Read Only Display HHH 00 07 Control Board Software Version Settings Read Only Display HHH Pass
330. sponse time it will be The unsuitable primary delay filter time may cause system oscillation PID control can be used for speed pressure flow control It needs to use with the relevant equipment of sensor feedback for PID control Refer to the following for the closed loop control diagram Freq Command Integral Output Digital gain Freq Setpoint gt O P limit gt Limit filter 10 02 10 03 10 05 10 07 10 06 10 04 Input Freq PID Gain feedback Sensor 10 10 10 01 ETE PID Output Frequency Limit Unit 1 Settings 0 to 110 Factory Setting 100 This parameter defines the percentage of output frequency limit during the PID control The formula is Output Frequency Limit Maximum Output Frequency Pr 01 00 X Pr 10 07 96 This parameter will limit the Maximum Output Frequency An overall limit for the output frequency can be set in Pr 01 07 Related parameter Pr 01 00 Maximum Output Frequency Fmax PID Feedback Signal Detection Time Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to d 3600 sec Factory Setting 60 0 This parameter defines the time during which the PID feedback must be abnormal before a warning see Pr 10 09 is given It also can be modified according to the system feedback signal time If this parameter is set to 0 0 the system would not detect any abnormality signal 4 162 Revision Jan 2009
331. stalled the number of the digital input terminals will increase according to the extension card The maximum number of the digital input terminals is shown as follows 4 98 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters 0 not used Weights 3 2 2 22 2 2 22 2 2 2 1 Usedby PLC epoToTe 7TeIsT TsT2 To n The Analog Input Used by PLC NOT for VFD E C models Settings Read Only Factory display 0 Display _ Bit0 1 AVI used by PLC Bit1 1 ACI AVI2 used by PLC Bit2 1 11 used by PLC Bit3 1 AI2 used by PLC Ea The equivalent 2 bit is used to display the status used or not used of each analog input The value for Pr 04 25 to display is the result after converting 2 bit binary into decimal value Weights 9 2 9 2 O notused 1 used by PLC 4 ACI AVI2 AI1 optional AI2 optional Display the Status of Multi function Input Terminal Settings Read Only Factory display 63 Display MI1 Status Bit1 MI2 Status Bit2 MI3 Status Bit3 MI4 Status Bit4 MI5 Status Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 99 Chapter 4 Parameters Bit5 MI6 Status Bit6 MI7 Status Bit7 MI8 Status Bit8 MI9 Status Bit9 MI10 Status Bit10 MI11 Status Bit11 MI12 Status The multi function input terminals falling edge triggered For standard AC motor drive without extension card there are MI1 to MI6 and Pr 04
332. t 1000m 20Hz 9 80 m s 1G max 20 50Hz 5 88 m s 0 6G max 20 C 60 4 F 140 F lt 90 no condensation allowed 86 106 kPa lt 20Hz 9 80 m s 1G max 20 50Hz 5 88 m s 0 6G max 2 good for a factory type environment Minimum Mounting Clearances Frame A Mounting Clearances Single drive Side by side installation Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Air flow Air Chapter 1 Introduction Frame B C and D Mounting Clearances Single drive Side by side installation Air flow For VFD E P series heat sink system example 4 r3 lt Air extracting apparatus User s heat sink should comply Control panel 4 Duct temperature lt 40 with following conditions Air flow speed 2 2m sec 1 Flatness 0 1mm 2 Roughness 6um 3 Grease 10um 12um 4 Screw torque 16Kgf cm lector 5 Recommended temperature 80 fan 1 Operating storing or transporting the AC motor drive outside these conditions may cause damage to the AC motor drive Failure to observe these precautions may void the warranty Mount the AC motor drive vertically on a flat vertical surface object by screws Other directions are not allowed The AC motor drive will generate heat during oper
333. t Level E Minimum PID Output Frequency Selection Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 By PID control 1 By Minimum output frequency Pr 01 05 This is the source selection of minimum output frequency when control is by PID The output of the AC motor drive will refer this parameter setting When this parameter is set to 0 the output frequency will output by the calculation of PID When this parameter is set to 1 and Pr 01 08 is not set to 0 the output frequency Pr 01 08 setting Otherwise the output frequency Pr 01 05 setting Related parameters Pr 01 05 Minimum Output Frequency Fmin Motor 0 Pr 01 08 Output Frequency Lower Limit 1014 Sleep Wake Up Detection Time Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 6550 sec Factory Setting 0 0 4 164 Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 En Chapter 4 Parameters If PID frequency is less than the sleep frequency when the drive starts running the drive will be in sleep mode immediately and won t limit by this parameter Related parameters Pr 10 15 Sleep Frequency and Pr 10 16 Wakeup Frequency EXE Sleep Frequency Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 600 0 Hz Factory Setting 0 00 This parameter set the frequency for the AC motor drive to be in sleep mode The AC motor drive will stop outputting after being sleep mode but PID controller keep operating EXE Wakeup Frequency Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 600 0 Hz Factory Setting 0
334. t of internal memory If this bit is 1 it means the coil is ON and if this bit is 0 it means the coil is OFF You should read the corresponding value of that bit when using contact Normally Open NO or contact a Otherwise you should read the opposite sate of corresponding value of that bit when using contact Normally Closed NC or contact b Many relays will need many bits Such as 8 bits makes up a byte 2 bytes can make up a word 2 words makes up double word When using many relays to do calculation such as add subtraction or shift you could Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 D 7 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function D 8 use byte word or double word Furthermore the two equipments timer and counter in PLC not only have coil but also value of counting time and times In conclusion each internal storage unit occupies fixed storage unit When using these equipments the corresponding content will be read by bit byte or word Basic introduction of the inner equipment of PLC Input relay Input relay is the basic storage unit of internal memory that corresponds to external input point it is the terminal that used to connect to external input switch and receive external input signal Input signal from external will decide it to display 0 or 1 You couldn t change the state of input relay by program design or forced ON OFF via WPLSoft The contacts contact a b can be used unlimitedly If there is no inpu
335. t signal the corresponding input relay could be empty and can t be used with other functions e Equipment indication method X1 X7 X10 X11 The symbol of equipment is X and the number uses octal Output relay Output relay is the basic storage unit of internal memory that corresponds to external output point it is used to connect to external load It can be driven by input relay contact the contact of other internal equipment and itself contact It uses a normally open contact to connect to external load and other contacts can be used unlimitedly as input contacts It doesn t have the corresponding output relay if need it can be used as internal relay Equipment indication YO Y1 Y7 Y10 11 The symbol of equipment is Y and the number uses octal Internal relay The internal relay doesn t connect directly to outside It is an auxiliary relay in PLC Its function is the same as the auxiliary relay in electric control circuit Each auxiliary relay has the corresponding basic unit It can be driven by the contact of input relay output relay or other internal equipment Its contacts can be used unlimitedly Internal auxiliary relay can t output directly it should output with output point Equipment indication MO M1 M4 M159 The symbol of equipment is M and the number uses decimal number system Timer Timer is used to control time There are coil contact and timer storage When coil i
336. tC1 35 39 Reserved 40 Communication time out error of control board and power board CP10 41 dEb error 42 ACL Abnormal Communication Loop 2101H Status of AC drive 00B RUN LED is off STOP LED is on The AC motor Drive stops 01B RUN LED blinks STOP LED is on When AC motor drive decelerates to stop Bit 0 1 10B RUN LED is on STOP LED blinks When AC motor drive is standby 11B RUN LED is on STOP LED is off When AC motor drive runs Bit 2 1 JOG command Bit 3 4 00B FWD LED is on REV LED is off When AC motor drive runs forward 01B FWD LED is on REV LED blinks When AC motor drive runs from reverse to forward 10B FWD LED blinks REV LED is on When AC motor drive runs from forward to reverse 11B FWD LED is off REV LED is on When AC motor drive runs reverse Bit 5 7 Reserved Bit8 1 Master frequency Controlled by communication interface Bit 9 1 Master frequency controlled by analog signal 1 Operation command controlled by Bi 10 communication interface Bit 11 15 Reserved 2102H Frequency command F Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 151 Chapter 4 Parameters 4 152 Content Address Function 2103H Output frequency H 2104H Output current AXXX X 2105H Reserved 2106H Reserved 2107H Reserved 2108H DC BUS Voltage UXXX X
337. te in Modbus networks using one of the following modes ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange or RTU Remote Terminal Unit Users can select the desired mode along with the serial port communication protocol in Pr 09 04 Code Description The CPU will be about 1 second delay when using communication reset Therefore there is atleast 1 second delay time in master station ASCII mode Each 8 bit data is the combination of two ASCII characters For example a 1 byte data 64 Hex shown as 64 in ASCII consists of 6 36Hex and 4 34Hex Character 0 Y 2 3 4 5 e 7 ASCII code 30H 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H Character e 9 B C D F ASCII code 38H 39H 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H 46H RTU mode Each 8 bit data is the combination of two 4 bit hexadecimal characters For example 64 Hex 2 Data Format 10 bit character frame For ASCII Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters 7 N 2 l Stop Stop pe 9 bit ibit T bit character 4 10 bit character frame 7 E 1 11239 4 5 6 Even Stop parity bit 4 7 bit character 4 10 bit character frame 7 O 1 0 1 253 154155 6 Odd Stop parity i bit 4 7 bit character
338. thods and Criterion Daily Half One Year Year If there is any obstruction in the Visual inspection heat sink air intake or air outlet Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 6 11 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance This page intentionally left blank 6 12 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix A Specifications There are 115V 230V and 460V models in the VFD E series For 115V models it is 1 phase models For 0 25 to 3HP of the 230V models there are 1 phase 3 phase models Refer to following specifications for details Voltage Class 115V Class o ReedOwpuCapady amp VA 16 42 M 3 Phase Proportional to Twice the Input Voltage o Carrier Frequency kHz 1 15 Single phase Rated Input Current A 6 9 18 S 9 Rated Voltage Frequency Single phase 100 120V 50 60Hz amp Voltage Tolerance 10 90 132 V Frequency Tolerance 5 47 63 Hz Cooling Method Natural Cooling Fan Cooling Weight kg 12 Voltage Class 230V Class Max Applicable Motor Output 0 2 04 0 75 15 22 37 55 75 11 15 kW 5 i b x 5 Rated Output Capaciy va 06 10 16 29 42 6s os 125 25 Rated Output Curent 65 Maximum Output Voltage V 3 Phase Proportional to Input Voltage F Output Frequency Hz 0 1 600 Hz 1 Carrier Frequency kHz 1 15 Single 3 phase 3 phase 2 4 9 1 9 6 5 2 7 15 7 9 24 15 20 6 26 ES
339. time after AC drive receives communication command as shown in the following 1 unit 2 msec RS485 BUS PC or PLC command Response Message of AC Drive Handling time Response Delay Time of AC drive Pr 09 07 Max 6msec Transmission Speed for USB Card Settings N Factory Setting 2 Baud rate 4800 bps Baud rate 9600 bps Baud rate 19200 bps Baud rate 38400 bps Baud rate 57600 bps Ea This parameter is used to set the transmission speed for USB card ETE Communication Protocol for USB Card Settings a Factory Setting 1 Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 N 2 gt Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 E 1 gt Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 0 1 gt Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 N 2 gt Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 E 1 gt Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 0 1 gt Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 N 1 gt Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 E 2 gt Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 0 2 gt Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 N 1 gt Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 E 2 gt Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 0 2 gt 09 10 A Transmission Fault Treatment for USB Card Settings Factory Setting 0 Warn and keep operating Warn and RAMP to stop Warn and COAST to stop No warning and keep operating Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 155 Chapter 4 Parameters aa This parameter is set to how to react when transmission errors occurs
340. tion deceleration Auto acceleration linear Deceleration 0 1 2 Linear acceleration auto Deceleration 3 Auto acceleration deceleration set by load 4 Auto acceleration deceleration set by Accel Decel Time setting Linear acceleration deceleration the acceleration deceleration that acts according to the acceleration deceleration time set by Pr 01 09 01 12 With Auto acceleration deceleration it is possible to reduce vibration and shocks during starting stopping the load When Pr 01 16 is set to 3 Auto acceleration deceleration set by load During Auto acceleration the torque is automatically measured and the drive will accelerate to the set frequency with the fastest acceleration time and the smoothest starting current During Auto deceleration regenerative energy is measured and the motor is smoothly stopped with the fastest deceleration time When this parameter is set to 04 Auto acceleration deceleration set by Accel Decel Time setting the actual accel decel time will be equal to or more than parameter Pr 01 09 Pr 01 12 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 53 Chapter 4 Parameters Auto acceleration deceleration makes the complicated processes of tuning unnecessary It makes operation efficient and saves energy by acceleration without stall and deceleration without brake resistor In applications with brake resistor or brake unit the deceleration time is the shortest It is NOT r
341. tion Output Terminal factory setting Analog freq current meter 0 10VDC 2mA e Analog Signal common Factory setting output frequency RS 485 serial interface NOT for VFD E C models 1 Reserved 2 EV ONDA W GND SG 5G Reserved Reserved Reserved For VFD E C models please referto figure 8 Shieldedleads amp Cable 2 3 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Figure 2 for models of VFD E Series VFD002E23A VFD004E23A 43A VFD007E23A 43A VFD015E23A 43A VFD002E23C VFD004E23C 43C VFD007E23C 43C VFD015E23C 43C VFD002E23P VFD004E23P 43P VFD007E23P 43P VFD015E23P 43P BR brake resistor 1 optional BUE brake unit optional A Fuse NFB No Fuse Breaker E id n Motor R L1 R L1 U T1 S L2 e S L2 V T2 IM I T L3 m I 2T L3 W T3 3 Recommended Circuit TOE T when power supply E is turned OFF bya I SA fault output Ifthe faultoccurs the Multi function contact output contact will be ON to RC Refer to chapter 2 4 for details ON ing i turn off the power and OFF MC RB Factory setting ae protect the power system Re malfunction indication 24V FWD Stop Factory setting t REV St MI1 MO1 Factory setting NPN Mode MI2 Driveis in operation NPN Factory Multi step 1 MI3 Tta 48V50mA Max Sw1 i 7 1 a setting e Multi step 2 MIA Multi function PNP i Photocoul
342. tional gain P Pr 10 03 Integral time I and Pr 10 04 Derivative control D Program Example Assume that when MO ON S1 is set to 0 PID function is disabled S270 S3 1 unit 0 01 seconds and S4 1 unit 0 01 seconds Assume that when M1 ON S1 is set to 0 PID function is disabled S271 unit 0 01 S3 0 and S4 0 Assume that when M2 ON S1 is set to 1 frequency is inputted by digital keypad S271 unit 0 01 S320 and S4 0 D1027 frequency command controlled by PID 1 Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 D 61 Appendix D to Use PLC Function API Mnemonic Operands Function 142 FREQ P 51 S2 S3 Operation control of the AC motor drive Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps x Y M K KnX KnM T C D FREQ FREQP 7 steps 1 S2 S3 Operands S1 frequency command S2 acceleration time S3 deceleration time Explanation 1 This command can control frequency command acceleration time and deceleration time of the AC motor drive Please use M1025 to RUN ON STOP OFF the AC motor drive and use M1025 to control the operation direction FWD ON REV OFF Program Example 1 D 62 M1025 RUN ON STOP Off the AC motor drive M1026 operation direction of the AC motor drive FWD OFF REV ON M1015 frequency is reached When M10 ON setting frequency comm
343. to set the gain of D controller to decide the response of error change The suitable differential time can reduce the overshoot of P and controller to decrease the oscillation and have a stable system But too long differential time may cause system oscillation The differential controller acts for the change of error and can t reduce the interference It is not recommended to use this function in the serious interference ETE Upper Bound for Integral Control Unit 1 0 to 100 Factory Setting 100 Settings Ea This parameter defines an upper bound or limit for the integral gain I and therefore limits the Master Frequency The formula is Integral upper bound Maximum Output Frequency Pr 01 00 x Pr 10 05 Ea Too large integral value will make the slow response due to sudden load change In this way it may cause motor stall or machine damage Related parameter Pr 01 00 Maximum Output Frequency Fmax Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 161 Chapter 4 Parameters Primary Delay Filter Time Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 2 5 sec Factory Setting 0 0 It is used to set the time that required for the low pass filter of PID output Increasing the setting it may affect the drive s response speed The frequency output of PID controller will filter after primary delay filter time It can smooth the change of the frequency output The longer primary delay filter time is set the slower re
344. tor and connect its output signal to the drive s corresponding control terminals When the source of first second frequency command is set to AVI 02 00 1 02 09 1 it will disable the function of motor PTC overheat protection i e Pr 07 12 cannot be set to 1 Only one of the source of first master frequency command and second master frequency command can be enable at one time Oui i If temperature exceeds the setting level motor will be coast to stop e e is displayed When the temperature decreases below the level of Pr 07 15 Pr 07 16 and Ours amp stops blinking you can press RESET key to clear the fault 07 14 overheat protection level must exceed Pr 07 15 overheat warning level The PTC uses the AVI input and is connected via resistor divider as shown below The voltage between 10V to ACM lies within 10 4V 11 2V The impedance for AVI is around 47kQ Recommended value for resistor divider R1 is 1 10kQ Please contact your motor dealer for the curve of temperature and resistance value for PTC 4 122 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters VFD E 10V resistor divider R1 AVI 47kQ PTC ACM internal circuit Ea Refer to following calculation for protection level and warning level Protection level 07 14 V 4o Rerci A7K R1 47 Warning level 07 16 V 4o 2 47 R1 Rercz 47K Definition
345. tor drive runs fan OFF when AC motor drive stops 3 Fan ON when preliminary heatsink temperature attained Read only Bit0 1 RLY used by PLC Bit1 1 MO1 used by PLC The Digital Output Bit2 1 MO2 RA2 used by PLC pas Bit3 1 MO3 RA3 used by PLC NOT for oe models Bit4 1 MO4 RA4 used by PLC Bit5 1 MO5 RAS5 used by PLC Bit6 1 MO6 RAG used by PLC Bit7 1 MO7 RA7 used by PLC Read only The Analog Output Used by PLC Bit0 1 AFM used by PLC NOT for VFD E C Bitt 1 AO1 used by PLC models Bit2 1 AO2 used by PLC 03 11 Brake Release 0 00 to 20 00Hz Em Frequency Brake Engage 0 00 to 20 00Hz Frequency Read only RLY Status Bit1 MO1 Status Display the Status of Bit2 MO2 RA2 Status Multi function Bit3 MO3 RA3 Status Output Terminals pita MO4 RA4 Status Bits MO5 RAS5 Status MO6 RA6 Status Bit7 MO7 RA7 Status Desired Frequency 03 14 2 Attained 0 00 to 600 0Hz Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 4 Input Function Parameters Parameter Explanation Factory Customer Setting Keypad 04 00 Potentiometer Bias 0 Positive bias 04 01 Potentiometer Bias 1 Negative bias Polarity Keypad 04 02 Potentiometer Gain 0 1 to 200 0 100 0 Keypad Potentiometer 0 No negative bias command 04 03 Negative Bias Reverse Motion T Enable Disable Negative bias REV motion enabled 04 04 2 wire 3 wir
346. ts motor 3 Multi Step Speed 4 94 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters 05 07 Frequency 05 06 05 08 05 05 05 09 05 04 E 05 10 05 03 a NE i 05 11 05 02 ar DP d oj 05 12 JOG Freq j 01 15 ROB 05 13 0500 11 b cd Log dew Gd d IN05 14 Mastey Sp ed Run Stop L Ru icd RUM 7181910 11 12 13 14 15 PU external terminals 1 a Mette oemi Rmi pmi Rmi pub un S298 2 3rd speed z ELO mistomie OFF a a JogFreg OFF 1 35 5 i Multi speed via External Terminals MI6 4 MI5 3 MI4 2 MI3 1 Master frequency OFF OFF OFF OFF 1 speed OFF OFF OFF ON speed OFF OFF ON OFF ri speed OFF OFF ON ON 4 speed OFF ON OFF OFF 5 speed OFF ON OFF ON 6 speed OFF ON ON OFF 7 speed OFF ON ON ON 8 speed ON OFF OFF OFF 9 speed ON OFF OFF ON 10 speed ON OFF ON OFF 11 speed ON OFF ON ON 12 speed ON ON OFF OFF 13 speed ON ON OFF ON 14 speed ON ON ON OFF 15 speed ON ON ON ON Multi function Input Contact Selection Unit 1 Settings 0 to 4095 Factory Setting 0 Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 95 Chapter 4 Parameters Ea Ea 4 96 This parameter can be used to set the status of multi function terminals MI1 MI
347. uestions of the decreasing frequency and increasing magnetic field the magnetic field is decreasing with frequency In such circumstance insufficient motor torque will occur when the magnetic field weakens in the low frequency At this moment it can get the best operation with Pr 07 02 setting Torque Compensation to get the torque compensation common applications pump conveyor belt compressor and treadmill Vector control 1 To operate by the change of frequency and voltage without changing the mechanical characteristic of motor it can run by open loop method and also can use with PG card refer to Appendix B to run by close loop method In this mode it is coordinate change The physical essence is the relativity of motion That means the change of rotor current only has relation with electromagnetic torque and the change of stator current only has relation with electromagnetic torque This is the characteristic of vector control 2 The vector control can eliminate the relation between electromagnetic current vector and armature flux Thus it can control the current vector and armature flux independently to raise Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 43 Chapter 4 Parameters the transient response of the AC motor drive Applications textile equipment press equipment life equipment and drilling machine Ea Related parameter Pr 07 02 Torque Compensation Motor 0 EX Reserved 50Hz Base Voltage Selectio
348. uish motor rotation direction Setting 2 both for speed control and distinguish motor rotation direction A phase leads B phase as shown in the following diagram and motor is forward running Setting 3 both for speed control and distinguish motor rotation direction B phase leads A phase as shown in the following diagram and motor is reverse running Related parameter Pr 13 01 PG Pulse Range Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters A phase leads B phase N A phase JU Ww ER JUL gt V phase X I 13 00 2 When receiving a forward command motor will rotate in counterclockwise direction see from output side B phaseleads Aphase A phase JLilIL 13 0073 B phase When receiving a reverse command motor willrotate in clockwise direction see from output side A phase l GE cw ATE GENERATOR WV B phase When encoder rotates in clockwise direction see from input side Atthis moment A phase leads B phase PG Pulse Range Unit 1 Settings 1 to 20000 Factory Setting 600 A Pulse Generator PG is used as a sensor that provides a feedback signal of the motor speed This parameter defines the number of pulses for each cycle of the PG control Ea This parameter setting is the resolution of encoder With the higher resolution the speed control will be more precise Motor Pole Number Motor 0 Unit 1 Settings 2 to 10 Factory Setting 4
349. uld set MI2 On And if you want to decelerate to stop please set MI1 MI2 Off Check following items Check if the motor direction of rotation is correct Check if the motor runs steadily without abnormal noise and vibration Check if acceleration and deceleration are smooth If you want to perform a trial run by using optional digital keypad please operate by the following steps 1 Connect digital keypad to AC motor drive correctly 2 After applying the power verify that LED display shows F 0 0Hz 3 Set Pr 02 00 0 and Pr 02 01 0 Refer to Appendix B operation flow for detail 4 Press key to set frequency to around 5Hz 5 Press And if you want to change to reverse mune revel decelerate to stop please press key key for forward running running you should press ES in page And if you want to STOP 6 Check following items Check if the motor direction of rotation is correct Check if the motor runs steadily without abnormal noise and vibration Check if acceleration and deceleration are smooth EOS 7 P estor ac nn i v E wv RUNO estor 44 REVO z 27 EJ 44 Fwpe REVO lesroP a amp c c c E 4 lesroP Fwpe ane nic soz 595 um v n REVO u i m estor d lt lt i
350. ulti function output terminals is shown as follows 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Active Weights 22 2222 2 2 1 Off MO7 RA7 4 82 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Cnapter 4 Parameters Group 4 Input Function Parameters ETE X Keypad Potentiometer Bias Unit O 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 096 Factory Setting 0 0 04 01 X Keypad Potentiometer Bias Polarity Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Positive Bias 1 Negative Bias 04 02 X Keypad Potentiometer Gain Unit 0 1 Settings 0 1 to 200 0 Factory Setting 100 0 Keypad Potentiometer Negative Bias Reverse Motion Enable Disable Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 No Negative Bias Command 1 Negative Bias REV Motion Enabled Ea Pr 04 00 04 03 are used for those applications that use analog voltage signal to adjust the setting frequency Please refer to the following examples for the details of keypad potentiometer optional 0 10 or 10V Example 1 Standard application This is the most used setting The user only needs to set Pr 02 00 to 04 The frequency command comes from keypad potentiometer GOH ies Pr 01 00 60Hz Max output Freq Potentiometer Pr 04 00 0 Bias adjustment 30Hz Pr 04 01 0 Positive bias 04 02 100 Input gain Pr 04 03 0 No negative bias command OHz ov 5V 10V Example 2 Use of bias This example shows the influence of changing the bias When the input is OV the output frequency is 10 Hz At m
351. un Keep previous status 2 Disable AC motor drive will run Change according amie nev operation command source 3 Enable AC motor drive doesn t run When the operation command source is from external terminal and operation command is ON NPN mode MI1 MI2 DCM closed PNP mode MI1 MI2 24V closed please refer to chapter 2 wiring for details the AC motor drive will operate according to Pr 02 05 after power is applied For terminals MI1 and MI2 only 1 When Pr 02 05 is set to 0 or 2 AC motor drive will run immediately 2 When Pr 02 05 is set to 1 or 3 AC motor drive will remain stopped until operation command is received after previous operation command is cancelled MI1 DCM close ON OFF ON power is applied ON i output frequency Pr 02 05 0 or2 s it will run output frequency Pr 02 05 1 or3 it won trun when power is applied t needs t received a run command after previous command is cancelled 4 64 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters When the operation command source isn t from the external terminals independently from whether the AC motor drive runs or stops the AC motor drive will operate according to Pr 02 05 if the two conditions below are both met 1 When operation command source is changed to external terminal Pr 02 01 1 or 2 2 The status of terminal and AC motor drive i
352. unction to reset all parameters to factory setting is disabled i e Pr 00 02 can t be set to 9 or 10 D 6 Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function D 3 Ladder Diagram D 3 1 Program Scan Chart of the PLC Ladder Diagram V Read input state from outside Calculate the result by ladder diagram algorithm it doesn t sent to the outer output point but the inner equipment will output immediately M100 X3 X10 Execute cycles X100 M505 Send the result to the output point D 3 2 Introduction Ladder diagram is a diagram language that applied on the automatic control and it is also a diagram that made up of the symbols of electric control circuit PLC procedures are finished after ladder diagram editor edits the ladder diagram It is easy to understand the control flow that indicated with diagram and also accept by technical staff of electric control circuit Many basic symbols and motions of ladder diagram are the same as mechanical and electrical equipments of traditional automatic power panel such as button switch relay timer counter and etc The kinds and amounts of PLC internal equipment will be different with brands Although internal equipment has the name of traditional electric control circuit such as relay coil and contact It doesn t have the real components in it In PLC it just has a basic uni
353. ust 10 C 50 C 14 F to 122 F 20 C 60 C 4 F to 140 F 90 Non condensing 9 8m s 1G under 20Hz 2m s 0 2G at 20 50Hz Wall mounted Enclosed Type IP20 Output Rating Environment Protection Power Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 B 7 Appendix B Accessories B 1 3 Dimensions for Brake Unit Dimensions are in millimeter inch B 8 Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 B 1 4 DIN Rail Installation Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Appendix B Accessories B 9 Appendix B Accessories B 2 No fuse Circuit Breaker Chart For 1 phase 3 phase drives the current rating of the breaker shall be within 2 4 times rated input current 1 phase 3 phase Recommended Recommended Model no fuse Model no fuse breaker A breaker A VFD002E11A 11T 11C 15 VFD002E23A 23C 23T 5 11P 23P VFD002E21A 21T 21C 10 VFD004E23A 23C 23T 5 21P 23P VFD004E11A 11C 11T 20 VFD004E43A 43C 43T 5 11P 43P VFD004E21A 21C 21T 15 VFD007E23A 23C 23T 10 21P 23P VFD007E11A 11C 30 VFD007E43A 43C 43T 5 43P VFD007E21A 21C 21T 20 VFD015E23A 23C 23T 20 21P 23P VFD015E21A 21C 30 VFD015E43A 43C 43T 10 43P VFD022E21A 21C 50 VFD022E23A 23C 30 VFD022E43A 43C 15 VFD037E23A 23C 40 VFD037E43A 43C 20 VFD055E23A 23C 50 VFD055E43A 43C 30 VFD075E23A 23C 60 VFD075E43A 43C 40 VFD110E23A 23C 100 VFD110E43A 43C 50 VFD150E23A 23C 150
354. ut Frequency Pr 01 00 is regarded as 100 Ea Output Frequency Upper Limit value Pr 01 00 Pr 01 07 100 Ea The max output frequency of the AC motor drive will be limited by this setting If the setting of frequency command is greater than Pr 01 07 the output frequency will be equal to or less than Pr 01 07 Ea When enabling Pr 07 03 or Pr 10 00 10 13 the output frequency of the AC motor drive may exceed the frequency command but it is still limited by this setting Ea Related parameters Pr 01 00 Maximum Output Frequency Fmax and Pr 01 08 Output Frequency Lower Limit Output Frequency Lower Limit Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 096 Factory Setting 0 0 Ea The Output Frequency Lower Limit value Pr 01 00 Pr 01 08 100 Ea This setting will limit the min output frequency of the AC motor drive When the frequency command of the AC motor drive or the frequency calculated by feedback control is less than this setting the output frequency of the AC motor drive will be limited by this setting Ea After starting running the AC motor drive will accelerate from Pr 01 05 Minimum Output Frequency Fmin Motor 0 to the setting frequency by V f curve and won t be limited by this setting Ea The Upper Lower Limits are to prevent operation errors and machine damage Ea If the Output Frequency Upper Limit is 50Hz and the Maximum Output Frequency is 60Hz the Output Frequency will be limited to 50Hz Ea If the Output Frequen
355. ut Frequency to be reached Bias adjustment pr 04 00 60Hz Max output Freq Potentiometer Pr 04 00 10 0 Bias adjustment Pr 04 01 1 Negative bias Pr 04 02 111 Input gain Pr 04 03 0 No negative bias command Gain 10V 9V 100 111 10V adjustment 6 6Hz 60Hz Gain 100 100 10 0 OIN _ OH Negative bias 6 6Hz Example 7 Use of 0 10V potentiometer signal to run motor in FWD and REV direction In this example the input is programmed to run a motor in both forward and reverse direction The motor will be idle when the potentiometer position is at mid point of its scale Using the settings in this example disables the external FWD and REV controls Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 85 Chapter 4 Parameters Pr 01 00 60Hz Max output Freq Potentiometer Pr 04 00 50 0 Bias adjustment Pr 04 01 1 Negative bias Pr 04 02 200 Input gain Pr 04 03 1 Negative bias REV motion enabled Gain 10V 5V 100 200 Bias adjustment 60Hz 60Hz Gain 100 100 200 Example 8 Use negative slope In this example the use of negative slope is shown Negative slopes are used in applications for control of pressure temperature or flow The sensor that is connected to the input generates a large signal 10V at high pressure or flow With negative slope settings the AC motor drive will slow stop the motor With these settings the AC motor drive will always run in only on
356. ve If the frequency command is greater than this setting the AC motor drive will accelerate to the frequency command by the accel decel time If the frequency command is less than this setting the AC motor drive will be ready without output voltage Please note that unsuitable setting may cause over current to damage motor or trigger the over current protection When Pr 08 04 is set to 1 Operation continues after momentary power loss speed search starts with the Master Frequency reference value it won t operate by V f curve Related parameters Pr 01 01 Maximum Voltage Frequency Fbase Motor 0 Pr 01 02 Maximum Output Voltage Vmax Motor 0 Pr 01 03 Mid Point Frequency Fmid Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 47 Chapter 4 Parameters Motor 0 Pr 01 04 Mid Point Voltage Vmid Motor 0 and Pr 01 06 Minimum Output Voltage Vmin Motor 0 0106 Minimum Output Voltage Vmin Motor 0 Unit 0 1 Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory Setting 10 0 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 20 0 4 48 This parameter sets the Minimum Output Voltage of the AC motor drive If the setting is too large it may cause over current to damage motor or trigger the over current protection If the setting is too small it may cause insufficient motor torque The settings of Pr 01 01 to Pr 01 06 have to meet the condition of Pr 01 02 gt Pr 01 04 gt
357. ve Actions 1 Short circuit at motor output Check for possible poor insulation at the output lines 2 Torque boost too high Decrease the torque compensation setting in Pr 07 02 3 Acceleration Time too short Increase the Acceleration Time 4 motor drive output power is too small Replace the AC motor drive with the next higher power model 1 Short circuit at motor output Check for possible poor insulation at the output line 2 Deceleration Time too short Increase the Deceleration Time 3 AC motor drive output power is too small Replace the AC motor drive with the next higher power model 1 Short circuit at motor output Check for possible poor insulation at the output line 2 Sudden increase in motor loading Check for possible motor stall 3 AC motor drive output power is too small Replace the AC motor drive with the next higher power model 1 When multi function input terminals MI3 MI9 are set to external fault the AC motor drive stops output U V and W 2 Give RESET command after fault has been cleared Return to the factory Return to the factory 1 Press RESET key to set all parameters to factory setting Return to the factory 1 Press RESET key to set all parameters to factory setting 2 Return to the factory Return to the factory Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 6 3 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance Fault Name Fault Descript
358. ve correctly before using group 11 parameters See Appendix B for details Multi function Output Terminal MO2 RA2 Multi function Output Terminal MO3 RA3 Multi function Output Terminal MO4 RA4 Multi function Output Terminal MO5 RA5 Multi function Output Terminal MO6 RA6 Multi function Output Terminal MO7 RA7 Settings 0 to 21 Factory Setting 0 Settings Function Description 0 No Function 1 AC Drive Operational Active when the drive is ready or RUN command is ON J Master Frequency Active when the AC motor drive reaches the output Attained frequency setting Active when Command Frequency is lower than the 3 Zero Speed Minimum Output Frequency i Active as long as over torque is detected Refer to Pr 06 03 4 Over Torque Detection Pr 06 05 Active when the output of the AC motor drive is shut off Baseblock B B 5 during baseblock Base block can be forced by Multi Indication function input setting 09 6 Low Voltage Indication Active when low voltage Lv is detected 7 Operation Mode Active when operation command is controlled by external Indication terminal Active when a fault occurs oc ov oH oL oL1 EF cF3 8 Fault Indication HPF ocA ocd ocn GFF 4 168 Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Settings Function Description Desired Frequency 9 Active when the
359. wer than Pr 06 02 setting rated current X 5 the drive will accelerate again by Pr 01 09 Pr 01 11 to catch up with the set frequency command value Related parameter Pr 06 03 Over Torque Detection Mode OL2 Revision Jan 2009 06EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 109 Chapter 4 Parameters 6 02 Over Current Detection Level current 06 02 Over Current Stall 06 02 rated current X 5 Prevention during Operation output frequency decrease Output decrease by decel time Frequency Time over current stall prevention during operation Please do not set the over current stall prevention to a small value to prevent over low torque ETE Over Torque Detection Mode OL2 Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Over Torque detection disabled 1 Over Torque detection enabled during constant speed operation After over torque is detected keep running until OL1 or OL occurs 2 Over Torque detection enabled during constant speed operation After over torque is detected stop running 3 Over Torque detection enabled during acceleration After over torque is detected keep running until OL1 or OL occurs 4 Over Torque detection enabled during acceleration After over torque is detected stop running This parameter determines the operation mode of the drive after the over torque OL2 This parameter determines the operation mode of the drive after the over torque OL2 is detected via the foll
360. wing a Check to make sure that the package includes an AC motor drive the User Manual Quick Start and CD Inspect the unit to assure it was not damaged during shipment Make sure that the part number indicated on the nameplate corresponds with the part number of your order 1 1 1 Nameplate Information Example for 1HP 0 75kW 3 phase 230V AC motor drive AC Drive Model MopEL VFD007E23A Input Spec INPUT 3PH 200 240V 50 60Hz 5 4A Output Spec OUTPUT 3PH 0 240V 4 2A 1 6kVA 0 75kW 1HP Output Frequency Range FREQUENCY RANGE 0 1 400Hz SerialNumber amp 01 03 7E23A0T 8011230 i PowerBoard Software Version control Board 02 03 1 1 2 Model Explanation A Standard drive VFD 007 E 23 A C CANopen L P Cold plate drive frame A only Version T FrameA built in brake chopper Mains Input Voltage 11 115V Single phase 21 230V Single phase 23 230V Three phase 43 460V Three phase E Series Applicable motor capacity 002 0 25 HP 0 2kW 037 5 HP 3 7kW 185 25 HP 18 5kW 004 0 5 HP 0 4kW 055 7 5 HP 5 5kW 220 30 HP 22kW 007 1 HP 0 75kW 075 10 HP 7 5kW 015 2 HP 1 5kW 150 20 HPU SRW 022 3 HP 2 2kW 150 20 HP 15k Series Name Variable Frequency Drive 1 2 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 3 Series Number Explanation 007E23A OT 8 01 1230 Production number Production week Production year 20
361. word Input Unit 1 Settings 0 to 9999 Factory Setting 0 Display 0 2 times of wrong password Ea The function of this parameter is to input the password that is set in Pr 00 09 Input the correct password here to enable changing parameters You are limited to a maximum of 3 attempts Revision Jan 2009 06 SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 4 41 Chapter 4 Parameters After consecutive failed attempts a blinking codE will show up to force the user to restart the AC motor drive in order to try again to input the correct password Related parameter 00 09 Password Set 00 08 input password Y Password Decode Flow Chart If the password is correct Y Displays 0 when chances to enter the correct entering correct password password into 1sttime displays 1 if Pr 00 08 password is incorrect 2ndtime displays 2 if password is incorrect END 3rd time displays code blinking If the password was entered incorrectly after three tries the keypad will be locked Turn the power OFF ON to re enter the password NT Password Set Unit 1 Settings 0 to 9999 Factory Setting 0 Display 0 No password set or successful input in Pr 00 08 1 Password has been set To set a password to protect your parameter settings If the display shows 0 no password is set or password has been correctly entered in Pr 00 08 All parameters can then be changed including Pr
362. y trigger the protection Pr 06 01 Over Current Stall Prevention during Accel or Pr 06 00 Over Voltage Stall Prevention and make the actual acceleration deceleration time be larger than this setting LL If the setting of the acceleration time is too short it may cause over current during acceleration and damage the motor or trigger the protection function If the setting of the deceleration time is too short it may cause over current during deceleration or over voltage of the AC motor drive and damage the motor or trigger the protection function It can use suitable brake resistor to decelerate the AC motor drive in short time and prevent internal over voltage Refer to Appendix B for brake resistor When enabling Pr 01 17 Acceleration S Curve and Pr 01 18 Deceleration S Curve the actual acceleration deceleration time will be longer than the setting 4 50 Revision Jan 2009 O6EE SW PW V1 12 CTL V2 12 Chapter 4 Parameters Ea Related parameters Pr 01 16 Auto acceleration deceleration refer to Accel Decel time setting Pr 01 17 Acceleration S Curve Pr 01 18 Deceleration S Curve Pr 04 05 Multi function Input Terminal MI3 Pr 04 06 Multi function Input Terminal MI4 Pr 04 07 Multi function Input Terminal MI5 and Pr 04 08 Multi function Input Terminal MI6 01 00 Frequency Max output Frequency setting operation frequency 01 05 Min output lime

"user manual"

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

&quot;user manual&quot;

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

"user manual"